Thrane and Thrane A S AVIATOR Satellite transceiver for Inmarsat Swift Broadband service User Manual

Thrane & Thrane A/S Satellite transceiver for Inmarsat Swift Broadband service

Contents

Installations Manual

AVIATOR 200/300/350Installation manual98-127093-G Cover_Installation manual AVIATOR 200-300-350.indd 1 03-07-2013 15:19:18
98-127093-G Cover_Installation manual AVIATOR 200-300-350.indd 2 03-07-2013 15:19:18
AVIATOR 200/300/350Document number: 98-127093-HRelease date: 5 September 2017Installation & maintenance manualSB-Lite.book Page i Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
ii 98-127093-HDisclaimerInformation in this document is subject to change without notice.The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein do not represent any specific Supplemental Type Certificate (STC). It is the installer's responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC package.The newest versions of Cobham SATCOM user and installation manuals as well as outline drawings can be downloaded from www.cobham.com/satcom, Cobham SYNC Partner Portal. Some material and features are for partners only and can only be accessed after login with a password.Thrane & Thrane A/S is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source. In the event of any discrepancies, the English version shall be the governing text.Thrane & Thrane A/S is trading as Cobham SATCOM. Copyright© 2017 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved. Printed in Denmark.Trademark Acknowledgements•Inmarsat is a registered trademark of the International Maritime Satellite Organization (IMSO) and is licensed by IMSO to Inmarsat Limited and Inmarsat Ventures plc. • Inmarsat’s product names are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Inmarsat.•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.• Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.Company web site www.cobham.com/satcomDisposalOld electrical and electronic equipment marked with this symbol can contain substances hazardous to human beings and the environment. Never dispose these items together with unsorted municipal waste (household waste). In order to protect the environment and ensure the correct recycling of old equipment as well as the re-utilization of individual components, use either public collection or private collection by the local distributor of old electrical and electronic equipment marked with this symbol. Contact the local distributor for information about what type of return system to use.SB-Lite.book Page ii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H iiiRecord of revisionsRev. Description Release Date InitialsA Original document 12 March 2008 CCB General update to version B. 25 September 2008UFOC Configuration of interfaces and network management added. Specifications and DO-160 string of the HLD updated. Editorials.28 November 2008UFOD Page iii: Disposal addedThe following chapters have been added: 6.7.7The following chapters have been edited: 2.1.1, 2.3.4, 5.1.2, 5.2.2-5.2.4, 5.3.3, 5.3.4, 5.3.6, 5.3.7, 5.3.10, 5.4.3, 5.4.5 - 5.4.7, 6.2.2, 6.5, 6.6.1, 6.6.3 - 6.6.5, 6.6.8 - 6.6.13, 6.7.7, 6.8.7, 7.4.2, 7.5.4, 7.7The following appendices have been added: E, FThe following tables have been added: 5-12, 6-3, 6-4The following tables have been edited: 2-1, 2-3, 2-5, 4-3, 5-21, 5-22, 5-28, B-1, B-2, B-3,The following figures have been added: 2-3, 2-4, 3-7, 5-6, 5-9, 7-5The following figures have been edited: 3-10, 3-11, 5-16, 6-2, 6-527 May 2009 UFOE AVIATOR 200 added. The AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350 replace the earlier Thrane & Thrane Aero-SB Lite system. The following chapters have been added: 5.3.5, 6.5.10, 6.5.15, 6.6.8, 6.7.5, 6.7.10, 6.7.11, 6.7.12, A.2.5, B.2.4, Appendix C, Appendix G. The following chapters have been edited: 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 4.1.3, 4.4.1, 5.2.4, 5.3.2, 5.3.4, 5.3.7, 5.3.11, 5.4.4, 5.5, 6.2.2, 6.3.4, 6.4, 6.6.1, 6.6.4, 6.5.8, 6.5.12, 6.5.12, 6.5.13, 6.5.14, 6.6.6, 6.6.7, 6.7.2, 6.10, 7.2.2, 7.2.3, 7.4 (reorganized), A.1.1 removed, E.1, The following tables have been added: 5-7 The following tables have been edited: 2-3, 5-6, 5-28, A-1, F-1, F-2. The following figures have been added: 3-3, 3-5, 3-10, 3-11, 3-13, 3-14, 5-4. The following figures have been edited: 4-3, 5-1, 6-2, 6-4, 6-23, 6-30, 6-33, 6-46, 6-48, 6-49, 6-54, 6-56, 6-58, 7-3, F-2. The section “Using the Call log” has been moved to the user manual.29 July 2010 UFOSB-Lite.book Page iii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
iv 98-127093-HF The following chapters have been added: 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.5.9, 6.6.9, 6.7.1, The following chapters have been edited: 1.1, 2.1, 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 3.1, 3.10, 5.2.5, 5.3.7, 5.4.6, 6.3.2, 6.5.4, 6.7.2, 7.1.1, 7.3, A-3, B.2.1, B.3, B.3.1, H.1.2.The following tables have been edited: 1-1, 2-3, 2-7, 5-1, 5-6, 5-9,5-29, 6-3, A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4, A-5, A-6, A-7,The following figures have been edited: 2-1, 3-1, 3-4, 5-1, 6-9, 6-10, 6-28, 6-30, 6-34.16 March 2012 UFOG The following sections have been added: 6.5.15, 6.7.14, 7.4The following sections have been edited: 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.3.1, 2.3.3, 5.2.3, 5.3.4, 5.3.5, 5.3.9, 6.4.2, 6.5.5, 6.5.6, 6.5.8, 6.5.16, 6.72, 6.7.10, 7.3.1The following tables have been edited: 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 4-3, 5-1, 5-12, 5-13, 6-3, 7-4, A-1, C-1, F-2The following figures have been added: 5-12, 5-5, 6-8, 6-13The following figures have been edited: 2-2, 3-2, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7,5-8, 5-9, 5-10, 5-11, 5-14, 6-32, 6-34, 6-7327 March 2014 UFOH The following sections have been added: 2.1.1 (p. 2-4 +2-5), 5.3.14, 6.5.18, 6.7.13, 7.3The following sections have been edited: 2.1.2, 5.3.1, 4.1.3 (p. 4-5), 5.3. (p. 5-14), 5.3.3 (p. 5-17), 5.3.7, 5.3.8, 5.3.9, 6.5.4, 6.5.5, 6.5.6, 6.5.9, 6.5.11, 6.5.10, 6.5.14 (p. 6-47), 6.5.15, 6.5.16, 6.7, 6.7.15, 7.2.2, 7.6, F.3.1, H.1.2The following tables have been added: 2-3, 2-4, 2-6, F-1The following tables have been edited: 2-5, 2-9, 2-11, 4-2, 4-5, 5-1, 5-19, 5-32, 7-4, A-1, C-1The following figures have been added: 5-10, 6-31The following figures have been edited: 3-2, 3-12, 3-14, 3-15,6-37,6-795 September 2017UFOSB-Lite.book Page iv Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H vTable of contentsChapter 1 About this manual1.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................................................1-11.2 Organization .........................................................................................................................1-11.3 Related documentation ...............................................................................................1-21.4 Precautions: Warnings, Cautions and Notes ................................................1-2Chapter 2 Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/3502.1 General description .........................................................................................................2-12.1.1 The AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ..........................................................................2-12.1.2 AVIATOR 200/300/350 features .................................................................................2-72.2 Application ............................................................................................................................2-92.2.1 Minimum system .................................................................................................................2-92.2.2 Part numbers .........................................................................................................................2-92.2.3 Applicable external units ..............................................................................................2-122.3 System block diagrams .............................................................................................2-142.3.1 AVIATOR 200 system with LGA-3000 antenna ................................................2-142.3.2 AVIATOR 300 system with TT-5006A IGA antenna ......................................2-152.3.3 AVIATOR 350 system with Cobham antennas ..................................................2-162.3.4 AVIATOR 350 system with ARINC-741/781 antennas .................................2-172.3.5 AVIATOR 350D system with ACARS option and ARINC-741/781 ant. .2-182.3.6 User interfaces ...................................................................................................................2-19Chapter 3 Equipment drawings3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................3-13.2 TT-5040A SBU .....................................................................................................................3-23.2.1 TT-5040A-001 CM (inserted in the SBU) ...............................................................3-33.3 TT-5038A-003 Rx Power Splitter .........................................................................3-43.4 TT-5016A HLD .....................................................................................................................3-53.5 TT-3002A LGA .....................................................................................................................3-63.6 TT-5006A IGA .....................................................................................................................3-73.7 TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset .........................................................................................3-83.8 TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle ..............................................................................................3-93.9 SBU trays ..............................................................................................................................3-103.10 SBU tray connector .....................................................................................................3-133.11 Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 special .......................................3-14SB-Lite.book Page v Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contentsvi 98-127093-H3.12 TT-5040A-004 WLAN antenna ............................................................................3-163.13 Switch Annunciator Panel ......................................................................................3-17Chapter 4 Connectors and pin-out4.1 TT-5040A SBU .....................................................................................................................4-14.1.1 Connectors on SBU ............................................................................................................4-14.1.2 SBU Maintenance connector ........................................................................................4-14.1.3 SBU rear receptacle ............................................................................................................4-34.2 TT-5016A HLD .....................................................................................................................4-94.2.1 Connectors on HLD ............................................................................................................4-94.3 TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle ...........................................................................................4-104.3.1 Connectors on 2-Wire Cradle ....................................................................................4-104.3.2 2-Wire Cradle connector to SBU ..............................................................................4-114.4 Mating connectors in aircraft ..............................................................................4-124.4.1 Connection with SBU .....................................................................................................4-12Chapter 5 Installation5.1 General installation information ..........................................................................5-15.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................5-15.1.2 Minimum system components .....................................................................................5-25.2 Mounting considerations ...........................................................................................5-35.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................5-35.2.2 TT-5040A SBU .....................................................................................................................5-35.2.3 TT-5016A HLD .....................................................................................................................5-35.2.4 Satcom antenna ...................................................................................................................5-45.2.5 TT-5040A-004 WLAN antennas ..................................................................................5-7SB-Lite.book Page vi Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contents98-127093-H vii5.3 Electrical installation and wiring ..........................................................................5-85.3.1 Wiring symbols .....................................................................................................................5-85.3.2 Wiring power supply ..........................................................................................................5-95.3.3 Wiring the satcom antenna .........................................................................................5-105.3.4 Wiring ARINC 429 interfaces .....................................................................................5-255.3.5 Wiring GPS interface .......................................................................................................5-295.3.6 Wiring Ethernet .................................................................................................................5-315.3.7 Wiring WLAN antenna interface ...............................................................................5-345.3.8 Wiring ISDN ........................................................................................................................5-365.3.9 Wiring telephone systems ...........................................................................................5-375.3.10 Wiring Sigma7 (2-wire) handsets ..............................................................................5-405.3.11 Wiring ICG DECT Cordless Handset (2-wire) phone .......................................5-415.3.12 Wiring discretes ................................................................................................................5-425.3.13 Wiring the Switch Annunciator Panel ....................................................................5-445.3.14 Wiring an SB-Safety Voice Annunciator Panel ..................................................5-455.3.15 Wiring the maintenance interface ...........................................................................5-455.4 Recommended cables ................................................................................................5-475.4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................5-475.4.2 Power cables, allowed cable lengths .......................................................................5-475.4.3 Recommended Power cables .....................................................................................5-485.4.4 Recommended RF cables .............................................................................................5-485.4.5 Recommended cables for ARINC 429 ...................................................................5-495.4.6 Recommended cables for Ethernet .........................................................................5-495.4.7 Cables for Discrete Signals ...........................................................................................5-505.5 Activation of airtime services ..............................................................................5-50Chapter 6 Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system6.1 Configuration tasks ........................................................................................................6-26.1.1 Basic configuration of the SBU ....................................................................................6-26.2 Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface ..........................................6-66.2.1 Topics in the web interface ............................................................................................6-76.2.2 Check the connection to the web interface ..........................................................6-76.3 The Dashboard .................................................................................................................6-126.3.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................6-126.3.2 Properties .............................................................................................................................6-126.3.3 View information on calls and data sessions ......................................................6-136.3.4 Profiles on the dashboard ............................................................................................6-146.4 The phone book ..............................................................................................................6-156.4.1 General usage .....................................................................................................................6-156.4.2 View and edit the mobile and additional numbers ..........................................6-15SB-Lite.book Page vii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contentsviii 98-127093-H6.5 To set up the interfaces ...........................................................................................6-176.5.1 The SETTINGS page ........................................................................................................6-176.5.2 Select the preferred BGAN satellite .........................................................................6-186.5.3 Configure the LAN interface .......................................................................................6-196.5.4 WLAN interface (option) ..............................................................................................6-226.5.5 Configure the Phone/Fax interface (2-Wire) ......................................................6-246.5.6 Configure the ISDN interface .....................................................................................6-256.5.7 Set the common interface settings .........................................................................6-276.5.8 Set up call services ...........................................................................................................6-286.5.9 Manage AVIATOR Wireless Handsets ....................................................................6-346.5.10 Configure the discrete I/O interfaces .....................................................................6-376.5.11 Set the system type ........................................................................................................6-396.5.12 Configure RF settings .....................................................................................................6-436.5.13 Set up the navigational input .....................................................................................6-446.5.14 Calibrate the NRS magnetometer in the TT-5006A IGA ..............................6-466.5.15 Set up CMU/ACARS (option) ......................................................................................6-516.5.16 Enable system options with FLEX keys ..................................................................6-536.5.17 Tracking ................................................................................................................................6-546.5.18 SB-Safety Voice (option) ..............................................................................................6-556.6 LAN/WLAN network users .......................................................................................6-576.6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................6-576.6.2 Set up the network user groups ................................................................................6-596.6.3 Manage network devices ..............................................................................................6-626.6.4 The network classification table ...............................................................................6-636.6.5 Definitions for network terms ....................................................................................6-656.6.6 NAT (Network Address Translation) ......................................................................6-666.6.7 Start and stop any data session ................................................................................6-666.6.8 Establish a PPPoE connection ....................................................................................6-676.6.9 To set up static routing .................................................................................................6-706.6.10 SNMP interface .................................................................................................................6-71SB-Lite.book Page viii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contents98-127093-H ix6.7 Administration .................................................................................................................6-716.7.1 Protect the SBU against unintended configuration changes ......................6-716.7.2 Access the administration settings ..........................................................................6-726.7.3 Save and load a configuration ...................................................................................6-756.7.4 Call charges .........................................................................................................................6-776.7.5 Log handling .......................................................................................................................6-786.7.6 Data limits ............................................................................................................................6-786.7.7 To use profiles ...................................................................................................................6-786.7.8 To use traffic flow filters ..............................................................................................6-826.7.9 SIM card access protection: SIM PIN and SIM Lock ......................................6-856.7.10 Set up user permissions .................................................................................................6-876.7.11 Remote management .....................................................................................................6-896.7.12 Remote activation of a connection using SMS .................................................6-906.7.13 Link monitoring (SwiftBroadband only) ................................................................6-906.7.14 Restricted dialing ..............................................................................................................6-916.7.15 Multi-voice (option) ........................................................................................................6-916.8 Site map ................................................................................................................................6-986.9 Configuration of 3rd party phone systems ...............................................6-996.9.1 Sigma7 setup .......................................................................................................................6-996.9.2 ICG DECT Cordless Handset setup ..........................................................................6-996.10 AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ready for use ......................................6-100Chapter 7 Maintenance and troubleshooting7.1 Continued Airworthiness ............................................................................................7-17.1.1 General .....................................................................................................................................7-17.1.2 Instructions ............................................................................................................................7-17.2 Get support: HELPDESK ...............................................................................................7-37.2.1 Airtime support ....................................................................................................................7-37.2.2 System support ....................................................................................................................7-37.2.3 Help desk and diagnostic report ..................................................................................7-37.3 Software update ................................................................................................................7-57.3.1 SBU software update .........................................................................................................7-67.3.2 Verify the software update ............................................................................................7-87.4 To exchange LRUs ............................................................................................................7-97.4.1 Time consumption .............................................................................................................7-97.4.2 Tools ..........................................................................................................................................7-97.4.3 Removal and re-installation of the SBU ...................................................................7-9SB-Lite.book Page ix Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contentsx 98-127093-H7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................7-117.5.1 Status signalling ................................................................................................................7-117.5.2 Status signalling with LEDs ..........................................................................................7-127.5.3 IP Reset (Default) button ..............................................................................................7-147.5.4 View the Event list, Event log and extended status .......................................7-167.5.5 Self test .................................................................................................................................7-177.5.6 Initial troubleshooting ...................................................................................................7-187.6 Return units for repair ...............................................................................................7-197.7 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment ..................................7-20AppendicesAppendix A Equipment specificationsA.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ A-1A.2 AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components ............................................. A-2A.2.1 TT-5040A SwiftBroadband Unit (SBU) ................................................................... A-2A.2.2 TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module (CM) for SBU ....................................... A-3A.2.3 TT-5016A High Power Amp./Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD) ............ A-4A.2.4 TT-5040A-004 WLAN antenna ................................................................................... A-5A.2.5 TT-5038A-003 Rx Power Splitter ............................................................................... A-5A.3 AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradles ........................................... A-7A.3.1 TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset ............................................................................................ A-7A.3.2 TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle ................................................................................................ A-7Appendix B DO-160 specificationsB.1 General ......................................................................................................................................B-1B.1.1 Certifying agency ................................................................................................................B-1B.1.2 Environmental Qualification Forms ............................................................................B-1B.2 AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components ..............................................B-2B.2.1 SwiftBroadband unit (SBU) ............................................................................................B-2B.2.2 Configuration Module (CM) for SBU .........................................................................B-4B.2.3 High Power Amplifier/Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD) ............................B-4B.2.4 Rx Power Splitter .................................................................................................................B-6B.3 AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradles ............................................B-8B.3.1 2-Wire Handset and 2-Wire Cradle ............................................................................B-8Appendix C System messagesC.1 Types of messages .......................................................................................................... C-1C.2 List of events ...................................................................................................................... C-2SB-Lite.book Page x Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contents98-127093-H xiAppendix D WLAN country codesD.1 Restrictions in WLAN use ..........................................................................................D-1D.2 Countries where the “US” country code applies .....................................D-2Appendix E ReferencesE.1 Applicable standards .....................................................................................................E-1Appendix F TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject FilterF.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................F-1F.1.1 System block diagram .......................................................................................................F-1F.2 Equipment drawing .........................................................................................................F-2F.3 Installation ............................................................................................................................F-3F.3.1 Mounting considerations ................................................................................................F-3F.3.2 Electrical installation and wiring ..................................................................................F-4F.4 Configuration .......................................................................................................................F-4F.5 Specifications ......................................................................................................................F-4F.6 DO-160 specifications ...................................................................................................F-5Appendix G Terminal commandsG.1 Get started ............................................................................................................................ G-1G.1.1 Connect to the SBU .......................................................................................................... G-1G.2 Commands for troubleshooting the SBU ...................................................... G-2G.2.1 Monitor the ARINC interfaces on the SBU ............................................................G-2G.2.2 Description of the status report .................................................................................. G-3Appendix H SIP setup for Wifi-enabled phonesH.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................H-1H.1.1 Connect to the WLAN interface .................................................................................H-1H.1.2 Set up a SIP profile ............................................................................................................H-1Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................................Glossary-1Index ................................................................................................................................................................... Index-1SB-Lite.book Page xi Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table of contentsxii 98-127093-HSB-Lite.book Page xii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H xiiiList of figuresFigure 2-1: Communication devices for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system (example for a Level E system) 2-2Figure 2-2: System configuration with LGA-3000 antenna...............................................................................2-14Figure 2-3: System configuration with TT-5006A IGA antenna.....................................................................2-15Figure 2-4: System configuration with Cobham antennas.................................................................................2-16Figure 2-5: System configuration ARINC 429 antennas.....................................................................................2-17Figure 2-6: System configuration ARINC 429 antennas.....................................................................................2-18Figure 2-7: AVIATOR 200/300/350 interfaces ........................................................................................................2-19Figure 3-1: Outline drawing: TT-5040A SBU................................................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2: Outline drawing: TT-5040A-001 CM, inserted in the SBU............................................................3-3Figure 3-3: Outline Drawing: Rx Power Splitter...........................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4: Outline drawing: TT-5016A HLD................................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-5: Outline drawing: TT-3002A LGA................................................................................................................3-6Figure 3-6: Outline drawing: TT-5006A IGA antenna..............................................................................................3-7Figure 3-7: Outline drawing: TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset........................................................................................3-8Figure 3-8: Outline drawing: TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle............................................................................................3-9Figure 3-9: Outline drawing: SBU tray: ECS PO299-101......................................................................................3-10Figure 3-10: Outline drawing: SBU tray: EMTEQ MT4-2346-101 (page 1)...................................................3-11Figure 3-11: Outline drawing: SBU tray: EMTEQ MT4-2346-101 (page 2)...................................................3-12Figure 3-12: Outline drawing: SBU tray connector: ITT Cannon DPX2NA-67322-606..........................3-13Figure 3-13: Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 special: ITT Cannon 244-0011-001.....................3-14Figure 3-14: Outline drawing: TT-5040A-004 WLAN antenna ...........................................................................3-16Figure 3-15: Outline drawing: Switch Annunciator panel ......................................................................................3-17Figure 4-1: SBU Maintenance connector, face view of engaging end ............................................................4-1Figure 4-2: SBU rear receptacle, engaging end (Index code: 19).......................................................................4-3Figure 4-3: SBU rear receptacle with pin functions ..................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-4: TT-5016A HLD connector panel................................................................................................................4-9Figure 4-5: 2-Wire Cradle connectors, end view of cradle.................................................................................4-10Figure 4-6: TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle connectors, side view of cradle..........................................................4-10Figure 4-7: 2-Wire Cradle connector (DB9M). View: Solder side ....................................................................4-11Figure 5-1: AVIATOR 200 minimum system (example with LGA TT-3002A and GPS antenna)........5-2Figure 5-2: Mounting two WLAN antennas for optimum performance.........................................................5-7Figure 5-3: Wiring SBU power supply..............................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-4: Wiring TT-3002A LGA/LGA-3000 ..........................................................................................................5-11Figure 5-5: Wiring TT-5006A IGA or IGA-5001......................................................................................................5-12Figure 5-6: Wiring HGA-6000...........................................................................................................................................5-13Figure 5-7: Wiring HGA-6500 Antenna (Variation 2, label at antenna plug: 1 and 2)...........................5-14Figure 5-8: Wiring HGA-6500 Antenna (Variation 3 label at antenna plug: Y and S)............................5-15Figure 5-9: Wiring HGA-7001...........................................................................................................................................5-16SB-Lite.book Page xiii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of figuresxiv 98-127093-HFigure 5-10: Wiring HGA-7001 with AIS 380 Aircraft Interface Module......................................................5-17Figure 5-11: Wiring AMT-50................................................................................................................................................5-18Figure 5-12: Wiring AMT-700.............................................................................................................................................5-19Figure 5-13: Wiring AMT-3500/3800.............................................................................................................................5-20Figure 5-14: Wiring IGA-5001. HGA-7000 and HGA-8000..................................................................................5-21Figure 5-15: Wiring CMA-2102/CMA-2102SB...........................................................................................................5-22Figure 5-16: Wiring ARINC 429 navigational input..................................................................................................5-25Figure 5-17: Wiring the CMU ..............................................................................................................................................5-28Figure 5-18: Wiring GPS Interface with Power Splitter...........................................................................................5-29Figure 5-19: Wiring Ethernet ...............................................................................................................................................5-31Figure 5-20: Ethernet pin configuration for SBU.......................................................................................................5-33Figure 5-21: Wiring WLAN antenna interfaces #1 and #2....................................................................................5-34Figure 5-22: Wiring ISDN interface..................................................................................................................................5-36Figure 5-23: ISDN RJ45 connector ...................................................................................................................................5-37Figure 5-24: Handset interfaces with possible combinations of connected devices...............................5-39Figure 5-25: Wiring T&T 2-Wire Handset systems ...................................................................................................5-39Figure 5-26: Wiring Sigma7 handsets..............................................................................................................................5-40Figure 5-27: Wiring ICG DECT Cordless Handset handsets..................................................................................5-41Figure 5-28: Wiring discretes...............................................................................................................................................5-42Figure 5-29: Wiring the Switch Annunciator Panel MD-41-1948 .....................................................................5-44Figure 5-30: Wiring Maintenance PC and Reset.........................................................................................................5-46Figure 6-1: Line of sight when communicating with the satellite......................................................................6-1Figure 6-2: Basic configuration of the SBU (AVIATOR 300 example), step 1/6.........................................6-2Figure 6-3: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 2/6...............................................................................................6-2Figure 6-5: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 3/6...............................................................................................6-3Figure 6-4: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 2/6...............................................................................................6-3Figure 6-6: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 4/6...............................................................................................6-4Figure 6-7: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 5/6...............................................................................................6-4Figure 6-8: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 6/6...............................................................................................6-5Figure 6-9: Topics in the web interface..........................................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-10: Sections of the web interface (example for AVIATOR 350)........................................................6-8Figure 6-11: Web interface: Dashboard (Example: AVIATOR 350) .................................................................6-12Figure 6-12: Web interface: Start a data connection ..............................................................................................6-14Figure 6-13: Web interface: Phone book, mobile numbers (example, no Multi-voice)...........................6-15Figure 6-14: Web interface: Phone book, mobile numbers (example, with Multi-voice).......................6-16Figure 6-15: Web interface: Settings, satellite selection........................................................................................6-18Figure 6-16: SBU IP addresses: Local and global IP addresses, default...........................................................6-19Figure 6-17: Web interface: Settings, LAN....................................................................................................................6-20Figure 6-18: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Port forwarding ................................................................................6-21Figure 6-19: Web interface: Settings, WLAN (Example: AVIATOR 350) ........................................................6-22Figure 6-20: Web interface: Settings, Phone/Fax ......................................................................................................6-24SB-Lite.book Page xiv Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of figures98-127093-H xvFigure 6-21: Web interface: Settings, ISDN..................................................................................................................6-25Figure 6-22: Web interface: Settings, Common.........................................................................................................6-27Figure 6-23: Web interface: Settings, Common, Call forward .............................................................................6-29Figure 6-24: Web interface: Settings, Common, Call barring...............................................................................6-30Figure 6-25: Web interface: Settings, Common, Call waiting ..............................................................................6-31Figure 6-26: Web interface: Settings, Common, Line identification ................................................................6-32Figure 6-27: Web interface: Settings, Common, Closed user group.................................................................6-33Figure 6-28: Web interface: Settings, IP handsets ....................................................................................................6-35Figure 6-29: Web interface: Settings, IP handsets, Call settings ........................................................................6-36Figure 6-30: Web interface: Settings, Discrete I/O (without SB-Safety Voice)...........................................6-38Figure 6-31: Web interface: Settings, Discrete I/O (with SB-Safety Voice) ..................................................6-39Figure 6-32: Web interface: Settings, System type ..................................................................................................6-40Figure 6-33: Web interface: Settings, RF settings......................................................................................................6-43Figure 6-34: Web interface: Settings, External systems (AVIATOR 350 with TT-5006 antenna) .....6-45Figure 6-35: Web interface: Settings, External systems, Magnetometer Calibration...............................6-47Figure 6-36: Web interface: CMU/ACARS.....................................................................................................................6-52Figure 6-37: Web interface: Settings, FLEX (example) ............................................................................................6-53Figure 6-38: Web interface, Settings, Tracking...........................................................................................................6-54Figure 6-39: Web interface, DASHBOARD software version 4.00.....................................................................6-55Figure 6-40: Web interface, SETTINGS, Flex key, software version 4.00 ......................................................6-55Figure 6-41: Web interface, SETTINGS, System Type, software version 4.00............................................6-56Figure 6-42: Overview over network user groups and traffic flow filters.......................................................6-57Figure 6-43: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network user groups......................................................................6-59Figure 6-44: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network user groups, Edit............................................................6-60Figure 6-45: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network devices...............................................................................6-62Figure 6-46: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network classification table .......................................................6-64Figure 6-47: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network classification table, Edit or Add .............................6-64Figure 6-48: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network classification table, change priority.....................6-65Figure 6-49: NAT (Network Address Translation)......................................................................................................6-66Figure 6-50: Web interface: Connect, to start and stop data sessions (example) .....................................6-66Figure 6-51: Example for PPPoE connections .............................................................................................................6-67Figure 6-52: Web interface, Settings, LAN, PPPoE.....................................................................................................6-68Figure 6-53: Web interface, Settings, LAN, Static route.........................................................................................6-70Figure 6-54: Web interface, Settings, LAN, Static route, add...............................................................................6-70Figure 6-55: Web interface: Administration.................................................................................................................6-72Figure 6-56: Web interface: Administration, change administrator logon....................................................6-73Figure 6-57: Web interface: Administration, Reset administrator password................................................6-74Figure 6-58: Web interface: Administration, saving a configuration file .......................................................6-75Figure 6-59: Web interface: Administration, saving a configuration file .......................................................6-76Figure 6-60: Web interface: Administration, Call Charges ....................................................................................6-77Figure 6-61: Web interface: Administration, Log Handling...................................................................................6-78SB-Lite.book Page xv Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of figuresxvi 98-127093-HFigure 6-62: Web interface, Administration, Profiles, Example: Standard.....................................................6-79Figure 6-63: Web interface. Administration, Profiles, select profile (Example AVIATOR 350) ...........6-80Figure 6-64: Traffic flow filters to filter traffic types...............................................................................................6-82Figure 6-65: Web interface: Administration, Traffic flow filters.........................................................................6-83Figure 6-66: Web interface: Administration, Traffic flow filters, New entry ................................................6-83Figure 6-67: Web interface: Example of two traffic flow filters.........................................................................6-84Figure 6-68: Web interface, Administration, SIM PIN.............................................................................................6-85Figure 6-69: Web interface, Administration, SIM LOCK.........................................................................................6-86Figure 6-70: Web interface: Administration, User permissions ..........................................................................6-87Figure 6-71: Web interface: Administration, Remote management ................................................................6-89Figure 6-72: Web interface: Administration, Link monitoring.............................................................................6-90Figure 6-73: Multi-voice, call type groups (example) ..............................................................................................6-93Figure 6-74: Multi-voice, example of directly assigned handsets (example)...............................................6-93Figure 6-75: Multi-voice, example of unassigned handsets .................................................................................6-94Figure 6-76: Multi-voice, example for a configuration with Cockpit reserve. .............................................6-94Figure 6-77: Web interface: Administration, Multi-voice ......................................................................................6-95Figure 6-78: Web interface: Phone book, mobile numbers (example, Multi-voice) .................................6-96Figure 6-79: Web interface: Settings, IP handsets, Call settings (with Multi-voice, example).............6-97Figure 6-80: Web interface: Site map..............................................................................................................................6-98Figure 6-81: AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ...........................................................................................................6-100Figure 7-1: Web interface: Help desk...............................................................................................................................7-3Figure 7-2: Web interface: Help desk, Extended status...........................................................................................7-4Figure 7-3: Web interface: Settings, Upload ................................................................................................................7-7Figure 7-4: Software identification on the SBU label, Level D and Level E....................................................7-8Figure 7-5: Exchanging an LRU (example).....................................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-6: Pull out the LRU...............................................................................................................................................7-10Figure 7-7: Attach CM to the airframe.........................................................................................................................7-10Figure 7-8: Function of the LEDs on the front maintenance connector .....................................................7-13Figure 7-9: IP Reset (Default) button on SBU front...............................................................................................7-14Figure 7-10: Web interface: Help desk, Event list ......................................................................................................7-16Figure 7-11: Web interface: Help desk, Self test ........................................................................................................7-17Figure F-1: System configuration with TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter (1)......................................F-1Figure F-2: Outline drawing: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter................................................................... F-2Figure F-3: Wiring TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter .......................................................................................F-3SB-Lite.book Page xvi Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H xviiList of tablesTable 1-1: List of Related Documentation...................................................................................................................1-2Table 2-1: SwiftBroadband services for supported antenna types..................................................................2-3Table 2-2: Satcom antenna types for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ................................................2-4Table 2-3: Priorities for SATVOICE calls (SB-Safety Voice).................................................................................2-6Table 2-4: Available features for software versions (Level D) ............................................................................2-8Table 2-5: Part numbers........................................................................................................................................................2-9Table 2-6: Part numbers for configuration modules and options .................................................................2-10Table 2-7: Part numbers for Klixon circuit breaker ...............................................................................................2-11Table 2-8: Part number for connector........................................................................................................................2-12Table 2-9: Installation kits, contact information ...................................................................................................2-12Table 2-10: Basic installation kits from ECS for the SBU......................................................................................2-12Table 2-11: List of applicable external units...............................................................................................................2-12Table 2-12: AVIATOR 200/300/350 user interfaces..............................................................................................2-19Table 4-1: Pin-out for SBU Maintenance connector (standard Ethernet)....................................................4-2Table 4-2: Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle, top plug..............................................................................................4-7Table 4-3: Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle, bottom plug .....................................................................................4-8Table 4-4: Pin-out for 9 pin Sub-D male connector in TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle ..................................4-11Table 4-5: Mating connectors in aircraft for SBU .................................................................................................4-12Table 5-1: Installation kits, contact information ......................................................................................................5-1Table 5-2: Navigational input for satcom antennas................................................................................................5-4Table 5-3: Wiring symbols...................................................................................................................................................5-8Table 5-4: Pins for SBU power supply............................................................................................................................5-9Table 5-5: Requirements to SBU power cables ......................................................................................................5-10Table 5-6: SBU pins for satcom antenna system...................................................................................................5-23Table 5-7: HLD connectors for satcom antenna system ...................................................................................5-23Table 5-8: RF cable requirements for satcom antenna systems, AVIATOR 200....................................5-23Table 5-9: RF cable requirements for satcom antenna systems, AVIATOR 300/350..........................5-24Table 5-10: SBU pins for input from a navigational ARINC 429 source.......................................................5-25Table 5-11: ARINC data format for IRS ........................................................................................................................5-26Table 5-12: ARINC data format for AHRS....................................................................................................................5-26Table 5-13: ARINC data format for NPI........................................................................................................................5-27Table 5-14: ARINC data format for GNSS....................................................................................................................5-27Table 5-15: SBU pins for input from GPS antenna..................................................................................................5-28Table 5-16: SBU pins for input from GPS antenna..................................................................................................5-30Table 5-17: SBU Pins for 10/100BaseT Ethernet .....................................................................................................5-32Table 5-18: SBU pins for WLAN antenna #1 and #2..............................................................................................5-34Table 5-19: WLAN antenna configuration...................................................................................................................5-35Table 5-20: Cable requirements for WLAN .................................................................................................................5-35Table 5-21: Low pass filter for WLAN, order information....................................................................................5-35Table 5-22: SBU pins for ISDN..........................................................................................................................................5-36Table 5-23: SBU pins for 2-Wire interface ..................................................................................................................5-39Table 5-24: SBU pins for discrete annunciators........................................................................................................5-42Table 5-25: SBU pin for Chime/Lamps Inhibit input...............................................................................................5-43Table 5-26: SBU pins for discrete inputs......................................................................................................................5-43SB-Lite.book Page xvii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of tablesxviii 98-127093-HTable 5-27: Specification of discrete types................................................................................................................5-44Table 5-28: SBU pins for discrete inputs......................................................................................................................5-45Table 5-29: SBU pins for Maintenance interface.....................................................................................................5-46Table 5-30: Allowed lengths for SBU power cables................................................................................................5-47Table 5-31: Allowed lengths for HLD Chassis Ground cable...............................................................................5-48Table 5-32: List of Recommended RF Cables.............................................................................................................5-48Table 5-33: Allowed lengths for WLAN cables..........................................................................................................5-49Table 6-1: Web interface: Icons........................................................................................................................................6-9Table 6-2: Changing the System type, use of Reset button.............................................................................6-41Table 6-3: Navigational input for system types and satcom antennas ......................................................6-44Table 6-4: Evaluation of the magnetometer calibration score.......................................................................6-48Table 6-5: Magnetometer calibration: Error messages at failing Start procedure.................................6-50Table 6-6: Magnetometer calibration: Error messages at failing Stop procedure.................................6-50Table 6-7: Satcom antennas in AVIATOR systems supporting CMU ..........................................................6-51Table 6-8: PPPoE connection, service names and descriptions......................................................................6-69Table 6-9: PPPoE connection, service names and descriptions for custom APN...................................6-69Table 6-10: Multi-voice, number of calls......................................................................................................................6-91Table 7-1: Function of the SBU Power LED..............................................................................................................7-12Table 7-2: Function of the SBU Logon LED..............................................................................................................7-12Table 7-3: Function of the SBU Fail/Pass LED.........................................................................................................7-12Table 7-4: How to reset the IP address or the terminal software to default settings..........................7-15Table 7-5: Initial troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................7-18Table A-1: Equipment specifications for TT-5040A SBU .................................................................................... A-2Table A-2: Equipment specifications for TT-5040A-001 CM............................................................................ A-3Table A-3: Equipment specifications for TT-5016A HLD .................................................................................... A-4Table A-4: Equipment specifications for WLAN antenna .................................................................................... A-5Table A-5: General specifications for Rx Power Splitter....................................................................................... A-5Table A-6: Equipment specifications for 2-Wire Handset................................................................................... A-7Table A-7: Equipment specifications for 2-Wire Cradle....................................................................................... A-7Table B-1: Environmental Qualification Form for SBU ..........................................................................................B-2Table B-2: Environmental Qualification Form for HLD ..........................................................................................B-4Table B-3: RTCA/DO-160D Change Numbers, Tx Coupler and Rx Power Splitter....................................B-6Table B-4: Environmental Qualification Form for Tx Coupler and Rx Power Splitter .............................B-6Table B-5: Environmental Qualification Form for 2-Wire Handset and Cradle..........................................B-8Table C-1: SBU events............................................................................................................................................................C-2Table D-1: Countries that accept the country code “US” for WLAN indoor operation......................... D-2Table F-1: Distance to Iridium........................................................................................................................................... F-4Table F-2: Equipment specifications for TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter ........................................F-4Table F-3: Environmental Qualification Form for Iridium Band Reject Filter .............................................F-5Table G-1: Status ARINC driver, overview ................................................................................................................... G-4Table G-2: Purpose of the states for receivers .......................................................................................................... G-4Table G-3: Purpose of the states for the antenna modem.................................................................................. G-4Table G-4: Status for all mandatory labels on the interface in question...................................................... G-5Table G-5: Status ARINC driver: Source........................................................................................................................ G-5Table G-6: Receiver: Header line for the table........................................................................................................... G-5Table G-7: Status for label types...................................................................................................................................... G-6SB-Lite.book Page xviii Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 1-1Chapter 11111About this manual 11.1 PurposeThe purpose of this manual is to provide information for installation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. This manual covers AVIATOR 200/300/350 and AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D.1.2 OrganizationThe chapters of this Installation Manual provide the following information:•Introduction. A short overview of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system and services.•Equipment Drawings Outline drawings of the units and connectors of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system.•Connectors Drawings and pin-out for the connectors, and a description of the required mating connectors.•Installation Wiring drawings and detailed installation and wiring requirements.•Configuration An introduction to the SwiftBroadband Unit’s web interface, and a description of how to configure the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. A procedure how to calibrate the Satcom antenna and a short description of how to configure some of the 3rd party handsets.•Maintenance and Troubleshooting Descriptions of Airworthiness, help desk, software update, LEDs, BITE test and how to return units for repair. •Appendices Equipment specifications, DO-160 Forms, installation of an Iridium Band Reject Filter, WLAN country codes, SIP setup for Wifi enabled phones and a list of applicable standards.Important The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein do not represent any specific Supplemental Type Certificate (STC). It is the installer's responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC package.SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Related documentation1-2 Chapter 1: About this manual 98-127093-H1.3 Related documentation1.4 Precautions: Warnings, Cautions and NotesText marked with “Warning”, “Caution”, “Note” or “Important” show the following type of data:•Warning: A Warning is an operation or maintenance procedure that, if not obeyed, can cause injury or death, or jeopardize the flight safety on the aircraft. •Caution: A Caution is an operation or maintenance procedure that, if not obeyed, can cause damage to the equipment.•Note: A Note gives information to help the reader.•Important: A text marked Important gives information that is important to the user, e.g. to make the system work properly. This text does not concern damage on equipment, flight safety nor personal safety.General precautionsAll personnel who operate equipment or do maintenance as specified in this manual must know and follow the safety precautions. The warnings and cautions that follow apply to all parts of this manual.Part number Description98-127719 AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual98-127720 AVIATOR 200/300/350 Quick Guide98-129599 AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle User Manual98-129600 AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle Installation & Maintenance Manual98-128279 Intermediate Gain Antenna Installation ManualTable 1-1: List of Related DocumentationWARNING! Before using any material, refer to the manufacturers’ material safety data sheets for safety information. Some materials can be dangerous.CAUTION! The AVIATOR 200/300/350 system contains items that are electrostatic discharge sensitive. Use approved industry precautions to keep the risk of damage to a minimum when you touch, remove or insert parts or assemblies.SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 2-1Chapter 22222Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 22.1 General descriptionThis manual describes the administrative and technical aspects, features, functions and components of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. All comments or recommendations regarding the installation, acceptance or operation of the system or its accessories and components should be directed to Cobham SATCOM.The AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is available in two versions: • AVIATOR 200/300/350 approved to RTCA specification DO- 178B level E and DO-254 level E• AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D approved to RTCA specification DO-178B level D and DO-254 level D.In general descriptions the nomenclature AVIATOR 200/300/350 covers both versions. Where necessary, the Level D system is specified as AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D.2.1.1 The AVIATOR 200/300/350 systemOverview of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 systemThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is a compact, light-weight aeronautical satcom system that uses Inmarsat’s SwiftBroadband services.The AVIATOR system consists of the following units:• TT-5040A SBU (SwiftBroadband Unit)• TT-5040A-001 or TT-4050A-8xy CM (Configuration Module), inserted in the SBU. The CM also holds the SIM card, which provides access to the SwiftBroadband services. The SIM card is included in the delivery.• TT-5016A HLD (High Power Amplifier, Low Noise Amplifier and Diplexer in one unit). These units are to be connected to a satcom antenna. See section Satcom antenna systems on page 2-4 for supported antenna types and model numbers.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description2-2 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-HThe following drawing shows the AVIATOR 200/300/350 cabin installation with connected communication devices and available options:Figure 2-1: Communication devices for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system (example for a Level E system)SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-32222ServicesThe SwiftBroadband services available depend on the type of antenna installed and the current elevation angle to the satellite. The following table shows the services available for the supported antenna types.LGA (Class 15)aTable 2-1: SwiftBroadband services for supported antenna typesa. The elevation needed for services with this antenna type is > 20°.Standard IP backgroundUp to 200 kbpsUp to 332 kbpsUp to 432 kbpsIP streaming classes8/16 8/16/32/64/128 kbps8/16/32/64/128 kbps/X-Streambb. Data rates are up to 512 kbps. Check with your service provider for activation.Circuit-switched standard voiceYes Yes YesISDN service or 3.1 kHz audio (Premium voice)No Elevation > 45° YesMulti-voice: Number of voice calls1+1 (best effort quality)1+Up to 8 (best effort quality)1+Up to 8 (best effort quality)For current support of Inmarsat services check at www.inmarsat.com/aviation/complete-aviation-connectivity/swiftbroadband.The current elevation angle is shown in the web interface of the AVIATOR 200/300/350.For ISDN service or 3.1 kHz audio and IGA the elevation angle must be larger than 45 degrees. Note that the ISDN phone service cannot be used by the AVIATOR 200 or the AVIATOR 200D.PBX telephone exchangeThe built-in PBX telephone exchange unit of the SBU connects two direct 2-wire POTS interfaces for faxes, auxiliary phones, headset interface boxes etc., as well as an ISDN interface for ISDN phones, fax machines or Secure communication. The built-in PBX of the SBU can route VoIP calls that are terminated in the SIP server of the SBU.SwiftBroadband serviceSatcom antennaAVIATOR 200 AVIATOR 300IGA (Class 7)AVIATOR 350HGA (Class 6)SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description2-4 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-HConfiguration Module (CM)The Configuration Module (CM) for the SBU is inserted in the SBU and holds system and user settings. It is designed as a “plug-in” module for the SBU, so the SBU can be replaced while retaining all SBU and user settings. The SBU CM contains a permanently built-in SIM card for access to the SwiftBroadband services.Web interface for configurationUse the built-in web interface of the SBU to access the SBU configuration settings in the CM. A subset of the configuration settings are stored in a write-protected area of the CM. This subset contains the physical settings for the antenna, cabling and other external input.To set up or change the settings of the write-protected area you must connect a PC to the connector marked Maintenance on the SBU front plate. You can view all settings from any LAN or WLAN interface. For further information on the web interface, see Configuration tasks on page 6-2.Satcom antenna systemsThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system can be used with a wide range of satcom antennas. The following table shows the Cobham SATCOM antennas that are compatible with the AVIATOR 200/300/350.Table 2-2: Satcom antenna types for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 systemSystem type Satcom antenna typeAVIATOR 200 TT-3002A LGA/LGA-3000AVIATOR 300 TT-5006A IGAIGA-5001AVIATOR 350aa. For backwards compatibility with previous Aero-SB Lite systems, the AVIATOR 350 can also be used with TT-5006 IGA or IGA 5001, then the system is an AVIATOR 300. HGA-6000/HGA-6500HGA-7000/HGA-7001An AVIATOR 200/300/350 system must only be used with satcom antennas that have received type approval by Inmarsat.Built-in router and Wireless (WLAN) optionThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system offers a built-in router as an option. With this option multiple users and applications can use the system simultaneously. Without this option only the first device that connects to the SBU will be allowed on the Internet. The system also offers a built-in WLAN option for wireless communication devices and a WLAN antenna approved for aeronautical use. This includes full WLAN routing functionality.If ordered, this option is enabled in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 from the factory. If these options are not included from the start, the system can be upgraded at a later stage. Then SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-52222you receive the FLEX key for the purchased options and enter it in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 web interface.Built-in Multi-voice option1The AVIATOR 200/300/350 system offers a built-in Multi-voice option. With this option multiple calls can be made to and from the system simultaneously. Normally, the BGAN system only supports one call at a time. With the built-in, optional Multi-voice service enabled in your system, you can make multiple calls. The maximum number of concurrent calls depends on your system, see Table 2-1 on page 2-3. If ordered, this option is enabled in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 from the factory. If this option is not included from the start, the system can be upgraded at a later stage. Then you receive the FLEX key for the purchased options and enter it in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 web interface.You must have Multi-voice in your airtime subscription, AVIATOR Wireless Handset software version minimum 1.03 and SBU software version minimum AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E): 1.07, AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D (Level D): 2.01, in order to support the Multi-voice function.For information on how to set up Multi-voice, see Multi-voice (option) on page 6-91.Built-in CMU/ACARS option1The AVIATOR 200/300/350 system offers a built-in CMU/ACARS option. With this option it is possible to connect a CMU or equivalent equipment to the SBU via A429 and send/receive ACARS messages over SwiftBroadband. If ordered, this option is enabled in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 from the factory. If this option is not included from the start, the system can be upgraded at a later stage. Then you receive the FLEX key for the purchased option(s) and enter it in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 web interface. For information on how to set up CMU/ACARS, see Set up CMU/ACARS (option) on page 6-51.SB-Safety Voice option2With the SB-Safety (ICAO) Voice option you can make priority calls (priority level 1, 2 or 3) to and from the cockpit. The 2-wire POTS connection is used for an external dialer and a headset. The SB-Safety Voice service includes:• Selecting the priority level before placing outgoing calls• External pre-programmed speed dial numbers with embedded priority (optional)• Handling priority level for active call• Handling priority level for incoming call• Annunciate the call status and SB-Safety Voice service availability via discrete outputsTo be able to use the SB-Safety Voice you must disable the WLAN access point and Multi-Voice in the web interface. ISDN and the second 2-wire POTS interface are disabled when using SB-Safety Voice. If this option is not included from the start, the system can be upgraded at a later stage. Then you receive the FLEX key for the purchased option(s) and enter it in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 web interface.1. Supported from software version 1.07 for AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E) and 2.01 for AVIATOR 200/300/350D (Level D).Note2. Supported from software version 4.00 for AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level D). SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description2-6 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-HPriority levels with an external dialerIf an external dialer is connected to the SBU, you can specify the priority level of outgoing calls when entering phones numbers in the dialer’s directory. Table 2-3: Priorities for SATVOICE calls (SB-Safety Voice)aa. Advisory Circular AC No.20-150B of U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation AdministrationPriority Level Application Category SATVOICE Call Examples1 (highest) Safety of FlightDistress and Urgency Inflight Emergency, Rapid Emergency Descent, Urgent Sidestep for Weather 2 Operational High (second highest) Safety of FlightFlight Safety Altitude Request, ATC Clearance/Instruction 3 Operational Low (third highest) Safety of FlightRegularity of Flight, Meteorological AdministrativeAir Traffic Information Service, AOC, Redispatch, MaintenanceThe priority level of a call can be part of the phone number. When dialing numbers, the international call prefix can be changed to state the priority level: 01 for priority level 1, 02 for priority level 2 and 03 for priority level 3. Then the phone numbers look as follows (example with 45 country code for Denmark):• Priority level 1: 01 45 XX XX XX XX• Priority level 2: 02 45 XX XX XX XX (or 00 45 XX XX XX XX)• Priority level 3: 03 45 XX XX XX XXNo matter which priority level an outgoing phone call has, the phone number transferred to the PBX is converted to the standard phone number using 00 as international call prefix. The priority can be displayed on a connected annunciator panel.Compatibility with IRIDIUM satellite phonesYou can use the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system on aircraft with IRIDIUM satellite phones. As Inmarsat satcom systems and Iridium satcom systems are using adjacent frequency bands, there is a potential risk of interference when the Iridium system is used at the same time as the Inmarsat system. To avoid this, two filters are needed: • An Iridium Band Reject Filter, TT-5019A, must be inserted between the SBU and the HLD.• An INMARSAT Dual RF Filter, Aircell P/N P13167, must be inserted in the antenna coax of the Iridium system.For further information on installing the Iridium Band Reject Filer see TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter on page F-1.SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-722222.1.2 AVIATOR 200/300/350 featuresThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system has the following features:The availability of some services depends on the satcom antenna type of the system. Check the section Services on page 2-3 for an overview of services available for LGA, IGA and HGA.SwiftBroadband channel providing an ‘always on’ data connection of up to 432 kbps.Full duplex, single or multi-user.Automatic satellite selection.Built-in PBX in the SBU interfacing to two 2-wire connections, one ISDN interface and WLAN in the SBU, and integrated SIP server for VOIP telephony.Standard voice.3.1 kHz audio for modems, G3 fax, 14.4 kbps high quality voice etc.ISDN voice for Secure communication, G4 fax etc.ISDN data for video conferences etc.Built-in Router option with DHCP, NAT for six Ethernet interfaces.Built-in Wireless option (WLAN) IEEE 802.11 b/g.Built-in Multi-voice option, up to 1+8 concurrent callsAccess to built-in web interface for daily use using LAN and WLAN.Built-in CMU/ACARS optionBuilt-in web interface for configuration using the Maintenance connector on the SBU front plate.Does not affect the operation of an Iridium system.SB-Safety Voice (cockpit voice) option (from software 4.00) NoteSB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General description2-8 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-HSoftware versionsThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 is shipped with software version 2.02. Software versions 2.03 and 4.00 are also available. The following tables show the features that are supported for each software version.Table 2-4: Available features for software versions (Level D)Software version Router Wifi CMU/ACARS Multi-voice A429 via RS422SB-Safety Voice4.00 Yes Yesaa. Not together with SB-Safety voice.Yes YesaYes Yes2.03 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -2.02 Yes Yes Yes Yes - -For Level E, the latest software version covered by this manual is version 1.09.SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Application98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-922222.2 Application2.2.1 Minimum systemA minimum working system has at least:• one TT-5040A SBU• one TT-5040A-001 CM• one TT-5016A HLD• one satcom antenna: LGA, IGA or HGAThe minimum wiring required for an AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is described in the section Minimum system drawing on page 5-2.The CM, HLD and some satcom antennas are powered by the SBU.2.2.2 Part numbersApplicable part numbersThis installation manual is for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system and is applicable to the part numbers in the following tables.Part number Unit description405040A SwiftBroadband Unit (SBU) [without CM] for AVIATOR 200/300/350405040A-THD SwiftBroadband Unit (SBU) [without CM] for AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D405040A-838 Configuration Module (CM) for SBU for AVIATOR 200/200D405040A-001 Configuration Module (CM) for SBU (no key and no options)405040A-002 Built-in Router option405040A-003 Built-in Wireless option405040A-004 WLAN Antenna, optional (2 pieces recommended)405040A-009 Built-in ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option405040A-010 Built-in Multi-voice option405040A-006 AVIATOR 350 Key (HGA/IGA)405040A-007 AVIATOR 300 Key (IGA)405040A-008 AVIATOR 200 Key (LGA)Table 2-5: Part numbers SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Application2-10 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-H405016A High Power Amplifier/Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD) AVIATOR 200/300/350405016A-THD High Power Amplifier/Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD) AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D403002-001 Low Gain Antenna (LGA). Original Manufacturer Sensor Systems P/N: S65-8282-101 (listed on FAA 8130-3).405006A-PMA Intermediate Gain Antenna (IGA). Original Manufacturer Cobham P/N: 677-A0002 (listed on FAA 8130-3).405621B-THW 2-Wire Handset (white)405621B-THR 2-Wire Handset (black)405622B-THW 2-Wire Cradle (white)405622B-THR 2-Wire Cradle (black)405019A Iridium Band Reject FilterPart number Configuration module description405040A-838 CM for SBU with A200 key405040A-828 CM for SBU with A200 key, Router option(s)405040A-818 CM for SBU with A200 key, WiFi option(s)405040A-808 CM for SBU with A200 key, Router, WiFi option(s)405040A-837 CM for SBU with A300 key405040A-827 CM for SBU with A300 key, Router option(s)405040A-817 CM for SBU with A300 key, WiFi option(s)405040A-807 CM for SBU with A300 key, Router, WiFi option(s)405040A-836 CM for SBU with A350 key405040A-826 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router option(s)405040A-816 CM for SBU with A350 key, WiFi option(s)405040A-806 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, WiFi option(s)405040A-878 CM for SBU with A200 key, Multi voice option(s)Table 2-6: Part numbers for configuration modules and options Part number Unit descriptionTable 2-5: Part numbers (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Application98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-112222The flex keys for A350 can also be used in A300 systems.The SwiftBroadband Unit (SBU) and the High Power Amplifier, Low Noise Amplifier and Diplexer (HLD) must all be level E or level D approved. No mismatch is allowed.Circuit breaker405040A-868 CM for SBU with A200 key, Router, Multi voice option(s)405040A-858 CM for SBU with A200 key, WiFi, Multi voice option(s)405040A-848 CM for SBU with A200 key, Router, WiFi, Multi voice option(s)405040A-876 CM for SBU with A350 key, Multi voice option(s)405040A-866 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, Multi voice option(s)405040A-856 CM for SBU with A350 key, WiFi, Multi voice option(s)405040A-846 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, WiFi, Multi voice option(s)405040A-8B6 CM for SBU with A350 key, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-8A6 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-896 CM for SBU with A350 key, WiFi, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-886 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, WiFi, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-8F6 CM for SBU with A350 key, Multi voice, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-8E6 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, Multi voice, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-8D6 CM for SBU with A350 key, WiFi, Multi voice, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)405040A-8C6 CM for SBU with A350 key, Router, WiFi, Multi voice, ACARS/SB Safety (ICAO) voice option(s)Part number Configuration module descriptionTable 2-6: Part numbers for configuration modules and options (Continued)Part number Recommended aircraft circuit breakers2TC2-7.5 Klixon 2TC series, 7.5 A current rating (SBUa)a. The CM, HLD and some satcom antennas are powered by the SBU.Table 2-7: Part numbers for Klixon circuit breakerSB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Application2-12 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-HTrays and connectorsInstallation kitsFor installation kits for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system contact:Table 2-9: Installation kits, contact informationECS offers an installation kit for the SBU (ECS part number: 120-20027-102).2.2.3 Applicable external unitsThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system can be used with the external units listed below. Note that the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system may also be able to interface to other units not listed below.Part number Approved trayPO299-101 ECS Tray Assembly 1/4-size ATR (for SBU)MT4-2346-101 EMTEQ Tray Assembly 1/4-size ATR (for SBU)DPX2NA-67322-606(old number: DPX2NA-67322-500)Required Connector Kit for SBU tray: ITT Cannon Connector, Dual Plug, contact arrangement top: 33C4, bottom: 33C4.Table 2-8: Part number for connectorECS, a Carlisle IT company, USAPhone (Franklin, WI): +1 800-327-9473Phone (Kent, WA): +1 800-227-5953E-mail: sales@CarlisleIT.comHome page: www.CarlisleIT.comEMTEQ (B/E Aerospace)Home page: www.emteq.comContact info: www.emteq.com/contact-us.phpItem in installation kit1 ARINC connector, SBU (DPX2NA-67322-606)1 Tray Assembly, SBU, 1/4-size ATR W/DPX2 (P0299-101)Table 2-10: Basic installation kits from ECS for the SBUProduct name Product description ManufacturerICG DECT Cordless HandsetCordless handset systemICG, USAPhone: E-mail: Home page: 1-800-279-1991 or (757)947-1030sales@icg.aero www.icg.aeroTable 2-11: List of applicable external unitsSB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Application98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-132222Sigma7Handset system ICG (see contact info above)PTA-12 Airborne Telephone AdaptorNorthern Airborne Technology Ltd. 1925 Kirschner Road Kelowna, BC Canada V1Y 4N7Phone: Toll Free: Fax:(250) 763-2232 (888) 763-2232 (250) 762-3374MD41-1948 Switch Annunciator PanelMID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENT CO., INC. 9400 E. 34th. St. North Wichita, KS 67226-2615Phone: Fax: Home page:316-630-0101 316-630-0723 www.mcico.comAirCell Axxess Iridium Telephone SystemAircell Business Aviation Services LLC 303 south Technology Court, Bldg.A Broomfield, CO 80021Phone: Fax: E-mail:+1.303.301.3200 +1.303.301.3201 sales@aircell.comAIS 380 Aircraft Interface ModuleConverter RS-422 to A429Shadin Avionics 6831 Oxford St St Louis Park MN 55426 www.shadin.com/Manufacturer part number: 833640-00 Cobham SATCOM part number: 405017A-801Product name Product description ManufacturerTable 2-11: List of applicable external unitsSB-Lite.book Page 13 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams2-14 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-H2.3 System block diagramsThe following block diagrams and the wiring diagrams in section 5.3.3 show examples of satcom antennas that can be connected to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 systems.In order to use the satcom antenna with the AVIATOR 200/300/350 systems, the specific antenna type and the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system must be Type Approved by Inmarsat as a combined system. The satcom antenna types supported are listed in Satcom antenna systems on page 2-4. AVIATOR 200/300/350 systems will be Inmarsat Type Approved with more antennas as requested by market requirements. Contact your Cobham SATCOM sales/support representative for the latest status on Inmarsat Type Approvals for satcom antennas for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. The following block diagrams show the basic system component interconnection and the user interfaces.2.3.1 AVIATOR 200 system with LGA-3000 antennaThe drawing below shows the AVIATOR 200 system with an LGA antenna.Figure 2-2: System configuration with LGA-3000 antenna/*$77$+/'$QWHQQD77$6%8,56*16613,$9,$72577$&08VHU,QWHUIDFHV5[5[7[7[0RGHP9'&*36SB-Lite.book Page 14 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-1522222.3.2 AVIATOR 300 system with TT-5006A IGA antennaThe drawing below shows the AVIATOR 300 system with in IGA antenna.Figure 2-3: System configuration with TT-5006A IGA antenna77$ZLWK15677$+/'$QWHQQD77$6%8$+56,56RSWLRQDO$9,$725V\VWHP77$&08VHU,QWHUIDFHV5[5[7[%687[0RGHP9'&0RGHP*365)9'&SB-Lite.book Page 15 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams2-16 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-H2.3.3 AVIATOR 350 system with Cobham antennasThe drawing below shows the AVIATOR 350 system with Cobham antennas.Figure 2-4: System configuration with Cobham antennas&REKDP+*$&REKDP+*$77$+/'$QWHQQD77$6%8$+56,56$9,$725V\VWHP77$&0 8VHU,QWHUIDFHV5[5[7[%687[0RGHP9'&0RGHP*365)9'&SB-Lite.book Page 16 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-1722222.3.4 AVIATOR 350 system with ARINC-741/781 antennasThe drawing below shows the AVIATOR 350 system with an ARINC-741/781 HGA.For detailed description of the connection of each antenna type, see Wiring the satcom antenna on page 5-10.Figure 2-5: System configuration ARINC 429 antennas$5,1&+*$77$+/'$QWHQQD77$6%8$+56,56$9,$725V\VWHP77$&0 8VHU,QWHUIDFHV5[5[7[7[0RGHP9'&$5,1&%68,QVWDOO([WHUQDODFWLYH*36$QWHQQDZLWK6DW&RPILOWHULI$+56LVXVHG*369RU9GFSB-Lite.book Page 17 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams2-18 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-H2.3.5 AVIATOR 350D system with ACARS option and ARINC-741/781 ant.The drawing below shows the AVIATOR 350 system with the HGA-6000/6500 and AMT-50 and ACARS/B Safety (ICAO) voice.For detailed description of the connection of each antenna type, see Wiring the satcom antenna on page 5-10.Figure 2-6: System configuration ARINC 429 antennas$5,1&$5,1&$5,1&$QWHQQD77$+/'$QWHQQDVXEV\VWHP77$6%8$+56,56$9,$725'V\VWHP77$[\&05[5[7[7[0RGHP9'&$5,1&8VHU,QWHUIDFHV$+56,5656WR$5,1&&RQYHUWHU561DYLJDWLRQDOVXEV\VWHP([WHUQDO*36DQWHQQDLI$+56LVXVHGSB-Lite.book Page 18 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams98-127093-H Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 2-1922222.3.6 User interfacesThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system has the following user interfaces:Table 2-12: AVIATOR 200/300/350 user interfaces Interfaces Number2-wire POTS interface This interface can be used for the TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset and TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle or other POTS handsets. The TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle has an RJ11 connector to which additional 2-wire terminals can be connected, e.g. for fax or modem data.210/100BaseT Ethernet interfaces for connecting IP equipment. Note that the SBU has a Built-in Router option. The SBU has an additional Ethernet interface for system configuration (Maintenance connector on the SBU front plate, not shown in the following figure).6Built-in Wireless Option with two WLAN antenna interfaces for diversity operation to connect WiFi-enabled equipment like lap tops, PDAs or VOIP handsets.1(32 devices)Euro ISDN S-bus interface for PC, Fax or STE (without DC power support)aa. Note that the ISDN data service (UDI/RDI) cannot be used by the AVIATOR 200 nor the AVIATOR 200D.1Discrete outputs for annunciators 4 The following figure shows most of the possible user interfaces. Figure 2-7: AVIATOR 200/300/350 interfacesNote that the ISDN data service (UDI/RDI) cannot be used by the AVIATOR 200 nor the AVIATOR 200D.77$6%8,3(TXLSPHQW,6'1(WKHUQHW$QQXQFLDWRUV'LVFUHWH2XWSXWV*)D[:&UDGOH :+DQGVHW,3GHYLFH,3GHYLFH,3GHYLFH:/$1DQWHQQD:LUHOHVV,3HTXLSPHQWGHYLFHVZLUH5-:/$1,6'1SKRQH*)D[3&5RXWHU9LGHRSKRQHSB-Lite.book Page 19 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
System block diagrams2-20 Chapter 2: Introduction to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 98-127093-HSB-Lite.book Page 20 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 3-1Chapter 33333Equipment drawings 33.1 IntroductionThe following pages show copies of outline drawings of important system units relevant for an installation.For equipment drawings of the AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle see AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle Installation & Maintenance Manual (98-129600). Important The drawings in this manual are for reference only. If you have access to the partner platform Cobham SYNC, you can get copies of the outline drawings at: https://sync.cobham.com/satcom/support/downloads. You can download the drawings as PDF files. There are also 3D models of selected units.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU3-2 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.2 TT-5040A SBUFigure 3-1: Outline drawing: TT-5040A SBUSB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-333333.2.1 TT-5040A-001 CM (inserted in the SBU)Figure 3-2: Outline drawing: TT-5040A-001 CM, inserted in the SBUSB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5038A-003 Rx Power Splitter3-4 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.3 TT-5038A-003 Rx Power SplitterNote If the Rx Power Splitter is to be mounted on a flat surface, mount it on a 3 mm mounting plate to provide enough space for mounting of the connectors.Figure 3-3: Outline Drawing: Rx Power SplitterSB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5016A HLD98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-533333.4 TT-5016A HLDFigure 3-4: Outline drawing: TT-5016A HLDSB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-3002A LGA3-6 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.5 TT-3002A LGAOriginal Manufacturer Sensor Systems P/N: S65-8282-101 (listed on FAA 8130-3).Figure 3-5: Outline drawing: TT-3002A LGAFor newest revision check at http://www.sensorantennas.com.Dimensions in inch.SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5006A IGA98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-733333.6 TT-5006A IGAOriginal Manufacturer Cobham P/N: 677-A0002 (listed on FAA 8130-3).Figure 3-6: Outline drawing: TT-5006A IGA antennaSB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset3-8 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.7 TT-5621B 2-Wire HandsetFigure 3-7: Outline drawing: TT-5621B 2-Wire HandsetSB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-933333.8 TT-5622B 2-Wire CradleFigure 3-8: Outline drawing: TT-5622B 2-Wire CradleSB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
SBU trays3-10 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.9 SBU traysThe comment OBSOLETE refers to the -102 assembly.Figure 3-9: Outline drawing: SBU tray: ECS PO299-101NoteSB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Figure 3-10: Outline drawing: SBU tray: EMTEQ MT4-2346-101 (page 1)SBU trays98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-113333SB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Figure 3-11: Outline drawing: SBU tray: EMTEQ MT4-2346-101 (page 2)SBU trays3-12 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-HSB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
SBU tray connector98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-1333333.10 SBU tray connectorFor correct index pin codes for the SBU see Figure 4-2: SBU rear receptacle, engaging end (Index code: 19).Figure 3-12: Outline drawing: SBU tray connector: ITT Cannon DPX2NA-67322-606Export Administration Regulations (15 CFR 730, et seq.). Any transfer of this data to non-US persons or to any location outside the United States must be in compliance with the Export Administration Regulations.This document contains technical data that is subject to export controls under the Export Administration Act andEXPORT CODE CSB-Lite.book Page 13 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 special3-14 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.11 Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 specialFigure 3-13: Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 special: ITT Cannon 244-0011-001 SB-Lite.book Page 14 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 special98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-153333Figure 3-13: Contact Assembly: Quadrax Pin size 5 special: ITT Cannon 244-0011-001 (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 15 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A-004 WLAN antenna3-16 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-H3.12 TT-5040A-004 WLAN antennaOriginal Manufacturer P/N: VT Miltope 901167-2.Figure 3-14: Outline drawing: TT-5040A-004 WLAN antennaMeasures are in inches.SB-Lite.book Page 16 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Switch Annunciator Panel98-127093-H Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 3-1733333.13 Switch Annunciator PanelOriginal Manufacturer P/N: MD41-1948.Figure 3-15: Outline drawing: Switch Annunciator panel MD41-1948This document discloses proprietary informationof Mid-Continent Instrument Co. It may be reproduced or disclosed only with written permission of Mid-Continent Instrument Co. andis not to be used in any way detrimental to theinterests of Mid-Continent Instrument Co.11UNLESS OTHERWISESPECIFIED, ALL DIMENSIONSARE IN INCHES.TOLERANCE: FRACTIONAL= 1/64 .XX= 0.015 .XXX= 0.005 .XXXX= 0.002 ANGULAR= 0.5CONCENTRICITY: 0.005 TIRBREAK ALL SHARP EDGESTHREADS PER MIL-S-7742Annunciation Control Unit3/24/2009C. Mies1:1 of PART NUMBER:TITLE:SCALE: DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING SHEET:APPROVED:DRAWN:BAW6/9/20092.502.750.29 X445° X 4-40 UNC Thread Mounting X2MAX Screw Depth 0.60 Inches0.800.1253.02.2521Item Qty Part Number Description1 1 9016807-1 Assy, MD41-19482 1 9016808 Nameplate3 1 7014517 Connector KitECO Rev . Description Date Approv edA Initial release. 06/09/09 CJM/BAWRev isionDash #ConfigurationPin # Pin #1 S E R V AVAI L An n u n . 10 Reser v ed2 CALL Annun. 11 Reserved3 FAILED Annun. 13 28VDC Power4 Reserv ed 16 Reserv ed5 28V Dimmer In 18 Reserv ed6 WLAN Switch 24 SBU Switch7Lamp Test 25Ground9 Reserv edConnector PinoutPower Input 28 VDC 0.3 A typicalLighting Incandescent BulbsWeight 0.3 lbsRTCA DO-160CEnv . Cat.F2-CA(MN)XXXXXXZBABATZXXXTemperature -55°C to 70 °CAltitude 0 to +55,000 Ft.Connector M D25M5R40V30Mating Connector Positronic RD25F10JVL0Bezel: BlackControls: White w/ black letteringOFF and FAILED Annuncations: BlueON, CALL, & SERV AVAIL Annuns: GreenSBU: Alternate action switchW L AN : Alt e rn a te a c t ion sw it c hSpecificationsColorQualification TestsControlsSB-Lite.book Page 17 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Switch Annunciator Panel3-18 Chapter 3: Equipment drawings 98-127093-HSB-Lite.book Page 18 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 4-1Chapter 44444Connectors and pin-out 4This chapter has the following sections:•TT-5040A SBU•TT-5016A HLD•TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle•Mating connectors in aircraft4.1 TT-5040A SBUThe TT-5040A SBU provides interfaces for configuration, Aircraft and satcom interconnections and for the CM.4.1.1 Connectors on SBUThere are three connectors on the SBU:• SBU Maintenance connector (front): Interface to PC for configuration and maintenance purposes. A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector with two LED indicators, RJ45 female.• SBU rear receptacle (top plug and bottom plug): Interface to Aircraft and satcom interconnections. An ARINC 404 Shell Size 2 Receptacle.• Connector for CM (rear, inside connector): Internal connector used only as interface to the CM. A female 9-pin Sub-D Connector.4.1.2 SBU Maintenance connectorConnector drawingFigure 4-1: SBU Maintenance connector, face view of engaging endYellow LEDActivityGreen LEDLinkSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU4-2 Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 98-127093-HConnector functionsThe front Maintenance interface is 10/100BaseT Ethernet, IEEE802.3.Use this interface for the following purposes:• AVIATOR 200/300/350 system configuration• Maintenance• System software upgradeUse a standard straight network cable.For instructions how to configure the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system see Configuration tasks on page 6-2.Pin-out for SBU Maintenance connectorImportant For systems without the Built-in Router option enabled, i.e. the basic version or the version with Wireless option: To use the SBU Maintenance connector disconnect or switch off any PC connected to another LAN interface of the SBU.Pin no. Pin NameFP1 TxD+ inputFP2 TxD- inputFP3 RxD+ outputFP4 Not UsedFP5 Not UsedFP6 RxD- outputFP7 Not UsedFP8 Not Used Table 4-1: Pin-out for SBU Maintenance connector (standard Ethernet)SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU98-127093-H Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 4-344444.1.3 SBU rear receptacleConnector drawingThe following drawing shows the SBU rear receptacle and mating plug.Figure 4-2: SBU rear receptacle, engaging end (Index code: 19)7RS3OXJ73,QVHUW%RWWRP3OXJ%3,QVHUW,QGH[3LQ&RGH/LJKWDUHDVDUHNH\KROHV$$$$    $ $$ $$ $$ $$$$$    9LHZ(QJDJLQJHQG6%85HDU5HFHSWDFOH 0DWLQJ3OXJLQ7UD\4XDGUD[(WKHUQHW,QVHUWLQ$4XDGUD[(WKHUQHW,QVHUWLQ$DQG$SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU4-4 Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 98-127093-HConnector drawing with functionsThe following drawing shows the SBU rear receptacle with pin functions. For wiring details of this interface see Electrical installation and wiring on page 5-8.Figure 4-3: SBU rear receptacle with pin functions$5)5;$:/$1$5)7;$:/$1    $QQXQFLDWRUV ,6'1,6'1 566%8&RQWURO6SDUH,2:/$1(QDEOH$7(,6'15HVHUYHG::6%8(QDEOH6%8Q21*1'91RWXVHG/DPSVLQKLE5LQJ 5LQJ7,3 7,3 7[5[7[5[  6%8$(WKHUQHW$*36$(WKHUQHW$(WKHUQHW%$%$1$9 1$9(WKHUQHW(WKHUQHW(WKHUQHW&KDVVLV63$5(,2$QQXQFLDWRU63$5(,27[7[5[5[5[5[5[5[7[7[7[7[ $7[5[5[7[7[5[5[7[5[7[7[5[$%$%%68,1 %682877[5[7[5[,Q$,Q%2XW%2XW$1RFRQQHFW6LJQDO*1'SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU98-127093-H Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 4-54444Connector functions, top plugThe top plug of the SBU rear receptacle connects the following signals:Power & RF Interfaces:• +28 V DC and GND, Power return• RF Tx signal to TT-5016A HLD and Modem interface and DC power to HLD• RF Rx signal from TT-5016A HLD• Two RF WLAN antenna connectors (2.4 GHz)User Interfaces:• One ISDN, 4-wire connection• Two analogue 2-wire standard POTS interfaces for Voice/Fax/Modem/secure voice Control & Maintenance Interfaces:• Discrete SBU nON input• Discrete WLAN Enable input• Discrete Chime/Lamps Inhibit Input• 3 configurable Annunciators: #1 (“Incoming call”), #2 (“SBU Failed”) and #3 (“Service Available”)• Two ATE Discrete inputs for factory use - Do not connect• One Discrete Spare I/O• ISDN #2, Reserved - Do not connect• RS-422, Reserved - Do not connectSB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU4-6 Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 98-127093-HConnector functions, bottom plugThe bottom plug of the SBU rear receptacle connects the following signals:Power & RF Interfaces:• GPS antenna input• Chassis groundUser Interfaces:• Six 10/100BaseT EthernetAircraft interfaces:• Two high or low speed ARINC 429 navigational input• One high or low speed ARINC 429 BSU output• One high or low speed ARINC 429 BSU inputControl & Maintenance Interfaces:• Two Discrete Spare I/O• One Discrete Output: Annunciator #4 (“Message received”)SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU98-127093-H Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 4-74444Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle (top plug)Table 4-2: Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle, top plugPin FunctionTP A1 RF TX output to TT-5016A HLD, DC output and modem interfaceTP A2 WLAN antenna #2 (coax)aTP A3 RF RX input from TT-5016A HLDTP A4 WLAN antenna #1 (coax)aTP1 SBU +28 V DC PowerTP2 SBU GND, Power ReturnTP3 SBU nON, Discrete InputTP4 Not usedTP5 WLAN Enable, Discrete Input TP6 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #1 (Ring)TP7 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #2 (Ring)TP8 SBU Enable, Discrete Input (connect to Chassis ground)TP9 ATE #1, for factory use - Do not connect! TP10 ATE #2, for factory use - Do not connect! TP11 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #1 (Tip)TP12 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #2 (Tip)TP13 Chime/Lamps Inhibit Input, (Discrete I/O)TP14 Spare I/O, (Discrete I/O)bTP15 ISDN #2 Tx+ (c) output (TE) Do not connect!TP16 ISDN #2 Rx+ (d) input (TE) Do not connect!TP17 ISDN #2 Rx- (e) input (TE) Do not connect!TP18 ISDN #2 Tx- (f) output (TE) Do not connect!TP19 Output B, RS-422 Do not connect!cTP20 Output A, RS-422 Do not connect!cTP21 Input B, RS-422 Do not connect!cTP22 Input A, RS-422 Do not connect!cTP23 ISDN #1 Rx+ (c) input (NT)TP24 ISDN #1 Tx+ (d) output (NT)TP25 ISDN #1 Tx- (e) output (NT)TP26 ISDN #1 Rx- (f) input (NT)TP27 Annunciator #3, (Discrete I/O, Service available)bTP28 Annunciator #1, (Discrete I/O, Incoming call)TP29 Annunciator #2, (Discrete I/O, SBU fail)a. Do not connect if SB-Safety voice is to be enabled.b. This pin has an alternate function when SB-Safety Voice is enabled, refer to Configure the discrete I/O interfaces on page 6-37.c. Software 2.03 and higher: Can be used for AIS 380 Aircraft Interface Module.Pin FunctionSB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5040A SBU4-8 Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 98-127093-HPin-out for SBU rear receptacle (bottom plug)Table 4-3: Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle, bottom plugPin no. Pin nameBP A1.1 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 (Quadrax pin 1, Input)BP A1.2 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 (Quadrax pin 2, Output)BP A1.3 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 (Quadrax pin 3, Input)BP A1.4 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 (Quadrax pin 4, Output)BP A2.1 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 (Quadrax pin 1, Input)BP A2.2 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 (Quadrax pin 2, Output)BP A2.3 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 (Quadrax pin 3, Input)BP A2.4 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 (Quadrax pin 4, Output)BP A3.1 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 (Quadrax pin 1, Input)BP A3.2 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 (Quadrax pin 2, Output)BP A3.3 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 (Quadrax pin 3, Input)BP A3.4 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 (Quadrax pin 4, Output)BP A4 GPS antenna input (coax), Modem, DC out BP1 Annunciator #4 (Discrete I/O, Message received)BP2 Spare I/O, (Discrete I/O)aBP3 SBU Chassis GroundBP4 Spare I/O, (Discrete I/O)aBP5 Data from primary ARINC429 navigational input, ABP6 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4, (Output)BP7 Data from secondary ARINC429 navigational input, ABP8 Data from primary ARINC429 navigational input, BBP9 Data from BSU or CMU, ARINC 429 ABP10 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4, (Input)BP11 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4, (Input)BP12 Data to BSU or CMU, ARINC 429 ABP13 Data from secondary ARINC429 navigational input, BBP14 Data from BSU or CMU, ARINC 429 BBP15 Common Signal GND for EthernetBP16 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4, (Output)BP17 Common Signal GND for EthernetBP18 Data to BSU or CMU, ARINC 429 BBP19 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5, (Output)BP20 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5, (Input)BP21 Common Signal GND for EthernetBP22 Common Signal GND for EthernetBP23 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6, (Output)BP24 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6, (Input)BP25 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5, (Input)BP26 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5, (Output)BP27 Common Signal GND for EthernetBP28 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6, (Input)BP29 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6, (Output)a. This pin has an alternate function when SB-Safety Voice is enabled, refer to Configure the discrete I/O interfaces on page 6-37.Pin no. Pin nameSB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5016A HLD98-127093-H Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 4-944444.2 TT-5016A HLDThe HLD is installed between the SBU and the satcom antenna.4.2.1 Connectors on HLDConnector drawingFigure 4-4: TT-5016A HLD connector panelConnector functionsThere are three connectors and a Ground stud on the HLD:• X1: Antenna connector for L-Band Rx/Tx interface to the satcom antenna, TNC-female.• X2: Tx connector for L-Band Tx interface, modem interface and 28 V DC from the SBU N-female • X3: Rx connector for L-Band Rx interface to the SBU, TNC-female• X4: Chassis Ground stud for connecting the HLD chassis to the aircraft chassis.SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle4-10 Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 98-127093-H4.3 TT-5622B 2-Wire CradleThe TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle provides the analogue 2-wire standard POTS interface for Voice/Fax/Modem/secure voice and serves as a holder for the 2-Wire Handset.4.3.1 Connectors on 2-Wire CradleThere are three connectors on the 2-Wire Cradle, one at the side and two at the end:Figure 4-5: 2-Wire Cradle connectors, end view of cradleFigure 4-6: TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle connectors, side view of cradle2-Wire Handset connectionSBU connection2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem/secure voice connectionSB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle98-127093-H Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 4-1144444.3.2 2-Wire Cradle connector to SBUConnector drawingConnector functionsThe 9 pin Sub-D male connector on the short cable at the end of the 2-Wire Cradle connects the following signals on the SBU:• Analogue 2-wire standard POTS interface for Voice/Fax/Modem/secure voice.Pin-out for 2-Wire Cradle connector to SBUThe 2-Wire Cradle connector to connect to the SBU has the following pin-out:The other two connectors are standard POTS RJ11 connectors.Figure 4-7: 2-Wire Cradle connector (DB9M). View: Solder side9LHZ6ROGHUVLGH'%0DOHPin Function1 Auxiliary Tip2 Auxiliary Ring3 Shield4 Not connected5 Not connected6 Not connected7 Not connected8 Not connected9 Not connectedTable 4-4: Pin-out for 9 pin Sub-D male connector in TT-5622B 2-Wire CradleSB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Mating connectors in aircraft4-12 Chapter 4: Connectors and pin-out 98-127093-H4.4 Mating connectors in aircraft4.4.1 Connection with SBUNote that the SBU tray holds the mating connector for the SBU rear connector.Table 4-5: Mating connectors in aircraft for SBUSBU Maintenance connector (on front panel)RJ45 maleSBU rear receptacle (rear connector in the SBU tray)ARINC 404 shell size 2 plug with the following contact arrangements:Insert A (Top Plug): 33C4• 4 #16 socket contacts• 25 #20 socket contacts• 4 #5 coax socketsInsert B (Bottom Plug): 33C4• 4 #16 socket contacts• 25 #20 socket contacts• 1 #5 coax sockets• 3 #5 quadrax socketsPart number: DPX2NA-67322-606Size 5 coax contacts fit for cable type RG-142. For other cable types you must order suitable contact inserts. For part numbers see Table 5-32 on page 5-48 and Table 5-33 on page 5-49.Connector Mating connector typeSB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 5-1Chapter 55555Installation 5This chapter has the following sections:•General installation information•Mounting considerations•Electrical installation and wiring•Recommended cables•Activation of airtime services5.1 General installation information5.1.1 OverviewThis chapter contains considerations and recommendations for installation of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 System. Interconnect harness wiring and physical mounting must satisfy all applicable regulations.For installation kits for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system contact:Table 5-1: Installation kits, contact informationThe information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein do not represent any specific STC. It is the installer’s responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC.To ensure optimal performance from the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system, you must maintain strict adherence to the installation guidelines in this chapter.Note Installation kits including wiring can be obtained through ECS (Electronic Cable Specialists, Inc.) or EMTEQ Inc. For details and order numbers see Installation kits on page 2-12.ECS, a Carlisle IT company, USAPhone (Franklin, WI): +1 800-327-9473Phone (Kent, WA): +1 800-227-5953E-mail: sales@CarlisleIT.comHome page: www.CarlisleIT.comEMTEQ (B/E Aerospace)Home page: www.emteq.comContact info: www.emteq.com/contact-us.phpNoteSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
General installation information5-2 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.1.2 Minimum system componentsA minimum working system has at least:• one TT-5040A SBU• one TT-5040A-001 CM• one TT-5016A HLD• one satcom antenna, LGA, IGA, or HGA antenna, see also Satcom antenna systems on page 2-4.The CM, HLD and some satcom antennas are powered by the SBU. The following drawing shows the minimum installation.Minimum system drawingThis drawing is an overview of which units to connect as a minimum.For information on other satcom antenna types supported and wiring of the individual antenna types, refer to the appropriate section of Electrical installation and wiring on page 5-8 and onwards.Figure 5-1: AVIATOR 200 minimum system (example with LGA TT-3002A and GPS antenna)For other navigational input sources see Table 5-2 on page 5-4.Note77$6%877$+/'73$73$;;;%3$*36LQ'&RXW: ::; 77$$QWHQQD/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ5)5[5)7['&3RZHU0RGHP&KDVVLV*URXQG5)5[7[5)5[*36$QWHQQD9'&$LUFUDIW3RZHU6XSSO\,56$+56$$%3,56$+56$%%3,5613,*166RSWLRQDO73*1'3RZHU5HWXUQ739'&3RZHU%3&KDVVLV*URXQG735HPRWHRQRIIQ21736%8(QDEOHSB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Mounting considerations98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-355555.2 Mounting considerations5.2.1 OverviewFor optimum system performance, some guidelines on where to install or mount the components of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system must be followed. Mounting and placement details are included in this section.For information on requirements to cables, see the individual sections in Electrical installation and wiring on page 5-8. For information on recommended cable types and lengths, see Recommended cables on page 5-47.5.2.2 TT-5040A SBUForced cooling is not required and not recommended.• Install the SBU in temperature controlled areas and inside or outside pressurized locations (e.g. avionics bay).• Mount the SBU in an ARINC 404A 1/4 ATR short tray as shown in Figure 3-9: Outline drawing: SBU tray: ECS PO299-101 or see SBU trays on page 3-10 for allowed SBU trays.5.2.3 TT-5016A HLDForced cooling is not required for the HLD.• Install the HLD in non-temperature controlled locations and inside or outside pressurized locations.• Make sure the cable loss requirements are met, for further details see Recommended cables on page 5-47.• Place the HLD with sufficient contact to the mounting surface for proper grounding, respecting the maximum cable resistance. The HLD can be mounted on a shelf or directly on the fuselage. • Ground the HLD through the 4 threaded mounting holes or by using the ground stud.The HLD can heat up to 20 degrees above ambient temperature after a long period of intense use. To avoid internal overheating the HLD automatically reduces activity. Place the HLD with as much free space around it as possible to keep the temperature down and optimize performance.• Place the HLD unit close to the top-mounted satcom antenna to minimize the cable length. Place the HLD preferably between the fuselage ribs in the cabin ceiling. In this location there may be a risk for reduced heat dissipation, so make sure that the HLD can dissipate the heat to the aircraft structure.For aircraft with very little ceiling space you may install the HLD unit in the rear avionics bay, the luggage compartment or other suitable locations inside or outside of pressurized areas.Note When mounting the units, allow enough space to provide a sufficient bend radius for the cables. See the cable data sheet for minimum bend radius.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Mounting considerations5-4 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.2.4 Satcom antennaIn order to steer the satcom antenna towards the satellite, the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system needs to know the position and attitude of the aircraft. Several methods are available to achieve this.The following table gives an overview of the supported navigational input sources for the different satcom antenna types.Table 5-2: Navigational input for satcom antennasSatcom antenna typeNavigational inputIRS(A429)AHRS + GPS(A429+coax)NRS(coax)NPI(A429)GNSS(A429)GPS only(coax)TT-3002A LGA/LGA-3000 X X X XTT-5006A IGA X X XIGA-5001 X XAMT-3500 X XHGA-6000/HGA-6500 X XHGA-7000/HGA-7001 X XAMT-50/700/3800 X XCMA-2102/CMA-2102SB X XAbout satcom antenna steering for IGA and HGA (AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350)•IRS: If IRS is used, the antenna positioning data is computed from the IRS data alone. All necessary data is available from the IRS.•AHRS + GPS: AHRS does not include all the necessary data, therefore a GPS RF signal must be sent to the SBU. A GPS module is built into the SBU, it computes the necessary position and speed information.In case the TT-5006A IGA is used, a GPS antenna is built into the antenna, and the GPS-RF is fed to the SBU.If another satcom antenna is used, e.g. a HGA, the GPS RF signal may be obtained from a GPS antenna already installed on the aircraft. The GPS RF signal enters the SBU at the SBU rear receptacle (bottom plug) BPA4 GPS antenna input.•NRS: A special way to steer the antenna, without the need for on-board IRS/AHRS systems, is to use the NRS system. This is ONLY possible with the TT-5006A antenna.The NRS system consists of two parts: a 3-D magnetometer built in to the TT-5006A, and a GPS module built into the SBU. The 3-D magnetometer in the antenna senses the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field. This information is sent to the SBU, where it is compared to the expected magnetic vector at the current position received from the GPS. The expected magnetic vector is obtained from a mathematical model of Earth’s magnetic field, and the knowledge of the current position, calculated in the GPS module. In this way the system can calculate the attitude of the aircraft.SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Mounting considerations98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-55555The advantage of this system is that it is stand-alone and does not require any interaction with other avionics systems. The disadvantage is that it requires a fairly clean magnetic environment, where the antenna is placed. There may not be any magnetic items such as screws, loudspeakers or DC cables near the antenna. See also Magnetic interference considerations (only for TT-5006A IGA) on page 5-6.Position and velocity information for LGA (AVIATOR 200)The position and velocity information is used for spot-beam selection and Doppler compensation. The following navigational inputs can only be used together with the TT-3002A low-gain antenna, where attitude data are not required:•GPS only: The built-in GPS receiver provides all the necessary navigation data if the SBU receives an RF signal from a GPS antenna on the pin BP A4 of the SBU rear receptacle, bottom plug (see Table 4-3 on page 4-8).•NPI: NPI (Navigation Position Information, a Thrane abbreviation) is similar to IRS but there is no requirement for attitude information. The navigation data can be obtained from other sources than an IRS. Note that the navigation data must be coded exactly as for IRS. For detailed information see Table 5-13 on page 5-27.•GNSS can be used together with the TT-3002A low-gain antenna. Since this antenna does not have any antenna steering mechanisms that must be controlled, the GNSS can provide all necessary navigational data. GNSS is compliant with ARINC-743A [14]. For detailed information see Table 5-14 on page 5-27.Satcom antenna types supportedFor a list of Cobham SATCOM antenna types supported in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system see Satcom antenna systems on page 2-4.General mounting considerationsRefer to the satcom antenna manual for instructions and details on mounting the antenna. Make sure all requirements in the antenna mounting instructions are met.Place the antenna with unobstructed view to the satellite.Note If possible, always use IRS or AHRS. IRS and AHRS give better precision. Only use NRS as a last option.WARNING! Keep a safety distance of minimum 30 cm (1 ft) for LGA and IGA and 90 cm (3 ft) for HGA to the antenna when the system is transmitting, unless the antenna manual or the specific system configuration presents different requirements. This safety distance ensures that a maximum radiation power density of maximum 10 W/m2 is not exceeded (Recommended by the American National Standards Institute, ANSI/LEEE C95.1-1992).Note The antenna installation must be in accordance with the aircraft manufacturers requirements and/or FAA AC 43.13 - 1B/2A and approved by the appropriate Civil Aviation Authorities.SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Mounting considerations5-6 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HMagnetic interference considerations (only for TT-5006A IGA)You may use the NRS antenna steering system if the TT-5006A IGA is mounted on the aircraft in an area free of magnetic interference.The following paragraphs are only applicable if you use NRS functionality.The TT-5006A IGA contains sensitive magnetometers. These can be adversely influenced by ferrous materials, magnets or large currents in cables close to the antenna. Therefore you must obey the following mounting considerations.• Do not mount speakers or other equipment containing a magnet within 48 cm (18 inches) of this satcom antenna. If this cannot be avoided, install shielded speakers. • Avoid mounting close to strong magnetic fields from the aircraft’s power wiring (DC cables).• Use non-magnetic screws and tools for mounting.Distance between GPS antenna and satcom antennaMake sure the GPS antenna is installed with sufficient distance to the satcom antenna. For requirements to the radiation distance, refer to the manual for the GPS system.However, always keep the following distances between the satcom antenna and the GPS antenna: – Minimum 30 cm (11.8 inches) for LGA and IGA – Minimum 50 cm (19.7 inches) for HGAIf the existing GPS antenna on board the aircraft does not provide sufficient filtering of the satcom antenna signal to give a usable GPS signal, you must replace the existing GPS antenna with a GPS antenna that has a satcom filter.Distance between Glonass antenna and satcom antennaMake sure your Glonass antenna is installed with sufficient distance to the satcom antenna. For requirements to the radiation distance, refer to the manual for the Glonass system.However, always keep the following distances between the satcom antenna and the Glonass antenna: – Minimum 120 cm (47.2 inches) for LGA and IGA – Minimum 210 cm (82.7 inches) for HGAIf the existing Glonass antenna on board the aircraft does not provide sufficient filtering of the satcom antenna signal to give a usable Glonass signal, you must replace the existing Glonass antenna with a Glonass antenna that has a satcom filter.Cables between TT-5016A HLD and satcom antennaWe recommend to keep the cable length as short as possible.Do not bend the cables to a radius smaller than the minimum bend radius stated for the cables. For further information on cables, see Wiring the satcom antenna on page 5-10 and Recommended cables on page 5-47.NoteImportantImportantSB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Mounting considerations98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-755555.2.5 TT-5040A-004 WLAN antennasThe recommended WLAN antenna to use with the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is the TT5040A-004 Wireless Antenna. The WLAN antenna is PMA approved by VT Miltope (P/N 901167-2). You may also use other WLAN antennas approved for aeronautical use.Cobham SATCOM recommends to use 2 WLAN antennas to get optimum performance on board.1. Mount the WLAN-antennas in the aircraft cabin. Install the 2 WLAN antennas in the same plane (surface). 2. Install the two WLAN antennas with a distance of minimum 12.5 cm (5 inches) between the two antennas.3. For optimum performance mount the two antennas at an angle of 90° to each other.:/$1DQWHQQD:/$1DQWHQQD0LQLPXPGLVWDQFHFPLQFKHVFigure 5-2: Mounting two WLAN antennas for optimum performanceMake sure the cable loss requirements are met, for further details see in the section Wiring WLAN antenna interface on page 5-34.Operating with one WLAN antennaYou can also use a single WLAN antenna. For details how to wire a single WLAN antenna see Wiring WLAN antenna interface on page 5-34.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-8 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.3 Electrical installation and wiring5.3.1 Wiring symbolsThroughout the wiring section these common symbols are used:The following subsections are available:•Wiring power supply•Wiring the satcom antenna•Wiring ARINC 429 interfaces•Wiring GPS interface•Wiring Ethernet•Wiring WLAN antenna interface•Wiring ISDN•Wiring telephone systems•Wiring Sigma7 (2-wire) handsets•Wiring ICG DECT Cordless Handset (2-wire) phone•Wiring discretes•Wiring the Switch Annunciator Panel•Wiring the Switch Annunciator Panel•Wiring the maintenance interfaceCoaxShieldGround (fuselage)TwistedTwisted and shieldedTable 5-3: Wiring symbolsImportant Each wiring drawing in this chapter only shows the connections referred to in that particular section. Other connections may be required for the system to work properly.SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-955555.3.2 Wiring power supplyWiring the TT-5040A SBUThe Aircraft power bus interfaces supply the electric power required to operate the SBU. They also supply a chassis connection to the aircraft chassis and the installation tray for EMC purposes. The +28 V DC Power wire must include a circuit breaker capable of carrying the required current continuously under the required environmental conditions.The following drawing shows the wiring of the SBU to the Aircraft Power Bus.SBU maximum power consumptionThe CM, HLD and some satcom antennas are powered by the SBU. Therefore the total power consumption of the SBU depends on which satcom antenna type is connected to the SBU. See Table A-1 on page A-2 for the total power consumption of the SBU for the satcom antenna types available.Pins for SBU power supplyThe following list shows the pins used for the SBU power supply.Figure 5-3: Wiring SBU power supply77$6%8>@ 73*1'3RZHU5HWXUQ9'&$LUFUDIW3RZHU%XV>@7RWDOUHVLVWDQFHPD[P2KPLQFO&LUFXLW%UHDNHU>@'LUHFWO\WR$LUFUDIW*URXQGZLWKOHVVWKDQPFDEOH7RWDOUHVLVWDQFHPD[P2KP>@'LUHFWO\WRLQVWDOODWLRQWUD\DQGDLUFUDIWFKDVVLVPD[P2KPUHVLVWDQFH>@5HFRPPHQGHGFLUFXLWEUHDNHU.OL[RQ7&VHULHV$FXUUHQWUDWLQJ>@,I6$7&202Q2IIVZLWFKLVUHTXLUHG73LVURXWHGWRDQH[WHUQDOVZLWFKWRJURXQG%3739'&3RZHU&KDVVLV*URXQG>@$>@>@73 6%8Q21212))>@SBU pin Name DescriptionTP1 +28 V DC Power +28 V DC Power input from Aircraft power bus.TP2 GND, Power Return Aircraft Ground connectionBP3 Chassis Ground Chassis connection, connected to installation tray and Aircraft chassis.TP3 SBU nOn, Discrete Input Power On/Off for the SBU and units powered by the SBUTable 5-4: Pins for SBU power supplySB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-10 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HDescription of SBU power supply+28 V DC PowerIt is essential to keep the line impedance below the specified limits. See Cable requirements, SBU power supply on page 5-10. Reverse polarity protection is only guaranteed if the suggested circuit breaker is used. A suitable circuit breaker with sufficiently low resistance would be Klixon 2TC series with 7.5 A current rating.Chassis Ground (BP3)The Chassis connection ensures that the SBU cabinet and the installation tray have the same potential, and that there is a connection from the cable shields to the cabinet to comply with EMC requirements.Connect the wire directly to the installation tray and to aircraft chassis.Remote ON/OFF - SBU nON, Discrete Input (TP3)The nON input is used to turn the SBU on and off. Connection of this input to ground turns on the SBU and all units powered by the SBU.The electrical specifications are defined in Description of the discrete types on page 5-44.Cable requirements, SBU power supply5.3.3 Wiring the satcom antennaCable lossesCableaa. The cable numbers refer to the numbers stated on the wiring drawing in the section Figure 5-3: Wiring SBU power supply.Max. resistance Other requirements[1] (+28 V DC Power) 250 m, incl. circuit breaker[2] (GND, Power Return) 25 mThe cable should be as short as possible, max. 1 m.[3] (Chassis Ground) 25 mConnect directly to aircraft chassis.Table 5-5: Requirements to SBU power cablesNote For maximum allowed cable lengths, see Power cables, allowed cable lengths on page 5-47.Note During installation, measure and write down the cable loss of the RF cables. You need these values later on in the web interface during configuration of the system. For further details see Configure RF settings on page 6-43.SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-115555Wiring TT-3002A LGA/LGA-3000The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 200 system using a TT-3002A low gain antenna.For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-8 on page 5-23.Figure 5-4: Wiring TT-3002A LGA/LGA-300077$6%877$+/'73$73$;;;%3$*36LQ'&RXW: ::;77$/*$$QWHQQD/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ5)7['&3RZHU0RGHP5)5[5)7['&3RZHU0RGHP&KDVVLV*URXQG5)5[7[5)5[:/RVVG%#0+]>@*36RQO\DYDLODEOHRQ/*$>@SB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-12 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWiring TT-5006A IGA/IGA-5001The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 300 system using a TT-5006A or IGA-5001intermediate gain antenna.For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-8 on page 5-23.Figure 5-5: Wiring TT-5006A IGA or IGA-500177$6%877$+/'73$73$;;;%3$*36LQ'&RXW$QWPRGHP: :::;77$,*$$QWHQQD-EOXH-UHG/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ/RVVG%#0+]5)7['&3RZHU0RGHP5)5[5)7['&3RZHU0RGHP&KDVVLV*URXQG5)5[7[5)5[>@2QO\77$VXSSRUWV156>@7KLVFDEOHPXVWEHZLUHGHYHQLI*36LVQRWXVHG>@>@SB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-135555Wiring HGA-6000 or HGA-6500The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 350 system using an HGA-6000 or an HGA-6500 high gain antenna.For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-6: Wiring HGA-6000/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ:::77$+/'+*$$QWHQQD;77$6%8$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[-5)9$36*$B7[B$2XW+$B7[B%2XW0*1'$$$B5[B$,Q%$B5[B%,Q9B'&,1<9B5(76-95710D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$9'&'/1$%,7(SB-Lite.book Page 13 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-14 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HFor the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-7: Wiring HGA-6500 Antenna (Variation 2, label at antenna plug: 1 and 2)/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ:::77$+/'+*$$QWHQQD9DULDWLRQ;77$6%8$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[-5)9$36$B7[B$2XW$B7[B%2XW*1'$*1'$$B5[B$,Q$B5[B%,Q9B'&,19B5(7-95710D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$9'&'/1$%,7(SB-Lite.book Page 14 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-155555For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-8: Wiring HGA-6500 Antenna (Variation 3 label at antenna plug: Y and S)/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ:::77$+/'+*$$QWHQQD9DULDWLRQ;77$6%8$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[-5)9$36*$B7[B$2XW+$B7[B%2XW0*1'$$$B5[B$,Q%$B5[B%,Q9B'&,1<9B5(76-95710D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$9'&'/1$%,7(SB-Lite.book Page 15 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-16 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWiring HGA-7001The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 350 system using an HGA-7001 high gain antenna.For the requirements to RF W1, W2 and W3 cables see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-9: Wiring HGA-700177$+/'+*$$QWHQQD;77$6%8$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[ $175)1RFRQQHFW9$36$QWHQQD%,7($$QWHQQD%,7(%$QWHQQD%,7(6KLHOG$QWHQQD&RQWURO6KLHOG$QWHQQD&RQWURO$$QWHQQD&RQWURO%9'&9'&571&KDVVLV*QG95710D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ:::%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$SB-Lite.book Page 16 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-175555AVIATOR 350: Wiring HGA-7001 with AIS 380 Aircraft Interface ModuleThe following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 350 system using an HGA-7001 high gain antenna and an AIS 380 Aircraft Interface Module.Figure 5-10: Wiring HGA-7001 with AIS 380 Aircraft Interface ModuleFor the requirements to RF W1, W2 and W3 cables see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Important To use this feature the SBU must have software 2.03 or higher.77$+/'+*$$QWHQQD;77$6%8$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[$175)1RFRQQHFW9$36$QWHQQD%,7(%$QWHQQD%,7($$QWHQQD%,7(6KLHOG$QWHQQD&RQWURO6KLHOG$QWHQQD&RQWURO%$QWHQQD&RQWURO$9'&9'&571&KDVVLV*QG95710D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ:::732XWSXW%56732XWSXW$5673,QSXW%5673,QSXW$566(55;-6(55;1(*6(57;6(57;1(*$,6-$5,1&7;$$5,1&7;%$5,1&5;$$5,1&5;%3:55(785193:5&+$66,6*1'9'&*1'&+$66,6*1'',6&5(7(,2',6&5(7(,2*5281'1RWHIRU$,63LQ',6&5(7(,2'LVFUHWH7;6SHHG6HOHFW2SHQ $5,1&+,3LQ',6&5(7(,2'LVFUHWH5;6SHHG6HOHFW*1' $5,1&/2SB-Lite.book Page 17 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-18 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWiring AMT-50The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 350 system using an AMT-50 high gain antenna.For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-11: Wiring AMT-50:::77$+/'$07$&8$%$076XEV\VWHP$07$QWHQQD;77$6%8*+$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[;0D[Pȍ/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ9$3695719'&9<9'&57136&KDVVLV*URXQG0%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$SB-Lite.book Page 18 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-195555Wiring AMT-700The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 350 system using an AMT-700 high gain antenna.For the requirements to RF W1, W2 and W3 cables see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-12: Wiring AMT-70077$+/'$07+*$$%;77$6%8*+$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[;0D[Pȍ/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ9$3695719'&9<9'&57136&KDVVLV*URXQG0--:::%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$SB-Lite.book Page 19 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-20 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWiring AMT-3500/3800The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 300 system using an AMT-3500 intermediate gain antenna or an AVIATOR 350 using an AMT-3800 high gain antenna.For the requirements to RF W1, W2 and W3 cables see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-13: Wiring AMT-3500/3800/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ:::77$+/'$07$QWHQQD;77$6%8$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$-5)9$36$QWHQQD%,7($$QWHQQD%,7(%$QWHQQD&RQWURO$$QWHQQD&RQWURO%'/1$%,7(9B'&,19B5(7-95710D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]9'&SB-Lite.book Page 20 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-215555Wiring IGA-5001, HGA-7000 and HGA-8000The following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 300 system using an IGA-5001 or an AVIATOR 350 system using a HGA-7000 or HGA-8000.For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2, W3 and W4 see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-14: Wiring IGA-5001. HGA-7000 and HGA-800077$+/',*$+*$+*$$QWHQQD;77$6%873$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[-%OXH5)'&*36&RQWURO-5HG*36$QWHQQDPRGHP'&%3$0D[Pȍ ;/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ/RVVG%#0+]::::SB-Lite.book Page 21 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-22 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWiring CMA-2102/CMA-2102SBThe following drawing shows the wiring for an AVIATOR 350 system using a CMA-2102SB antenna.For the requirements to RF cables W1, W2 and W3 see Table 5-9 on page 5-24.Figure 5-15: Wiring CMA-2102/CMA-2102SB77$+/'%68-73&'&0$6XEV\VWHP+*$;77$6%8-73&'$7[$5[73$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[5[7[;0D[Pȍ/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]/RVVG%#0+]G%#0+]'&UHVLVWDQFHȍ9$&+279$&&2/'-%3-%3-%3-6HH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDOIRU&0$$LUERUQH6DWHOOLWH&RPPXQLFDWLRQ$QWHQQD6\VWHPIRUGHWDLOV:::%3'DWDWR%68%%3'DWDWR%68$%3'DWDIURP%68%%3'DWDIURP%68$SB-Lite.book Page 22 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-235555Pins for connecting to HLD and SBUThe following list shows the pins used in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system for connecting the satcom antenna to the HLD and SBU.The following tables show the requirements to cable losses for cables between the satcom antenna, the HLD and the SBU. The cable loop DC resistance is the sum of the resistance in the shield and the center conductor.Table 5-8: RF cable requirements for satcom antenna systems, AVIATOR 200W1 (SBU Tx to HLD Tx)aa. Additional requirements: Antenna cable modem-attenuation: at 54 MHz: max. 4 dB, at 36 MHz: max. 3 dB.0 dB 17 dB < 0.6 W2 (HLD Rx to SBU Rx) 0 dB 17 dB n.a.W3 (HLD to antenna) 0 dB 0.3 dB n.a.W4 (SBU to antenna) 0 dB 17 dB < 1.5 SBU pin DescriptionTP A1 RF Tx output to HLDTP A3 RF Rx input from HLDBP A4 GPS input, DC out, Modem (coax.)BP12 Data to BSU or CMU, ARINC 429ABP18 Data to BSU or CMU, ARINC 429 BBP9 Data from BSU or CMU, ARINC 429ABP14 Data from BSU or CMU, ARINC 429 BTable 5-6: SBU pins for satcom antenna systemHLD connector DescriptionX1 L-Band Rx/Tx interface to antennaX2 RF Tx input from SBUX3 RF Rx output to SBUX4 Chassis GroundTable 5-7: HLD connectors for satcom antenna systemRF cable requirements for AVIATOR 200Min. cable Loss @1.6 GHzMax. cable Loss @1.6 GHzCable loop DC resistanceSB-Lite.book Page 23 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Table 5-9: RF cable requirements for satcom antenna systems, AVIATOR 300/350 W1 (SBU Tx to HLD Tx)aa. Additional requirements: Antenna cable modem-attenuation at 54 MHz: max. 4 dB, at 36 MHz: max. 3 dB.0 dB 18 dB < 0.6 W2 (HLD Rx to SBU Rx) 0 dB 20 dB n.a.W3 (HLD to antenna) 0 dB 0.7 dBbb. 0.3 dB for AMT-3500/3800.n.a.W4 (SBU to antenna) 0 dB 17 dB < 1.5 Electrical installation and wiring5-24 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HRF cable requirements for AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350Min. cable Loss @1.6 GHzMax. cable Loss @1.6 GHzCable loop DC resistanceSB-Lite.book Page 24 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-2555555.3.4 Wiring ARINC 429 interfacesWiring an ARINC 429 source systemThe SBU has two ARINC 429 input interfaces for two navigational inputs.For instructions how to install and set up the IRS, AHRS, NPI or GNSS system see the respective installation manual.The following drawing shows the wiring of a navigational input. Requirements to the cables are stated in the section Cable requirements, ARINC 429 on page 5-29.Pins for input from ARINC 429 sources The pins for navigational input are located in the bottom plug of the SBU rear receptacle.Description of the interface for navigational inputWhen the system is configured with the web interface, the CM contains the information:• Which navigational input is selected: IRS, AHRS, NPI or GNSS.• Whether primary or secondary input or both are installed.If primary and secondary ARINC 429 navigational input are both installed, they must be of the same type (IRS, AHRS, NPI or GNSS).• ARINC 429 Speed (High or Low). The primary and secondary navigational inputs can individually be set to high or low speed, depending on your configuration.Note The source for navigational data over ARINC 429 can be either an IRS, AHRS, NPI, GNSS or another navigational input compatible with the requirements in this section.ImportantFigure 5-16: Wiring ARINC 429 navigational input6HFRQGDU\$5,1&+6/6$5,1&5;3ULPDU\$5,1&+6/6$5,1&5;77$6%8%3%3%3%3SBU pin Name/descriptionBP5 Data from primary ARINC 429 navigational input ABP8 Data from primary ARINC 429 navigational input BBP7 Data from secondary ARINC 429 navigational input ABP13 Data from secondary ARINC 429 navigational input BTable 5-10: SBU pins for input from a navigational ARINC 429 sourceNoteSB-Lite.book Page 25 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-26 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HARINC data format for IRSThe required ARINC data format for IRS is listed in the following table:ARINC data format for AHRSThe required ARINC data format for AHRS is listed in the following table:Label (octal) Name Minimum update rate150 UTC Time (optional)a1 Hz260 UTC Date (optional)a1 Hz310 Latitude 1 Hz311 Longitude 1 Hz312 Ground speed 1 Hz313 Track angle True 1 Hz314 True heading 10 Hz324 Pitch angle 10 Hz325 Roll angle 10 Hz361 Altitude Inertial (optional)aa. The labels marked optional do not have an effect on the operation of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system, but may increase precision in the antenna pointing and time management.1 HzTable 5-11: ARINC data format for IRS Label (octal) Name Minimum update rate320 Magnetic heading 10 Hz324 Pitch angle 10 Hz325 Roll angle 10 Hz336 Inertial pitch rate (optional)aa. The labels marked optional do not have an effect on the operation of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system, but may increase precision in the antenna pointing.10 Hz337 Inertial roll rate (optional)a10 HzTable 5-12: ARINC data format for AHRSSB-Lite.book Page 26 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-275555ARINC data format for NPIThe required ARINC data format for NPI is listed in the following table:Table 5-13: ARINC data format for NPI150 UTC Time (optional)aa. The labels marked optional do not have an effect on the operation of the AVIATOR 200 system, but may increase precision in the time management.1 Hz260 UTC Date (optional)a1 Hz310 Latitude 1 Hz311 Longitude 1 Hz312 Ground speed 1 Hz313 Track angle Truebb. The SBU software only checks for the track angle when the ground speed is above 100 knots. This is applicable from version AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E): 1.07 and above, AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D (Level D): 2.01 and above.1 Hz361 Altitude Inertial (optional)a1 Hz ARINC data format for GNSSThe required ARINC data format for GNSS is listed in the following table:Table 5-14: ARINC data format for GNSS 103 Track anglea1 Hz110 Latitude 1 Hz111 Longitude 1 Hz112 Ground speed 1 Hz150 UTC Time (optional)b1 Hz260 UTC Date (optional) 1 Hz370 Height (optional) 1 Hz Note NPI can only be used together with the AVIATOR 200 (TT-3002A LGA).Label (octal) Name Minimum update rateNote GNSS can only be used together with the AVIATOR 200 (TT-3002A LGA).Label (octal) Name Minimum update rateSB-Lite.book Page 27 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-28 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWiring CMUThe following figure shows the wiring of the SBU to a CMU via ARINC 429 Tx / Rx interface.Figure 5-17: Wiring the CMUPins for CMUa. The SBU software only checks for the track angle when the ground speed is above 100 knots. This is applicable from version AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E): 1.07 and above, AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D (Level D): 2.01 and above.b. The labels marked optional do not have an effect on the operation of the AVIATOR 200 system, but may increase precision in the time management.ddͲϱϬϰϬ^hDh ϰϮϵddžWϭϴWϭϮWϭϰWϵϰϮϵZdžSBU pin Name/descriptionBP9 Data from BSU or CMU, ARINC 429ABP14 Data from BSU or CMU, ARINC 429BBP12 Data to BSU or CMU, ARINC 429ABP18 Data to BSU or CMU, ARINC 429BTable 5-15: SBU pins for input from GPS antennaSB-Lite.book Page 28 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-295555DescriptionTo configure installation parameters for ACARS/CMU in the web interface of the SBU see Set up CMU/ACARS (option) on page 6-51.When using the SBU/ACARS interface for SBB Safety Services (e.g. CPDLC traffic) and/or SB-Safety Voice is enabled, note that additional user traffic and interface connections to the SBU shall be addressed in the Security Safety Assessment (SSA) of the particular aircraft. The SBU does not comply to the ARINC-781 attachment 8, Security Considerations. There is no segregation between the user interfaces. All interfaces of the SBU shall be considered as 'Aircraft Control Domain'.Cable requirements, ARINC 429The cables for the ARINC 429 interfaces must be twisted and shielded. They must conform to the standards for aeronautical use.For recommended cable types, see Recommended cables for ARINC 429 on page 5-49.5.3.5 Wiring GPS interfaceWiring the GPS antennaThe following figure shows the wiring of the GPS interface when using a power splitter. You can use the power splitter shown in TT-5038A-003 Rx Power Splitter on page 3-4. In this configuration, the other GPS receiver must power the antenna.The SBU also has the ability to power an antenna with either 5 VDC or 26 VDC if a separate GPS antenna is connected directly to the SBU.Figure 5-18: Wiring GPS Interface with Power SplitterImportant'&%/2&.*36$QWHQQD3RZHU6SOLWWHUG%#*+=*36DQWHQQD$LUFUDIW6%877$6%8%3$*36LQ2WKHU$LUFUDIW,QVWDOODWLRQ*36$QWHQQD77$6%8%3$*36LQSB-Lite.book Page 29 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-30 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HThe cable loss limit between the GPS Antenna and the SBU depends on the active gain in the GPS antenna. The gain, minus the total loss in the cable(s) and Power Splitter must be in the range of 10 to 35 dB.Satcom Rejection: The GPS antenna must comply with DO-310. In particular section 2.2.6.3 and the requirement to withstand +8 dBm at frequencies above 1625 MHz. Antennas that are approved under TSO-C144 or TSO-C190 meet this requirement.Pin for input from the GPS antennaDescription of the GPS interfaceThis section describes the GPS interface when used to interface with a standalone GPS antenna. This interface is also used when connecting to a satcom antenna with built-in GPS antenna. For info on this, please see Wiring the satcom antenna on page 5-10.The GPS interface has 3 functions:• Reception of the GPS RF signal• Supply DC power to the GPS antenna or satcom antenna• Coax modem communication with the satcom antennaSBU pin Name/descriptionBP A4 GPS antenna input (coax), modem, DC outTable 5-16: SBU pins for input from GPS antennaSB-Lite.book Page 30 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-3155555.3.6 Wiring EthernetOverviewThe SBU has six 10/100BaseT Ethernet interfaces, plus the interface on the front of the SBU described in Wiring the maintenance interface on page 5-45.The following drawing shows the wiring of the rear SBU Ethernet interfaces.The RJ45 Ethernet interfaces match a standard straight network cable. You can freely select which of the Ethernet connections you want to use.The supported cable length is up to 100 meters (328 feet).Figure 5-19: Wiring Ethernet77$6%87[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%3$7[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%3$5[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%3$5[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%3$%3$VKLHOG7[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%3$7[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%3$5[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%3$5[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%3$%3$VKLHOG7[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%3$7[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%3$5[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%3$5[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%3$%3$VKLHOG7[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%37[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%35[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%35[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%37[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%37[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%35[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%35[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%37[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%37[%DVH7(WKHUQHWLQSXW%35[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%35[%DVH7(WKHUQHWRXWSXW%35-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU5-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU5-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU5-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU5-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU5-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU&RPPRQ6LJQDO*1'%3&RPPRQ6LJQDO*1'%3&RPPRQ6LJQDO*1'%3&RPPRQ6LJQDO*1'%3&RPPRQ6LJQDO*1'%3&RPPRQ6LJQDO*1'%3SB-Lite.book Page 31 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-32 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HPins for 10/100BaseT EthernetThe following list shows the pins used for the Ethernet interface.SBU pin Name Description RJ45 pin (F) NameBP A1.1 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 Input 1 TxD+BP A1.2 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 Output 3 RxD+BP A1.3 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 Input 2 TxD-BP A1.4 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #1 Output 6 RxD-BP A2.1 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 Input 1 TxD+BP A2.2 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 Output 3 RxD+BP A2.3 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 Input 2 TxD-BP A2.4 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #2 Output 6 RxD-BP A3.1 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 Input 1 TxD+BP A3.2 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 Output 3 RxD+BP A3.3 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 Input 2 TxD-BP A3.4 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #3 Output 6 RxD-BP6 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4 Output 6 RxD-BP10 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4 Input 1 TxD+BP11 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4 Input 2 TxD-BP15 Common Signal GND for Ethernet GND ShieldBP16 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #4 Output 3 RxD+BP17 Common Signal GND for Ethernet GND ShieldBP19 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5 Output 6 RxD-BP20 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5 Input 2 TxD-BP21 Common Signal GND for Ethernet GND ShieldBP22 Common Signal GND for Ethernet GND ShieldBP23 Rx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6 Output 6 RxD-BP24 Tx- 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6 Input 2 TxD-BP25 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5 Input 1 TxD+Table 5-17: SBU Pins for 10/100BaseT Ethernet SB-Lite.book Page 32 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-335555Wiring of RJ45 connector to Quadrax connectorThe physical layer conforms to IEEE standard 802.3 [1], Chapter 14: “Twisted Pair medium attachment unit”, except for the connector type. To be compliant with [1], use an RJ45 female connector for the user interface. The below drawing shows the corresponding RJ45 connection. The SBU is configured as Data communication Equipment (DCE), i.e. TX +/- are input and RX +/- are outputs.Figure 5-20: Ethernet pin configuration for SBUCommon Signal GND (BP15, BP17, BP21, BP22 and BP27)Common Signal GND is used to connect the shield of the Ethernet cables for Ethernet #4, #5 and #6 on the SBU. The shield for each cable is connected according to Figure 5-19: Wiring Ethernet. The shield of the Ethernet cables for Ethernet #1, #2 and #3 is connected to the shield of the Quadrax connectors.BP26 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #5 Output 3 RxD+BP27 Common Signal GND for Ethernet GND ShieldBP28 Tx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6 Input 1 TxD+BP29 Rx+ 10/100BaseT Ethernet #6 Output 3 RxD+SBU pin Name Description RJ45 pin (F) NameTable 5-17: SBU Pins for 10/100BaseT Ethernet (Continued)6%8SLQ73$$$6KLHOG7[' 7; LQSXWQF7[' 7; LQSXW5['5;RXWSXWQF5[' 5; RXWSXWQFQF  2KP TXDGUD[WZLVWHGDQGVKLHOGHGSDLUV7[' 7; LQSXWQF7[' 7; LQSXW5['5;RXWSXWQF5[' 5; RXWSXWQFQFDQGVKLHOGHGSDLUV6%8SLQ6%8'&(%3 %3%35-IHPDOHWR'7(%3%3&DEOH&DEOH 2KP TXDGUD[WZLVWHGSB-Lite.book Page 33 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-34 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.3.7 Wiring WLAN antenna interfaceBefore wiring the WLAN antenna interface make sure that your system has the Built-in Wireless Option TT-5040A-003.With software 4.00 and SB-Safety voice the WLAN access point must be disabled in the configuration software.OverviewThe following drawing shows the wiring of the SBU WLAN antenna interfaces.Figure 5-21: Wiring WLAN antenna interfaces #1 and #2WLAN low pass filterThe WLAN module in the SBU can in theory transmit in the 5 GHz (802.11a) frequency range. This is inhibited permanently by the software in the SBU. If the aircraft cannot be tested to be immune to 5 GHz signals, you can optionally insert a 2.4 GHz low pass filter into the WLAN Coax to safeguard the aircraft against transmission in the 5 GHz frequency range.WLAN pinsThe following list shows the pins used for the WLAN antenna interface on the SBU.Important77$6%8:/$1DQWHQQDFRD[73$:/$1DQWHQQDFRD[73$73:/$1HQDEOH:/$1DQWHQQDDQG::/RZ3DVV)LOWHU>@/RZ3DVV)LOWHU>@>@2SWLRQDOSBU pin Name/descriptionTPA2 WLAN antenna #1 (coax)TPA4 WLAN antenna #2 (coax)TP5 WLAN Enable, Discrete Input (active low)Table 5-18: SBU pins for WLAN antenna #1 and #2SB-Lite.book Page 34 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-355555Description of the WLAN interfaceThe WLAN interface on the SBU supports operation according to the IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g standards. The WLAN (2.4GHz) frequency band is divided into 14 channels.Not all countries allow full use of all channels. Also, some countries do not allow operation according to the 802.11g standard. Therefore the WLAN interface must be set up to the right country code. For further information, see WLAN country codes on page D-1.The maximum EIRP output level for WLAN 802.11b and 802.11g is 100 mW for indoors use. To prevent the EIRP output power from exceeding this limit, the maximum antenna gain must not exceed the cable loss between the antenna and the SBU.Operating with a single WLAN antennaIf operating with a single WLAN antenna, it is recommended to use the WLAN pin TP A2. Make sure to set up WLAN interface correctly — Antenna configuration: Main or Aux for single antenna operation — see WLAN interface (option) on page 6-22.Table 5-19: WLAN antenna configurationAntenna configuration SBU TP A2 SBU TP A4Diversity (antenna #1 and #2) TX/RX RXMain (antenna #1) TX/RX –Aux (antenna #2) – TX/RXRF cable requirements for WLANTo achieve optimal performance for the WLAN system select a cable type with a minimal cable loss when cabling the TT5040A-004 WLAN antenna. For a table with cable types and cable losses see Recommended RF cables on page 5-48.Order information for low pass filter for WLANCable Min. cable loss @2.4 GHzMax. cable loss @2.4 GHzFrom TP A2 to TT5040A-004 WLAN antenna and TP A4 to TT5040A-004 WLAN antenna0 dB 5 dBTable 5-20: Cable requirements for WLANProduct name Description ManufacturerCoaxial Low Pass Filter SLP-2950+Low-pass filter for WLANMini-Circuits P.O. Box 350166, Brooklyn, NY 11235 U.S.A.Phone: Home page: (718) 934-4500 www.minicircuits.comTable 5-21: Low pass filter for WLAN, order informationSB-Lite.book Page 35 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-36 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.3.8 Wiring ISDN Wiring drawingNote that even though the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system supports connection of several ISDN devices, the satellite channel only supports transmission on one ISDN channel.Pins for ISDNThe following lists show the pins used for the ISDN interfaces on the SBU.Note The AVIATOR 200 does not support ISDN services. The interface can be used for standard voice services.Important With software 4.00 and SB-Safety voice ISDN is forced disabled.Figure 5-22: Wiring ISDN interface,6'1H[WHUQDOO\SRZHUHG7(5-)HPDOH&RQQHFWRU,6'17[GRXWSXW73,6'17[HRXWSXW73,6'15[FLQSXW73,6'15[ILQSXW7377$6%8175[LQSXW5[LQSXW7[RXWSXW7[RXWSXW,6'17[FRXWSXW73,6'17[IRXWSXW73,6'15[GLQSXW73,6'15[HLQSXW737('RQRWFRQQHFW'RQRWFRQQHFW'RQRWFRQQHFW'RQRWFRQQHFWSBU pin Name/descriptionTP23 ISDN #1 Rx+ (c) input (NT)TP24 ISDN #1 Tx+ (d) output (NT)TP25 ISDN #1 Tx- (e) output (NT)TP26 ISDN #1 Rx- (f) input (NT)TP15 ISDN #2 Tx+ (c) output (TE). Do not connect!TP16 ISDN #2 Rx+ (d) input (TE). Do not connect!TP17 ISDN #2 Rx- (e) input (TE). Do not connect!TP18 ISDN #2 Tx- (f) output (TE). Do not connect!Table 5-22: SBU pins for ISDN SB-Lite.book Page 36 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-375555Description of SBU ISDN interfaceThe SBU has one ISDN interface. The ISDN of the SBU uses the SwiftBroadband service. The Euro ISDN S-bus interface is configured as the network side of the NT1 interface i.e. Rx is an input and Tx is an output.The ISDN interface on the SBU can address up to 8 ISDN devices. The ISDN interface supports 56/64kbps data rate and G4 Fax on the SwiftBroadband connection. You can also use the SBU ISDN interface to make an AMBE2 or 3.1 kHz audio call. The SBU does not provide DC power on the ISDN interface of the SBU. All ISDN devices connected to the SBU must be powered externally.To be compliant with ISO8877 [2] and the ISDN connector specification defined by ITU I.420 [6], an RJ45 Female Connector must be connected to the four-wire ISDN lines from the SBU. The SBU includes an internal 100  termination resistor to support cable lengths up to 100 meters (109 yards). Make sure the other end of the cable is terminated properly.Cable requirements for ISDN• Cable for the ISDN interface: 100  4-wire shielded cable.• The conductors must be twisted in pairs.• Supported cable lengths: up to 100 meters (328 feet).5.3.9 Wiring telephone systemsBuilt-in Private Branch Exchange (PBX) The built-in PBX of the SBU controls the 2-wire POTS interfaces #1 and #2 and one ISDN interface.The built-in PBX can also route VoIP calls that are terminated in the SIP server of the SBU.Without the Multi-voice option the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system supports one external call at a time. When the circuit-switched connection is in use by another phone, you have to wait until the line if free.VoIP calls and SIP telephonyYou can use phones with a SIP client and the WLAN interface to make calls. These calls are terminated in the SIP server of the SBU and routed through the built-in PBX on the Swift Broadband channel. For a detailed description how to set up your phone see SIP setup for ImportantFigure 5-23: ISDN RJ45 connector,6'15[,QSXWF,6'17[2XWSXWG,6'17[2XWSXWH,6'15[,QSXWIQRWFRQQHFWHG5-IHPDOHFRQQHFWRUQRWFRQQHFWHGQRWFRQQHFWHGQRWFRQQHFWHG5-IHPDOHSB-Lite.book Page 37 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-38 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HWifi-enabled phones on page H-1.2-wire POTS interface #1 and #2The 2-wire interfaces may be connected and configured to the 2-wire systems listed below:• TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset / TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle• ICG DECT Cordless Handset with POTS interface• Sigma7 phone with POTS interface• Fax or Modem data with POTS interface• Headset interface box PTA-12 Airborne telephone adapter• Secure devices with POTS interface (STU/FNBDT)The maximum number of telephones on each 2-wire POTS interface is: Two TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset / TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle or two Sigma7 phones.Note that the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system supports one external call at a time. When one phone is in use, you cannot use the other phone on the same 2-wire POTS interface.ISDN interfaceThe ISDN interface on the SBU may be used with an ISDN phone or fax machine and/or an ISDN data modem. A maximum of 8 ISDN units (ISDN phones, ISDN fax or ISDN data modem) may be connected to the ISDN interface, but only one unit may be active at a time. Secure device is supported with ISDN interface (STE).Configuration of wired handset interfacesThe following drawing shows the possible combinations of devices connected to the handset interfaces.Important With software 4.00 and SB-Safety voice, the 2-wire POTS interface #2 is forced disabled.Important With software 4.00 and SB-Safety voice, the ISDN interface is forced disabled.SB-Lite.book Page 38 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-395555Wiring 2-Wire HandsetsThe following drawing shows the wiring of the TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset / TT-5622B 2-Wire Cradle.Pins for 2-wire interfacesThe below lists show the pins used for the 2-wire interfaces of the SBU.Table 5-23: SBU pins for 2-Wire interface TP6 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #1 (Ring)TP7 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #2 (Ring)TP11 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #1 (Tip)TP12 2-Wire Voice/Fax/Modem #2 (Tip)Figure 5-24: Handset interfaces with possible combinations of connected devices.77$6%83ULYDWH%UDQFK([FKDQJH3%;ZLWK6,3VHUYHU,6'1,6'1GHYLFHVZLWKH[WHUQDOSRZHU67( ,6'1LQWHUIDFHZLUH32762QHRIWKHIROORZLQJ77%:LUH+DQGVHWZLWK77% :LUH&UDGOH,&*'(&7&RUGOHVV+DQGVHW6LJPD3KRQH)$;0RGHP37$ZLUHLQWHUIDFHZLUH3276 ZLUHLQWHUIDFH2QHRIWKHIROORZLQJ77%:LUH+DQGVHWZLWK77% :LUH&UDGOH,&*'(&7&RUGOHVV+DQGVHW6LJPD3KRQH)$;0RGHP37$9R,36,3 :/$1LQWHUIDFH:/$1HQDEOHG6,3WHOHSKRQHFigure 5-25: Wiring T&T 2-Wire Handset systems77%:LUH&UDGOH77%:LUH&UDGOH77%:LUH+DQGVHW77%:LUH+DQGVHW1RWHVKRUWFDEOHZLWK6XE'FRQQHFWRULVPRXQWHGRQHDFKFUDGOH77$6%8ZLUHID[PRGHPZLUHID[PRGHP'%)'%0'%0 '%) 73737LS5LQJ ZLUH9RLFH)D[0RGHP73737LS5LQJ ZLUH9RLFH)D[0RGHP5-5-FDEOHFDEOHSBU pin Name/DescriptionSB-Lite.book Page 39 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-40 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HDescription of 2-wire interfaces #1 and #2The SBU has two 2-wire Voice/Fax/Modem POTS interfaces connected to the PBX. The interfaces comply with 2-wire 600  standard US DTMF telephones. The 2-wire interfaces are not galvanically isolated from the aircraft frame. Galvanic isolation is required at the external 2-wire terminal.Two TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset phones can be connected in parallel on each interface. These interfaces are used for the TT-5621B/ TT-5622B Thrane & Thrane aeronautical handset system, but may also be used for e.g. the Sigma7, ICG DECT Cordless Handset phones, fax, modem or secure devices and PTA-12.For information on wiring of Sigma7 phones, see Wiring Sigma7 (2-wire) handsets on page 5-40. For information on wiring of ICG DECT Cordless Handset phones, see Wiring ICG DECT Cordless Handset (2-wire) phone on page 5-41.Supported cable length: 100 meters (328 feet)5.3.10 Wiring Sigma7 (2-wire) handsetsOne or two Sigma7 handsets can be connected to the 2-wire interfaces of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. The following drawing shows the wiring of Sigma7 handsets.Figure 5-26: Wiring Sigma7 handsetsThe above wiring shows the connection for the non-backlit Sigma7 handset. The backlit version Sigma7 handset uses pin 6 for Tip 1 and pin 3 for Ring 1.Connect J1 on the Sigma7 handset to the rear receptacle of the SBU according to the wiring drawing above.In order for the volume in the Sigma7 handset to be sufficient, it is normally necessary to adjust the “ear volume” using the menu system of the handset. For information on how to do this, see Sigma7 setup on page 6-99.For information on the 2-wire interface, see Pins for 2-wire interfaces on page 5-39.NoteImportant:,5()$;02'(032766LJPD&UDGOH:,5()$;02'(0327677$6%873737373-SLQ-SLQ6LJPD&UDGOH-SLQ-SLQ+DQGVHW,QWHUIDFH+DQGVHW,QWHUIDFHSB-Lite.book Page 40 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-4155555.3.11 Wiring ICG DECT Cordless Handset (2-wire) phoneOne or two ICG DECT Cordless Handset phones can be connected to the 2-wire interfaces of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. The following drawing shows the wiring of ICG DECT Cordless Handset 2-wire phones.Connect J2 on the base station of the ICG DECT Cordless Handset phone to the rear receptacle of the SBU according to the wiring drawing above. The base station is supplied together with the handset and cradle.In order for the ICG DECT Cordless Handset phone to work properly, it is normally necessary to make a few initial adjustments of the handset. For information on how to do this, see ICG DECT Cordless Handset setup on page 6-99.For information on the 2-wire interface, see Pins for 2-wire interfaces on page 5-39.Figure 5-27: Wiring ICG DECT Cordless Handset handsetsImportant:,5()$;02'(03276*+]&RUGOHVV%DVH8QLW:,5()$;02'(0327677$6%873737373-SLQ-SLQ-SLQ*+]&RUGOHVV%DVH8QLW-SLQ-SLQ-SLQ+DQGVHW,QWHUIDFH+DQGVHW,QWHUIDFHSB-Lite.book Page 41 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-42 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.3.12 Wiring discretesDiscrete annunciators and Chime/Lamps InhibitThe following drawing shows the wiring of discrete annunciators and Chime/Lamps Inhibit.Pins for discrete annunciatorsThe following list shows the pins used for discrete annunciators:Table 5-24: SBU pins for discrete annunciatorsTP27 Annunciator #3 “Service available” (Discrete I/O) Output: Lamp DriverTP28 Annunciator #1 “Incoming call” (Discrete I/O) Output: Lamp DriverTP29 Annunciator #2 “SBU failed” (Discrete I/O) Output: Lamp DriverBP1 Annunciator #4 “Message received” (Discrete I/O) Output: Lamp DriverFunction of discrete annunciatorsThe function of the annunciators is as follows:• Annunciator #1 “Incoming call” (TP28) Default behavior: Active (low) when a handset is ringing. • Annunciator #2 “SBU Failed” (TP29). Default behavior: Active (low) whenever a BITE with severity essential or fatal is active on the SBU.• Annunciator #3 “Service available” (TP27). Default behavior: Active (low) when the SwiftBroadband Service is available.• Annunciator #4 “Message received” (BP1). Default behavior: Active (low) when a Message is received in the SBU.Figure 5-28: Wiring discretes $QQXQFLDWRU77$6%8'LVFUHWH,QSXWV6%8(QDEOH:/$1(QDEOH6%8Q2Q 737373$QQXQFLDWRUV$QQXQFLDWRU$QQXQFLDWRU$QQXQFLDWRU737373%373&KLPH/DPSV,QKLELW&KLPH/DPSV,QKLELW6SDUH,26SDUH,2 %3%3736SDUH,2SBU pin Name and description Discrete typeaa. The discrete interfaces are described in Description of the discrete types on page 5-44. SB-Lite.book Page 42 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-435555Pins for Chime/Lamps Inhibit inputPins used for the Chime/Lamps Inhibit input:Description of the Chime/Lamps Inhibit interfacesThe SBU has one discrete input for the Chime/Lamps Inhibit function. This input is used to inhibit Satcom activation of the chime and call lights during take-off and landing. The Inhibit function is activated by connecting this input to ground. Polarity of the discrete annunciators and Chime/Lamps Inhibit inputIn the web interface you can change the polarity of the discrete annunciators and the Chime/Lamps Inhibit input from Active low (default) to Active high. For instructions how to do this see Configure the discrete I/O interfaces on page 6-37.Pins for non-configurable discrete inputs on the SBUThe SBU has two non-configurable discrete inputs: one for SBU nON, one for WLAN Enable. The below table shows the pin-out for the discrete inputs:SBU nON (TP3): The SBU nON input is used to power the SBU on and off. Connect this input to ground to turn on the SBU. The electrical specification is defined in Description of the discrete types below.SBU Enable (TP8): The SBU Enable discrete input is active low and must be connected to ground. The input is used to inhibit the transmitter output signal and to reset the SBU, when the input is released to either open circuit or to high state. When pulled low the SBU is enabled (active). The electrical specification is defined in the following section, Description of the discrete types.WLAN Enable (TP5): WLAN Enable input is used to enable the WLAN interface. The input is active low and the WLAN interface is kept disabled and reset as long as the input is at the high state. When the input is connected to ground or to low state the WLAN interface will be initialized and ready for use. When the WLAN interface is not enabled no RF is emitted from the interface.SBU pin Name/description Specification of discrete typeTP13 Chime/Lamps Inhibit Discrete input (default: active low)Table 5-25: SBU pin for Chime/Lamps Inhibit inputSBU pin Name/descriptionTP3 SBU nON inputTP8 SBU Enable inputTP5 WLAN Enable inputTable 5-26: SBU pins for discrete inputsSB-Lite.book Page 43 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-44 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HDescription of the discrete typesDiscrete type and description:5.3.13 Wiring the Switch Annunciator PanelThe following drawing shows the wiring of discrete inputs/annunciators and the Switch Annunciator Panel MD-41-1948.Figure 5-29: Wiring the Switch Annunciator Panel MD-41-1948Discrete type DescriptionLamp Driver The output configuration forms a switch closure to ground. The electrical specification for the Lamp type switch is:Open switch hold-off voltage: max. +39.5 V DC Closed switch voltage: max. 1 V DC at 500 mA Open switch resistance (OFF): min. 100 kDiscrete input The discrete input detects the following states: “Open” voltage: 7 V DC to 39.5 V DC or 100 k to ground. “Short” voltage: 0 ±3.5 V DC or 1500  to ground.Input characteristics: Reaction time: <500 ms. The internal interface is diode-isolated for parallel connection externally to any other LRU(s), with at least 200 k of isolation, when power is not applied.Table 5-27: Specification of discrete types 77$6%86%8Q2173:/$1HQDEOH736HUYLFHDYDLODEOH73,QFRPLQJFDOO736%8IDLOHG730'6ZLWFK$QQXQFLDWRU3DQHO6%8RQRII:/$1RQRII6(59$9$,/&$//)$,//DPS7HVW9'&3RZHU9'LPPHULQ*URXQGSB-Lite.book Page 44 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-4555555.3.14 Wiring an SB-Safety Voice Annunciator PanelThe SBU can be connected to an SB-Safety Voice Annunciator Panel. This panel then shows the SB-Safety call status, that is priority and an SB-Safety Voice fail button. The pins for connecting the panel are located in the top plug (TP) and the bottom plug (BP) of the SBU rear receptacle. To connect such a panel see the following table.Table 5-28: SBU pins for discrete inputsTP14 Lamp for priority 1 Active low Spare I/OBP4 Lamp for priority 2 Active low Spare I/OBP2 Lamp for priority 3 Active low Spare I/OTP28 Lamp for SB-Safety Voice call Active low Incoming callTP27 Lamp for SB-Safety Voice fail Active high Service availableaa. When SB-Safety Voice is not enabled, this output is an indicator for Service Available which shows the availability on either PS or CS connections. When SB-Safety Voice is enabled, SB-Safety Voice Fail is indicated after manually changing the polarity through configuration in the web interface to Active high. Note that there is no visual indication on fail of the PS availability when SB-Safety Voice is enabled, the output only shows the availability of a CS connection. If also ACARS is installed, you can find this information via the ACARS pages on the MCDU.Chime/Lamps Inhibit discrete input behavior with SB-Safety VoiceYou can use the Chime/Lamps Inhibit discrete input (TP13, default: active low) to control the chime signals. When this input is active, the following is affected:• The Call indicator will not indicate an incoming call.• There will be no ring signal on the POTS interface on an incoming call. However the priority indicator will flash and the call can be answered as normal.5.3.15 Wiring the maintenance interfaceMaintenance PC and ATE The following drawing shows the wiring of:• the LAN Maintenance PC connection on the SBU,• ATE interface (for factory use only - do not connect!)Important To use this feature the SBU must have software 4.00 and CMU/ACARS/SB-Safety voice option.SBU pin Name/description Polarity Use without SB-Safety Voice serviceImportant Make sure that there is no cable connected to the SBU Maintenance connector when the aircraft is airborne.SB-Lite.book Page 45 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Electrical installation and wiring5-46 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HPins for the Maintenance interface on SBUThe following list shows the pins used for the Maintenance interface on the SBU.Description of the Maintenance interface on the SBUUse the Maintenance interface on the front of the SBU for configuration and maintenance purpose, i.e. for tasks like configuring RF cable settings for the installation, satcom antenna setup, navigational input and software upgrades. The interface is a 10/100BaseT Ethernet and can be accessed from a PC with Ethernet interface. The PC is connected using a standard straight network cable.The maintenance interface has the following characteristics:• 100 Base-T /10 Base-T Ethernet• IEEE 802.3To access the configuration settings, use a PC with a browser and open the built-in web interface of the SBU. For further information, see Configuration tasks on page 6-2.Pins for Automatic Test Equipment (ATE)The SBU has two pins for Automatic Test Equipment (ATE): ATE #1 (TP9) and ATE #2 (TP10). The ATE pins are for factory use only.Figure 5-30: Wiring Maintenance PC and Reset77$6%873$7(73$7()3)3)3)30DLQWHQDQFH3&0DLQWHQDQFHFRQQHFWRU5-5['5['7['7['5-)RUIDFWRU\XVHRQO\'RQRWFRQQHFWSBU pin Name/DescriptionFP1 TxD+FP2 TxD-FP3 RxD+FP6 RxD-Table 5-29: SBU pins for Maintenance interfaceImportant Do not connect anything to the ATE pins, not even ground! Connecting the ATE pins can cause unintended function of the system. SB-Lite.book Page 46 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Recommended cables98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-4755555.4 Recommended cables5.4.1 IntroductionThis section lists recommended cables and allowed cable lengths for the cables in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system.5.4.2 Power cables, allowed cable lengthsAllowed cable lengths, SBUThe following table shows the allowed SBU cable lengths for selected AWG types. If other AWG types are used, make sure the contact type supports the AWG type.It is generally recommended to keep cable lengths as short as possible, specially on cables for Chassis GND.Allowed cable lengths, HLDThe following table shows the allowed HLD cable lengths for selected AWG types. If other AWG types are used, make sure the contact type supports the AWG type.It is generally recommended to keep the Chassis GND cable lengths as short as possible.Important For specific requirements to the cables, see the applicable section in 5.3 Electrical installation and wiring.NoteDescription Pin Contact type Max. resistance Max length (at 70C)AWG20 AWG18 AWG16 AWG14SBU +28 V DC PowerTP1 16 210 m a (250 m-40 m in 7.5 A circuit breaker)a. The max. cable resistance is calculated using the resistance of a Klixon 2TC circuit breaker. If another circuit breaker is used, the max. resistance and cable length may differ from these values.17 fta (5.2 m)27 fta (8.3 m)43 fta (13.2 m)(not suitable for this contact size)SBU GND, Power ReturnTP2 16 25 mThe cable should be as short as possible, max. 1 m.2 ft (0.6 m)3 ft (0.9 m)5 ft (1.5 m)(not suitable for this contact size)SBU Chassis GroundBP3 16 25 m Connect directly to aircraft chassis.2 ft (0.6 m)3 ft (0.9 m)3.3 ft (1.0 m)(not suitable for this contact size)Table 5-30: Allowed lengths for SBU power cablesNoteSB-Lite.book Page 47 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Recommended cables5-48 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.4.3 Recommended Power cablesThe cable types shall meet the following standards:• M27500 for shielded wire.• M22759 for single wire.5.4.4 Recommended RF cablesThe following cable types are recommended for the RF cables. Contact your cable supplier for other cable types.Equivalent cable types, which meet the requirements, may also be used.Description Pin Contact type Max. resistance Max length (at 70C)AWG20 AWG18 AWG16 AWG14HLD Chassis GroundX4 M5 threaded stud25 m (additional req.: max. length 1 m)2 ft (0.6 m)3 ft (0.9 m)3.3 ft (1.0 m)(not suitable for this contact size)Table 5-31: Allowed lengths for HLD Chassis Ground cableNoteCABLE TYPE SPECIFICATIONSPart number Diameter (mm/in.)Minimum Bend Radius (mm/ in.)Attenuation (dB/100ft) @ 1.6 GHzSize 5 contact part numberECS 3C142B 4.95/0.19 25.4/1.0 18.1 620021PIC S22089 11.0/0.43 63.5 / 2.5 4.8 n.a.PIC S33141 6.9/0.27 35.6 / 1.4 8.6 n.a.ECS 310801 11.48/0.452 57.4 / 2.26 4.6 n.a.ECS 311201 8.05/0.317 40.6 / 1.6 6.7 n.a.ECS 311501 5.82/0.229 30.5 / 1.2 9.1 P922EMTEQ TFLX165-100 4.19/0.17 21.6 / 0.85 16.8 A45165-1EMTEQ PFLX195-500 5.08/0.2 12.7/0.5 14.0 A45195-1EMTEQ TFLX295-100 7.95/0.31 40.6 / 1.6 7.6 n.a.EMTEQ TFLX480-100 12.2/0.48 57.2 / 2.25 4.8 n.a.Table 5-32: List of Recommended RF CablesSB-Lite.book Page 48 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Recommended cables98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-495555Maximum cable lengths for WLAN cables5.4.5 Recommended cables for ARINC 429Use ARINC 429 cables that meet the following standard:• M27500 for shielded wireThe cables for the ARINC 429 interfaces must be twisted and shielded and conform to the standards for aeronautical use.5.4.6 Recommended cables for EthernetCables for Ethernet on SBU (Quadrax connectors)Use an Ethernet cable that meets one of the following standards:• TIA/EIA568-A CAT5 Requirements• FAR 25.869(a)The following cable types meet the requirements:• Part number: 422404, Quadrax 24 Awg from ECS• Part number: F 4704-4 from Draka FilecaCable from SBU to WLAN antenna W5 and W6 aa. W5 and W6 stand for the cables needed when wiring the TT-5040A SBU, see Wiring WLAN antenna interface on page 5-34.Part numberCable diameter (mm/in.)Attenuation (dB/100 ft)Maximum cable lengthSize 5 contact part numberRF specification @2.4 GHz: 5 dBPIC S22089 11.0/0.43 6.7 dB 75 ft (23 m) n.a.PIC S33141 6.9/0.27 11.0 dB 46 ft (14 m) n.a.ECS 3C142B 4.95/0.19 22.2 dB 22 ft (6 m) 620021ECS 310801 11.48/0.452 6.5 dB 75 ft (23 m) n.a.ECS 311201 8.05/0.317 8.9 dB 56 ft (17 m) n.a.ECS 311501 5.82/0.229 10.7 dB 46 ft (14 m) P922EMTEQ PFLX195-500 5.08/0.2 16.81 30 ft (9 m) A45195-1EMTEQ TFLX165 100 4.19/0.17 21.16 dB 23 ft (7 m) A45165-1EMTEQ TFLX295 100 7.95/0.31 9.8 dB 52 ft (16 m) n.a.EMTEQ TFLX480 100 12.2/0.48 5.8 dB 85 ft (26 m) n.a.Table 5-33: Allowed lengths for WLAN cables SB-Lite.book Page 49 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Activation of airtime services5-50 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-H5.4.7 Cables for Discrete SignalsUse cables for discrete wiring that meet the following standard:• M27500 for shielded wire5.5 Activation of airtime servicesBefore the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system becomes operational, the aircraft owner or operator must settle a contract with an Inmarsat Service Provider (ISP) so the system can be activated. The airtime provider handles terminal activation, billing and technical support that is related to the communication network.The activation process may take some time, so to make sure it is ready in time, start the activation procedure some time before the installation on the aircraft begins.SwiftBroadbandThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is delivered with the SIM card permanently installed in the CM of the SBU, but not activated. The SIM card is pre-authenticated by Inmarsat and identified by its unique IMSI number (International Mobile Subscriber Identity). The IMSI is usually 15 digits long.The IMSI number is printed on the part number label of the CM. It is also printed on the Certificate of Conformity letter belonging to the CM.You need the IMSI to activate the Satellite communication service.For details how to activate the SIM card please contact your airtime Provider. The contract for SwiftBroadband services with your airtime provider contains among other items the following phone numbers and identifiers:• Direct phone number that is associated with the IMSI number of the installation.Typically the service provider provisions the SIM card automatically to open up for the circuit-switched and packet switched services.To use the packet switched services you may have to enter the APN (Access Point Name), make sure that you have received this information from your service provider.For step-by-step instructions how to enter the APN see Set the common interface settings on page 6-27.Making calls and using the InternetFor information on how to make a call to and from the system or go on the Internet etc. see the User Manual (part number: 98-127719).Service providersYou find a list of Service providers on Inmarsat’s web site, Partner search (http://www.inmarsat.com/partners/search-for-partner/).NoteNoteSB-Lite.book Page 50 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Activation of airtime services98-127093-H Chapter 5: Installation 5-515555To retrieve the SIM card ID (IMSI)With the system you receive the IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the Configuration Module of your AVIATOR system.The SIM card is permanently installed in the CM of the SBU. Do not take out and replace the SIM card.You can read out the IMSI number from the web interface that is used to configure and control the AVIATOR system. It is listed on the page Dashboard. You can also retrieve the IMSI number in the diagnostic report that the system can generate. For instructions how to access the web interface see Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface on page 6-6. For instructions how to generate a diagnostic report see under Initial troubleshooting on page 7-18.The IMSI number is also printed on the part number label of the CM.ImportantNoteSB-Lite.book Page 51 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Activation of airtime services5-52 Chapter 5: Installation 98-127093-HSB-Lite.book Page 52 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 6-1Chapter 66666Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6This chapter has the following sections:•Configuration tasks•Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface•The Dashboard•The phone book•To set up the interfaces•SB-Safety Voice (option)•LAN/WLAN network users•Administration•Site map•Configuration of 3rd party phone systems•AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ready for useNote Line of sight during operationYou can configure the system while the aircraft is in the hangar. Note that you cannot typically check the satellite communication while the aircraft is still in the hangar. There must be a line of sight between the Satcom antenna and the satellite in order to use the satellite service.Figure 6-1: Line of sight when communicating with the satelliteSatcom AntennaSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Configuration tasks6-2 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.1 Configuration tasksHaving installed the AVIATOR 200/300/350 System you must configure the SwiftBroadband Unit properly for use with the current antenna setup, including cable losses for the installation, and select the correct navigational input. Furthermore the interfaces have to be set up and configured to the specific aircraft installation and application requirements. IP connections, network user groups and profiles for IP data usage including LAN/WLAN network management must be configured so the required applications run smoothly on the system. For this purpose you use the built-in web interface of the AVIATOR system.6.1.1 Basic configuration of the SBUAs a minimum, you need to set up the following parameters in the built-in web interface of the SBU:1. On the DASHBOARD verify that you have the latest SBU software version (see cobham.com/satcom, Service and support). Verify also that the certification level is correct (Level-D or Level-E). For more information on the individual fields see The Dashboard on page 6-12. Figure 6-2: Basic configuration of the SBU (AVIATOR 300 example), step 1/62. In SETTINGS > System type, select your AVIATOR system and click Apply. Note Before you start configuring the SBU make sure that the Configuration Module is mounted in the SwiftBroadband Unit.CAUTION! Selecting a wrong system type may cause damage to the satcom antenna or GPS antenna. If the system type purchased can not be selected, please contact the supplier of your AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. Do not try to use a different system type!SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Figure 6-4: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 2/6Configuration tasks98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-36666For SBU software version 4.00 and SB-Safety voice flex key enabled see page 6-56.3. In SETTINGS > External systems enter the values for Navigational input. For detailed instructions see Set up the navigational input on page 6-44. Figure 6-5: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 3/64. In SETTINGS > RF settings, enter the cable losses applicable to the SBU. For detailed instructions see Configure RF settings on page 6-43.12312SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Configuration tasks6-4 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H5. In SETTINGS > LAN > Network user groups, click Edit.Figure 6-7: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 5/61Figure 6-6: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 4/612341243SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Configuration tasks98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-566666. Enter the APN from your service provider. For detailed instructions see Set up the network user groups on page 6-59.Figure 6-8: Basic configuration of the SBU, step 6/61234SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface6-6 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.2 Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interfaceUse the built-in web interface of the SBU to access the SBU configuration settings in the CM. A subset of the configuration settings are stored in a write-protected area of the CM. This subset contains the physical settings for the antenna, cabling and other external input.To set up or change the settings of the write-protected area you must connect a PC to the connector marked Maintenance on the SBU front plate. You can view all settings from any LAN or WLAN interface.The CM also contains the SIM card for accessing the SwiftBroadband service. The settings that can only be changed when connected to the SBU maintenance connector are:•Discrete I/O settings• System type• Cable loss data in Settings, RF settings, • Input from navigational systems in Settings, External systems• Enabling options (Router, WLAN) in Settings, Flex.No installation of software is necessary because the web interface is built into the SBU.Browsers supportedThe web interface is built into the terminal and is used for operating, setting up and configuring the system. You can access the web interface from a computer with a standard Internet browser.ImportantNote For information on daily use of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system refer to the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual.SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-766666.2.1 Topics in the web interfaceThe following drawing shows the topics available in the web interface. The topics in grey are mainly used during daily use of the system, they are described in detail in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual.Figure 6-9: Topics in the web interface6.2.2 Check the connection to the web interfaceTo check whether you can connect to the web interface of the SBU do as follows:1. Power up the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. Wait until the LEDs on the front plate show that the system is ready to be configured. • Power LED: Green, then wait for approximately one minute.2. Connect a PC to the Maintenance interface (standard Ethernet) on the front plate of the SBU.If you want to change the setup of the user interfaces and change network usage you can use any of the terminal LAN interfaces (up to 6) installed in the aircraft cabin or the Wireless connection, if available. If you want to change the physical settings for the antenna, cabling and other external input you must use the SBU maintenance connector at the front of the SBU. 3RUWIRUZDUGLQJ 1HWZRUNGHYLFHV1HWZRUNFODVVLILFDWLRQ1HWZRUNXVHUJURXSV333R(6WDWLFURXWH&DOOIRUZDUG &DOOEDUULQJ &DOOZDLWLQJ /LQHLGHQWLILFDWLRQ &ORVHGXVHUJURXS/RFDOH[FKDQJH/$1:/$13KRQH)D[,6'1&RPPRQ,3KDQGVHWV'LVFUHWH,26\VWHPW\SH5)VHWWLQJV([WHUQDOV\VWHPV)/(;7UDFNLQJ8SORDG&DOOFKDUJHV /RJKDQGOLQJ'DWDOLPLWV 3URILOHV 7UDIILFIORZILOWHUV 6,03,16,0/RFN 8VHUSHUPLVVLRQV5HPRWHPDQDJHPHQW/LQNPRQLWRULQJ5HPRWHDFWLYDWLRQ5HVWULFWHGGLDOLQJ0XOWLYRLFH(YHQWOLVW (YHQWORJ([WHQGHGVWDWXV 6HOIWHVW'$6+%2$5'&211(&73+21(%22.0(66$*(6&$//66(77,1*6$'0,1,675$7,21+(/3'(6.6,7(0$3&DOOVHWWLQJV&08$&$56Important For systems without the built-in router option enabled, i.e. the basic version or the version with Wireless option only: To use the SBU Maintenance connector disconnect or switch off any PC connected to another LAN interface of the SBU.SB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface6-8 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HAccess the web interfaceTo access the web interface, do as follows:1. Open your browser and enter the IP address of the SBU. The standard IP address is 192.168.0.1.If the local IP address of the SBU has been changed and you do not have the new address, you can temporarily set the IP address to the default value by pushing the Reset button on the front plate of the SBU. For detailed instructions see How to reset the IP address or the terminal software to default settings on page 7-15.For further information on the Reset button, see IP Reset (Default) button on page 7-14.For further information on IP addresses of the SBU see Set up the LAN IP addressing on page 6-19.2. The web interface opens directly with the DASHBOARD page. The web interface consists of the following sections:1. The navigation pane holds the main menu. Clicking an item in the menu opens a submenu in the navigation pane or a new page in the contents section.2. The signal status field shows the signal strength. The signal strength can vary during operation, depending on the current position relative to the Inmarsat satellite and the call or data session activity.NoteFigure 6-10: Sections of the web interface (example for AVIATOR 350)1234SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-966663. The icon bar shows icons for new SMS messages and for active events, when relevant. For explanations of the icons, see the next section, Icons in the icon bar.4. The contents section shows the page selected in the navigation pane. This section is used for viewing or changing settings, or for performing actions.When the Dashboard is displayed you have verified that the connection to the SBU can be established. The web interface is ready for use. You can continue to configure the system.If you cannot establish a connection to the SBU there might be problems with the Proxy server settings of your PC. See Proxy server settings in your browser on page 6-9 for further information.Icons in the icon barThe following icons may appear in the icon bar in the web interface:Navigate the web interface•To expand a menu, click the menu in the navigation pane. •To access status and settings, click the relevant subject in the navigation pane or click the relevant icon in the icon bar. The status or settings are displayed in the contents section.•To get an overview over the submenus available use the site map, click SITE MAP in the navigation pane. Click on items in the site map to go directly to the relevant location.Proxy server settings in your browserIf you are connecting your computer using a LAN or WLAN interface, the Proxy server settings in your browser must be disabled before accessing the web interface. Most browsers support disabling of the Proxy server settings for one specific IP address, so you can disable Proxy server settings for the web interface only, if you wish. Consult your browser help for information.To disable the use of a Proxy server completely, do as follows:Icon ExplanationA new SMS message, or information of Voice mail, has arrived. Click the icon to see new messages or information of Voice mail. For further information, see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual.An event is active. Click the icon to see a list of active events. For explanations of the event messages, see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual. Note that this icon will remain in the icon bar as long as the event is still active.Table 6-1: Web interface: IconsNote You can limit access to some parts of the web interface for certain users. Then the parts are grayed out. For information on how to set up user permissions, see Set up user permissions on page 6-87.SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface6-10 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H1. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings.2. Clear the box labeled Use a proxy server for your LAN. 3. Click OK.When the proxy server settings are disabled, close and restart your browser. You may need to change this setting back on return to your Internet connection.IP address and DNS server address setupTo check whether automatic IP address and DNS server address is obtained automatically for your computer, do as follows (example for Windows 7):1. Go to Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center.2. Click on the LAN connection you want to use.3. Select Properties, highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).4. Click Properties. 5. Make sure that the following is selected: - Obtain an IP address automatically - Obtain DNS server address automaticallyNote The following description is for Microsoft Internet Explorer. If you are using a different browser, the procedure may be different.SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-116666Allocating IP addresses and DNS server lookups are handled by the SBU. SB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
The Dashboard6-12 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.3 The Dashboard6.3.1 OverviewThe Dashboard is the first screen that is displayed when the user or administrator enters the IP address of the web interface. The Dashboard is used for control and inspection of ongoing communication and for viewing properties and status of the SBU and antenna.Figure 6-11: Web interface: Dashboard (Example: AVIATOR 350) aa. For I3 coverage the Status field shows: Logged off. When I4 coverage is available again, the system logs automatically on.6.3.2 PropertiesThe PROPERTIES section of the DASHBOARD shows the following information:•Airtime provider. The name of your Airtime Provider.•GPS position. The GPS position of your AVIATOR 200/300/350 system.•Status. The status of the SBU and antenna.Examples of status information are: Scanning, Ready and Data active.Note In some cases, the BGAN network does not allow the position to be displayed to the user. If this is the case, the display may just show GPS acquired. This means that the GPS position is received, but the user is not allowed to see it.This also applies if the AVIATOR 200/300/350 is not yet registered on the BGAN network, but the GPS position is received.SB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
The Dashboard98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-136666•Satellite selection. The satellite selected for logon. For further information, see To select the preferred BGAN satellite on page 6-18.•Current satellite. The currently used satellite and elevation angle.•Unit serial number. The serial number of the SBU.•Software version. The version of the software embedded in the SBU.•Certification level. This field shows whether the system is Level-D or Level-E certified.If Inconsistent is displayed, it means there is a mismatch with Level-D and Level-E certified units or software. This is not allowed.•IMSI number. The IMSI number (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) of the SBU. This is a unique number that identifies the SIM card of your SBU.•IMEI number. The IMEI number (International Mobile Equipment Identity) of the SBU. This is a unique number that identifies your SBU.6.3.3 View information on calls and data sessionsThe following sections in the Dashboard show information on calls and data sessions.•ONGOING DATA SESSIONS is a list of data profiles that are currently active, including the external IP address that is assigned to each profile.•ONGOING CALLS is a list of calls that are currently active. The list shows the call type and the time connected for each call.•SESSIONS TOTAL lists the totals for each session type. The list shows the session type with accumulated time for voice and Streaming data, and MB transferred for Standard data.The counters show totals for sessions since the counters were last cleared. For information on how to clear the counters, see Log handling on page 6-78.ImportantSB-Lite.book Page 13 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
The Dashboard6-14 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.3.4 Profiles on the dashboardThere is also a section on the dashboard showing the network user group and the profile(s) available for the current user. Here you can start the connections allowed for the current network user group. For more information on network user groups and profiles see LAN/WLAN network users on page 6-57.Start or stop a standard data connectionOn the Dashboard you can see under PROFILES ON LAN whether a standard connection is active or not.To start or stop a Standard connection for your Network user group do as follows:1. Open your Internet browser and enter the IP address of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 SBU (default: http://192.168.0.1) to access the Dashboard of the web interface.2. Locate PROFILES ON LAN at the bottom of the page.3. Click Start <name of profile>, in this case: Start Standard, or Stop <name of profile> to stop the connection.Figure 6-12: Web interface: Start a data connection4. Click Refresh to update the current state of the connection(s). Note that there might be some latency when updating the connection status, you might have to wait and click Refresh again to update the Dashboard to the current state.Note The PDP context for a data session is not activated before any unit in the LAN tries to communicate, e.g. sends a DHCP request. You can also remotely start a data connection, see Remote activation of a connection using SMS on page 6-90.SB-Lite.book Page 14 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
The phone book98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-1566666.4 The phone book6.4.1 General usageThe phone book is stored in the Configuration module. In the phone book you can:• Add new names and phone numbers.• Modify or delete existing names and phone numbers.• Look up phone numbers.• Look up short-dial numbers for easy dialing from a handset.For information how to access the phone book and how to add, edit and delete phone book entries see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual.6.4.2 View and edit the mobile and additional numbers1The mobile numbers are the phone numbers to use when making a call to the terminal.These numbers are not listed at delivery. Enter the numbers received from the Service and Airtime Provider.To view the mobile numbersTo view the mobile numbers of the SBU, select PHONE BOOK > Mobile numbers from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-13: Web interface: Phone book, mobile numbers (example, no Multi-voice)1. Available for systems with Multi-voice and subscriptions with additional numbers. NoteSB-Lite.book Page 15 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
The phone book6-16 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HTo enter or edit the mobile numbersTo enter or edit the mobile numbers, click Edit at the bottom of the page, type in the numbers received from your Airtime Provider and click OK. If Multi-voice is part of your system, the additional numbers from your airtime provider can be entered in the web interface.Figure 6-14: Web interface: Phone book, mobile numbers (example, with Multi-voice)SB-Lite.book Page 16 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-1766666.5 To set up the interfacesThe following subsections are available:•The SETTINGS page•Select the preferred BGAN satellite•Configure the LAN interface•WLAN interface (option)•Configure the Phone/Fax interface (2-Wire)•Configure the ISDN interface•Set the common interface settings•Set up call services•Manage AVIATOR Wireless Handsets•Configure the discrete I/O interfaces•Set the system type•Configure RF settings•Set up the navigational input•Calibrate the NRS magnetometer in the TT-5006A IGA•Set up CMU/ACARS (option)•Enable system options with FLEX keys•Tracking•SB-Safety Voice (option)6.5.1 The SETTINGS pageFrom the SETTINGS page you have access to the submenus for system settings and configuration. •LAN to configure the settings of the local area network.•WLAN to configure the wireless network adapter.•Phone/Fax to configure the phone and fax interfaces.•ISDN to configure the ISDN interface.•Common to configure settings that are common for all interfaces.•IP handsets to configure connected AVIATOR Wireless Handsets.•Discrete I/O to configure the discrete inputs/outputs of the installation.•System type to select the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system•RF settings to configure the cable losses of the installation.•External systems to select antenna type, configure the external navigational system and set up the ACARS/CMU connection.SB-Lite.book Page 17 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-18 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H•FLEX for the viewing and enabling options and AVIATOR systems.•Tracking to send position information to a server•Upload to upload new application software to the SBU.A text message on the screen informs you if you need to reboot the system to activate a new setting or configuration.To access this page, select SETTINGS from the left navigation pane.6.5.2 Select the preferred BGAN satelliteBy default the SBU is set up to automatically find the most appropriate satellite to connect to (Auto mode). However, if you are located in an area with more than one BGAN satellite available, you can select the satellite you prefer to use when registering on the BGAN network.To select the preferred BGAN satelliteTo select the preferred BGAN satellite, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-15: Web interface: Settings, satellite selection2. Select the satellite you prefer to use.If you select Auto (default setting) the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system automatically uses the most appropriate satellite. 3. Click Apply.The AVIATOR 200/300/350 terminates all ongoing connections and de-registers from the current satellite before registering on the new satellite.Important If you have any ongoing calls or data sessions, they will be terminated when you click Apply to change the satellite.Note If you have selected a specific satellite, the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system will only try to establish a connection to the selected satellite. This means that if the antenna is outside the coverage area for that satellite, the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system will not be able to register with the BGAN network.SB-Lite.book Page 18 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-1966666.5.3 Configure the LAN interfaceOverviewThe SBU has 6 LAN connectors plus 1 LAN maintenance connector on the SBU front plate.The major part of the LAN parameters are set up in the network management pages, which require an administrator password. For information on these settings, refer to LAN/WLAN network users on page 6-57. This page is by default not protected by an admin password. You can limit access to this page for certain user groups, for further details see Set up user permissions on page 6-87.Set up the LAN IP addressingIn the web interface you can set up the IP addressing between the SBU and devices connected to the SBU. The SBU has a built-in DHCP server which can be used to dynamically assign IP addresses to devices connected to the SBU.You can also set up the local IP address used by the connected devices to access the SBU. The Local IP address is the IP address of the SBU. It is used for accessing the web interface. The IP address towards the BGAN network is assigned by Inmarsat and visible on the Dashboard when the connection is active.Figure 6-16: SBU IP addresses: Local and global IP addresses, defaultCAUTION! All connections to the LAN interface may be affected when you change the settings below. This also includes your own current connection.Note No router option: If the SBU does not have the router option and works in single-user mode, only one device can be connected to it. This device cannot have a static IP address, it must use the DHCP server of the SBU.6%8'HYLFH'HYLFHDVVLJQHGE\WKHWHUPLQDO'+&3DVVLJQHGE\WKHWHUPLQDO'+&3/RFDO,3DGGUHVVRI6%8*OREDO,3DGGUHVVRI6%8$VVLJQHGE\%*$1QHWZRUNSB-Lite.book Page 19 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-20 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HTo change the local IP address of the SBU do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select SETTINGS > LAN.Figure 6-17: Web interface: Settings, LAN2. At DHCP status, select Enabled (recommended), or Disabled.•Enabled: The SBU assigns dynamic IP addresses to devices connected to the SBU. •Disabled: You need to set up a static IP address in the connected device.3. To change the Local IP address and the Netmask, type in the new address and netmask. By default, the address is 192.168.0.1 and the netmask is 255.255.255.0.4. Click Apply.Port forwardingPort forwarding enables you to set up a server connected to the SBU while the terminal is in Router mode. Without port forwarding it would not be possible to contact the server from the Internet. If you want to use port forwarding, the global IP address of the SBU should be a static IP address. Check with your service provider for availability of a static global IP address. Note that if not agreed otherwise, the global IP address of the SBU will be dynamically assigned as the SBU signs on to the BGAN network.For information on how to set the terminal in Router mode, see Set up the network user groups on page 6-59.The following example shows how to allow internet access to a mail server (smtp) connected to the terminal. CAUTION! This page is by default not protected by an admin password. You can limit access to this page for certain user groups, for further details see Set up user permissions on page 6-87.SB-Lite.book Page 20 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-216666The mail server in this example has the IP address 192.168.0.100.1. Select SETTINGS > LAN > Port forwarding in the left navigation pane.Figure 6-18: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Port forwarding2. Select Enabled to generally enable port forwarding.3. Type in the Incoming port range.4. Type in the Destination IP address, which in this example is the IP address of the mail server: 192.168.0.100.5. Type in the Destination port range.6. Repeat step 3 to step 5 to set up port forwarding to additional servers.7. In the Active column, select which ports should have port forwarding activated.8. Click Apply.You can now access the mail server from the Internet, using the external IP address of the SBU. For more information on setting an external IP address see step 6 in Edit a network user group on page 6-59.SB-Lite.book Page 21 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-22 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.5.4 WLAN interface (option)Note that the settings from the LAN window, except Enabled/Disabled, also apply for the WLAN interface. See Configure the LAN interface on page 6-19.Enable the WLAN interfaceTo enable the WLAN interface, do as follows:1. Make sure that the discrete input, i.e. TP5 WLAN Enable input, is wired correctly for WLAN enable. Read more about this in Pins for non-configurable discrete inputs on the SBU on page 5-43 and WLAN pins on page 5-34.2. In the web interface on the page SETTINGS > WLAN select the status Enabled.For systems without the built-in Wireless option (WLAN) the submenu will still be available in the web interface and the screen will show that the WLAN option is not enabled. To enable the WLAN option enter the FLEX key for this option in the submenu Settings > FLEX. The WLAN interface functions properly if both of the above conditions are fulfilled.For software 4.00 and higher and SB-Safety Voice: Do not enable WLAN.To configure the WLAN interface, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > WLAN.Figure 6-19: Web interface: Settings, WLAN (Example: AVIATOR 350)2. You can enable or disable the WLAN (default setting: Enabled).ImportantSB-Lite.book Page 22 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-2366663. For Broadcast SSID, select Enabled (default) or Disabled.Enabled: your WLAN access point is shown to other users.Disabled: your WLAN access point is hidden.4. Type in the SSID of your choice or accept the default SSID, which is the name of the installed system: AVIATOR 200, AVIATOR 300 or AVIATOR 350.The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) is the name of the wireless local area network. It is text with maximum 32 characters.All wireless devices on a WLAN must use the same wireless local area network in order to communicate with each other.5. Select the Country for your present location. The default setting is USA. For a list of countries that can use WLAN with the setting USA see Countries where the “US” country code applies on page D-2.6. If you want to let the system automatically find a channel set Select channel automatically to Enabled. Then the Channel list will be grayed out.If you have set Select channel automatically to Disabled you can set the Channel used for communication on the WLAN interface.7. Select the Security standard. Select one of the following encryption standards:• None (default)• WEP-40/64, enter the encryption key in hexadecimal format.• WEP-104/128, enter the encryption key in hexadecimal format.• WPA-TKIP, enter the encryption key in text format.• WPA2-AES, enter the encryption key in text format.8. Type in the Encryption key for the selected Security standard. This is not applicable if you have selected Security mode None.9. In Antenna configuration you set whether you have two or one WLAN antennas, and how a single WLAN antenna is connected to the SBU:•Diversity: 2 WLAN antennas are connected•Main: A single WLAN antenna is connected to SBU TP A4•Aux: A single WLAN antenna is connected to SBU TP A210. TX output power level: You can control the maximum transmitted output power from the SBU rear receptacle TP A2 or TP A4:• 100% – 20 dBm, 100 mW• 50% – 17 dBm, 50 mW• 25% – 14 dBm, 25 mW11. Select Enabled or Disabled next to MAC address filters.Enabled: You can set up a list of MAC addresses that are allowed access to your WLAN. Any device whose MAC address is not on the list will be denied access.Disabled: There will be no restrictions on MAC addresses.12. If you have enabled MAC address filters, type in the Allowed MAC addresses.The list may contain up to 16 MAC addresses.13. Click Apply.SB-Lite.book Page 23 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-24 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HTo disable the WLAN interfaceTo disable the built-in WLAN interface, do as follows:• Disable the WLAN interface using the TP5 WLAN Enable discrete input. Read more about this in Pins for non-configurable discrete inputs on the SBU on page 5-43 and WLAN pins on page 5-34.or• In the web interface go to Settings > WLAN and select Disable.If the WLAN option is not enabled the page Settings > WLAN will still be available and the screen will show information that the WLAN option is not enabled.6.5.5 Configure the Phone/Fax interface (2-Wire)To configure this interface do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Phone/Fax from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-20: Web interface: Settings, Phone/Fax2. For each Phone/Fax port, set the call type for incoming and outgoing calls.To identify Port 1 and Port 2 see the drawings of your specific installation. Mark the connectors in the air cabin accordingly.The call types are described in more detail in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual in the chapter Using a phone of fax machine.Note By default all handsets connected to the system will ring on incoming calls. If you have connected a fax, set the incoming call type on that 2-wire interface to 3.1 kHz Audio to avoid that the fax rings and answers an incoming Standard call.Important With software 4.00 or higher and SB-Safety voice enabled, the 2-wire POTS interface #2 is forced disabled.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 24 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-256666• For Incoming calls, you can check Standard or 3.1 kHz Audio or both. If you check both, any device connected to the Phone/Fax interface will react (ring) on incoming calls. 1 If you select only Standard, the Phone/Fax interface will only react on calls made to the Standard phone number, and not on calls to the 3.1 kHz Audio number.• For Outgoing calls, you can select either Standard or 3.1 kHz Audio. The selected type will be used by default, if possible, for any outgoing call. Note, however, that fax machines and modems must use 3.1 kHz Audio.3. Click Apply.6.5.6 Configure the ISDN interfaceTo configure the ISDN interface, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > ISDN.Figure 6-21: Web interface: Settings, ISDN1.If Multi-voice is enabled and you have entered additional numbers in the phone book, you can assign an additional number to this interface. For more information see Multi-voice (option) on page 6-91.Note You can override the default setting for outgoing calls by dialing 1* (force the call to Standard) or 2* (force the call to 3.1 kHz Audio) before the number. For further information, see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 User Manual.Note The AVIATOR 200 does not support ISDN services.Important With software 4.00 or higher and SB-Safety voice enabled ISDN is forced disabled.SB-Lite.book Page 25 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-26 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H2. Set the call type(s) for incoming calls.You can select Standard, 3.1 kHz Audio, UDI and/or RDI.13. Set the MSN (Multiple Subscriber Numbering) numbers that are to be assigned to each call type. In most pieces of ISDN equipment you can program multiple subscriber numbers. The number programmed into the equipment should be the dial-in number that you wish that piece of equipment to answer.If you set an MSN number to anything other than <None>, connected devices must be programmed with these MSN numbers.Note that this setting only applies to the call type selected above the MSN number, and only if the connected device supports the call type used.You have the following options with the MSN numbers:•<None>. No MSN numbers are used. An incoming call is accepted in all devices connected to this port.•1*, 2*, 3* or 4*: If, for example, you select 1* at Standard call type, an incoming Standard call is accepted by all devices that are programmed with the number 1* and connected to the ISDN interface.•0401, 0402: These are local numbers for separate devices connected to the ISDN interface. An incoming call is accepted by devices that are programmed with the selected number and connected to the ISDN interface. You can combine the MSN settings.Example: You have two devices connected to the ISDN interface. One is programmed with the numbers 1* and 0401, the other is programmed with 1* and 0402. In the web interface, you select the MSN number 1* under Standard. If an incoming Standard call arrives, both devices will accept the call. If you make a local call to one of the local numbers 0401 or 0402, only the called device will accept the call.4. Set the call type for outgoing calls.• If you select Automatic, the call type will be determined by the calling device.• If you select Standard, all outgoing calls, except UDI/RDI, will use the call type Standard. If you make a 3.1 kHz Audio call it will be converted to a Standard call. Outgoing UDI or RDI sessions will be not be influenced by this setting.• If you select 3.1 kHz Audio, all outgoing calls, except UDI/RDI, will use the call type 3.1 kHz Audio. If you make a Standard call it will be converted to a 3.1 kHz Audio call. Outgoing UDI or RDI sessions will be not be influenced by this setting.1.If Multi-voice is enabled and you have entered additional numbers in the phone book, you can assign an additional number to this interface. For more information see Multi-voice (option) on page 6-91.Note Connected devices will only receive incoming calls with the call types that are selected here. For example, if only Standard is selected, and a G4 fax call (using call type UDI) arrives, a fax connected to the ISDN port will not receive the incoming call. ImportantSB-Lite.book Page 26 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-2766665. If you hear an echo in your handset and the handset does not have its own echo canceller, enable the Audio echo canceller.6. Click Apply.6.5.7 Set the common interface settingsThe settings under COMMON are common for all interfaces. Note, however, that in order to use the common Access Point Name for an interface, you must select Common for the APN setting when setting up the network user group.Definition of Access Point Name (APN)The APN is used by the network user to establish a connection to the required external network. This means that the SBU must know the APN in order to be able to connect to the external network. APNs are provided from the Airtime Provider. They may also be defined on the SIM card.The common APNThe common APN setting is defined here and can be selected for each network user group. If you are using the same APN for many network user groups, it is easier to define it once, and then simply select it for the relevant network user groups. Also, if you change the common APN at a later stage, it is automatically updated for all network user groups where the Common setting is selected.To set up the common interface settingsTo set up the Common interface settings do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Common.Figure 6-22: Web interface: Settings, CommonNote You can override the call type setting for outgoing calls by dialing one of the following prefixes before the number:• 1* (force the call to Standard)• 2* (force the call to 3.1 kHz Audio)SB-Lite.book Page 27 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-28 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H2. Select the APN. You have the following options:•SIM default. The APN is taken from the SIM card. This is the recommended option, unless you have special requirements, i.e. your service provider does not automatically provision for PS services.•Network assigned. The APN is assigned from the network.•User defined. Type in the APN. APNs are provided from the service provider.3. At Buffering on Streaming profiles, select Enabled or Disabled.• If you select Enabled, your Streaming connection will be buffered. This means that the transmission is slightly delayed in order to ensure a precise and continuous data stream.• If you select Disabled, the Streaming connection will not be buffered. This means the data is delivered immediately, but may vary slightly in transmission speed.4. Click Apply.How to use the common APNWhen you configure the APN for your individual network user group, select Common to use the setting from this page. Where Common is selected in the individual network user groups, the setting will automatically be updated when the Common APN is changed.6.5.8 Set up call servicesThe setup of call services is also common for all interfaces.The SBU must be registered on the BGAN network before you can set up the call services in the web interface.In the web interface you can set up the following supplementary services:•Call forwarding•Call barring•Call waiting•Line identification•Closed user group•Local exchangeNote that, depending on the network, some of these call service settings may prevent others from being activated.The settings apply for all connected devices using a circuit-switched service.Note Use User defined if your service provider does not automatically provision your SIM card. Contact your service provider for an APN or check the documentation received from the service provider for an APN.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 28 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-296666Call forwardingYou can set up the SBU to automatically forward incoming calls to another phone number. To forward incoming calls do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Common > Call forward from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-23: Web interface: Settings, Common, Call forward2. Click OK next to Read current settings to display the phone numbers for call forwarding for the subscription. These numbers are operator controlled and come with your airtime subscription (default). A message saying Operation in progress, please wait. is displayed.Allow sufficient time for the system to read the current settings over the satellite connection.3. For each call type, select Enabled next to the situation(s) in which you want to forward incoming calls.14. Next to the enabled items, you can type in a phone number to forward the call to.5. If you have selected Forward if no reply, select from the drop-down list the period of time the system should wait before forwarding the call.6. Click Apply.Note1. When Multi-voice is enabled, the “Forward when busy” setting is not available for Standard voice.SB-Lite.book Page 29 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-30 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HCall barringDo as follows to bar incoming and/or outgoing calls to and from the SBU:1. Select SETTINGS > Common > Call barring from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-24: Web interface: Settings, Common, Call barring2. Click OK next to Read current settings. A message saying Operation in progress, please wait. is displayed.Allow sufficient time for the system to read the current settings over the satellite connection.3. For each call type, select which calls should be barred.4. In the Barring PIN field, type in a PIN for your call barring setup.5. Click Apply.NoteNote This is not the SIM PIN entered at startup, but a network PIN. Contact your airtime provider for a Barring PIN.SB-Lite.book Page 30 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-316666Call waitingYou can set up whether or not you want to receive notification of waiting calls while you are making a call or transmitting data.To receive a notification of waiting calls do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Common > Call waiting from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-25: Web interface: Settings, Common, Call waiting2. Click OK next to Read current settings. A message saying Operation in progress, please wait. is displayed.Allow sufficient time for the system to read the current settings over the satellite connection.3. For each call type, select Call waiting enabled if you want to get notification of waiting calls while you are making a call or transmitting data.4. Click Apply.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 31 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-32 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HLine identificationYou can set up the terminal to show your number when you are making a call or transmitting data. The number shown is the standard voice number of the airtime subscription.To show the number when making a call or transmitting data do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Common > Line identification from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-26: Web interface: Settings, Common, Line identification2. Select Show my number and click Apply.SB-Lite.book Page 32 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-336666Closed user groupYour subscription may include one or more closed user groups. A closed user group is a group of users permitted to make calls to each other but not to users outside the group. To define the settings for these user groups, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Common > Closed user group from the left navigation pane.Figure 6-27: Web interface: Settings, Common, Closed user group2. Type in your user group number(s) under Group no.Your airtime subscription lists your user group number(s).3. Select which group(s) should be active.If you select Active for Subscribed, the group(s) included in your subscription will be active.4. To allow outgoing access for the activated user group(s), select Outgoing Access under SETTINGS FOR ACTIVE CLOSED USER GROUP. Note that if you selected Subscribed above, this setting will not be used.5. Select Preferential if you want the activated user group to be selected when a member of a user group does not specify the group number during call set up. Note that if you selected Subscribed above, this setting will not be used.6. Click Apply.SB-Lite.book Page 33 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-34 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HLocal exchangeIf you want to call a specific phone connected to the terminal, use the local exchange function. With this function enabled, when you dial the mobile number of the terminal, a recorded message instructs you to dial the number for the local phone you want to call. Your call is then transferred to the requested phone and only the requested phone rings. If the local exchange is not used, incoming calls will per default cause all connected phones to ring.The Local exchange function is not available if you have enabled the Multi-voice option.For a detailed description how to set up the local exchange function of the SBU from a remote location see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.6.5.9 Manage AVIATOR Wireless HandsetsOverviewThe SBU uses WLAN to connect AVIATOR Wireless Handsets or other IP equipment. The AVIATOR 200/300/350 supports connection of up to 16 AVIATOR Wireless Handsets.Each handset must have a local number in the range 0501 to 0516 as well as a unique password.The handset with the local number 0501 is the master handset. This means you can start/stop data sessions from the SBU with this handset, if the function is allowed in the User permissions page. See Set up user permissions on page 6-87 for further information on user permissions.Connect a new AVIATOR Wireless HandsetDo as follows:1. Connect the handset to the WLAN interface of the SBU. For a step-by-step procedure see the AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle User Manual, section Connecting the AVIATOR Wireless Handset to a wireless access point.2. When the handset display shows in the upper right corner, the handset is ready to make a call. If you want to configure the handset or change the password, see the next section.When the SBU and the AVIATOR Wireless Handset have recognized each other, a Configure link appears next to the handset in the IP handsets page of the web interface. This link provides direct access to the built-in web interface of the AVIATOR Wireless Handset. For further information, refer to the AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle User Manual.NoteNoteNote By default, a handset connected to the WLAN interface on the terminal is automatically registered in the terminal and assigned the first available local number. SB-Lite.book Page 34 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-356666Set up the AVIATOR Wireless HandsetTo set up an AVIATOR Wireless Handset, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > IP handset.Figure 6-28: Web interface: Settings, IP handsets2. Select Edit next to a handset to change the password of the handset.Remember that you must enter the same password and local number (user name) in the handset. Use the display menu system to enter the local number and the password you just entered in the web interface. Do as follows:1. Enter the menu system and select SIP to get the list of profiles.2. Select the BGAN profile and select Options.3. Select Edit/View and change the user name and password. Note that the user name is also the local number for the handset.3. If you want to remove a handset from the list, click Release under Actions (the Release link only appears when the handset is disconnected).When a handset is removed from the list, you can no longer access the SBU with this handset.4. Select Configure next to a handset to access the built-in web interface of the AVIATOR Wireless Handset. The web interface of the handset opens. It is very similar to the web interface of the SBU, but has a handset icon in the top left corner.With the web interface of the IP handset you can access the internal settings of the handset. For further information, refer to the AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle User Manual.Note You can only access the web interface of the handset if Web server is enabled under Settings > Web server in the handset menu (default enabled).SB-Lite.book Page 35 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-36 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HSet the call types for AVIATOR Wireless HandsetsOn this page you set the call type and you can see whether Restricted dialing is enabled for each handset. For information how to set up restricted dialing see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.To set the call types for AVIATOR Wireless Handsets, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > IP handsets > Call settings.Figure 6-29: Web interface: Settings, IP handsets, Call settings2. For each handset, select the call types you want to enable for incoming and outgoing calls.The call types are described in more detail in the User Manual.•For Incoming calls, you can check Standard or 3.1 kHz Audio or both. If you check both, the handset will react (ring) on any incoming call. Example: If you select Standard, the handset will only react on calls made to the Standard phone number.1• For Outgoing calls, you can select either Standard or 3.1 kHz Audio. The selected type will be used by default, if possible, for any outgoing call.3. Click Apply.1.If Multi-voice is enabled and you have entered additional numbers in the phone book, you can assign an additional number to each IP handset. For more information see Multi-voice (option) on page 6-91.SB-Lite.book Page 36 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-3766666.5.10 Configure the discrete I/O interfacesOverviewThe SBU has 4 annunciators, 1 chime/lamp inhibit and 5 non-configurable discrete inputs. The non-configurable discrete inputs are SBU nOn (remote on/off), SBU Enable, WLAN Enable and two for Automatic Test Equipment (ATE). The ATE inputs are only for factory use, do not connect them.Each I/O pin that can be configured is displayed in the web interface. For more information on the pins TP (Top Plug) and BP (Bottom Plug) see Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle (top plug) on page 4-7 and Pin-out for SBU rear receptacle (bottom plug) on page 4-8. The functions of the I/O pins are as follows:• Pin TP13: Input. Chime/Lamps Inhibit Input.This discrete input is used to inhibit Satcom activation of the chime and call lights during take-off and landing.• Pin TP27: Output. Annunciator #3 “Service Available”.Default behavior: Active low when the SwiftBroadband Service is logged on• Pin TP28: Output. Annunciator #1 “Incoming call”.Default behavior: Active low when a handset is ringing.• Pin TP29: Output. Annunciator #2 “SBU Failed”.Default behavior: Active low whenever a BITE with severity essential or fatal is active on the SBU.• Pin BP1: Output. Annunciator #4 “Message received”This discrete output can be used to indicate that there is an unread message in the SBU. Default behavior: Active low.SB-Lite.book Page 37 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-38 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HSet the discrete I/O interfacesYou can enable and set some of the discrete I/Os in the web interface. To set these, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Discrete I/O.Figure 6-30: Web interface: Settings, Discrete I/O (without SB-Safety Voice)2. For each pin you want to use, select Enabled.3. For each pin, select if the pin should be Active high or Active low.4. For Call output you can select which incoming calls will activate the external ringer (Discrete I/O TP28: Incoming call).5. Click Apply to save the new settings.Set the discrete I/O interfaces for SB-Safety VoiceWhen SB-Safety Voice is enabled, the following changes apply:• Pin TP13 Chime/Lamps Inhibit also disables ringing on the 2-wire handset.• Pin TP27 Service Available must be inverted to indicate failure of Voice service (connect to SBB FAIL light)• Pin TP14 is Call Priority 1 annunciator.• Pin BP4 is Call Priority 2 annunciator.• Pin BP2 is Call Priority 3 annunciator.SB-Lite.book Page 38 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-396666To set the discrete I/Os in the web interface, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > Discrete I/O.Figure 6-31: Web interface: Settings, Discrete I/O (with SB-Safety Voice)Pin TP27 Service Available must be inverted to indicate failure of Voice service (connect to SBB FAIL light).6.5.11 Set the system typeDuring the initial configuration of the system you must assign the system type, that is the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system that you have bought. You can typically only select the system type purchased. The Reset functionality is mainly used for support purposes or when the system type is changed. For systems with SB-Safety Voice (software 4.00 or higher) see the separate section SB-Safety Voice (option) on page 6-55.SB-Lite.book Page 39 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-40 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HTo select the system type, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > System Type. Figure 6-32: Web interface: Settings, System type 2. Select the system type for the installation.Do not try to use a different system type!3. Click Apply to save the new setting.Changing the system typeYou can change the system type if there are major changes to the installation (like upgrading from an IGA antenna to an HGA antenna) or the satcom system is moved from one plane to another.You can replace the SBU, HLD or the satcom antenna (same type) without the need to reconfigure the system. This is possible because all system settings are stored in the Configuration Module. Therefore there is no need to select a new system type when replacing the SBU, HLD or the satcom antenna (same type). For instructions how to remove the SBU alone see Inoperative units on page 7-1. CAUTION! Selecting a wrong system type may cause damage to the satcom antenna or GPS antenna. If the system type purchased can not be selected, please contact the supplier of your AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. NoteSB-Lite.book Page 40 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-416666Before upgrading with a new antenna type or removing the satcom system do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > System Type.2. Click Reset to erase the system type and all settings from the pages RF Settings and External systems.3. Power off the system and make the necessary changes (install new antenna or move the entire satcom system).If changing the system type directly without clicking the Reset button, the contents of the pages RF Settings and External systems are erased and must be entered again. This does not apply when changing between AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350, in which case only the antenna type is erased.Table 6-2: Changing the System type, use of Reset buttonChanging the system type Click theReset buttonValues inRF SettingsValues in External systemsAVIATOR 300 to AVIATOR 350 No Not cleared Not clearedaa. Note that the field ANTENNA Type on the page SETTINGS > External systems is cleared.Yes Cleared ClearedAVIATOR 200 to AVIATOR 350 No Cleared ClearedYes Cleared ClearedImportant To avoid potential damage to the satcom or GPS antenna, it is strongly recommended to follow this procedure before you remove the satcom system from one plane for installation in anotherSB-Lite.book Page 41 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-42 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HUpgrading AVIATOR 300 to AVIATOR 350To upgrade an AVIATOR 300 system with IGA antenna to an AVIATOR 350 system with HGA antenna, use the following procedure to change the system type:1. Select SETTINGS > System Type.2. Select AVIATOR 350.3. Click Apply.4. Continue with the setup of the navigational input, for information on how to configure the antenna see Set up the navigational input on page 6-44.When upgrading the antenna, it is often necessary to reconfigure the cable loss (see Configure RF settings on page 6-43) and the navigational input (see Set up the navigational input on page 6-44).ImportantSB-Lite.book Page 42 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-4366666.5.12 Configure RF settingsBefore you can configure the RF settings you must select the system type.You must configure the AVIATOR 200/300/350 installation with the specific cable losses of the installation. For AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350 you can also enter heading, roll and pitch offset of the satcom antenna of the installation, if the antenna for any reason is installed in a position that deviates from the position recommended in the installation instructions, i.e. the position is not aligned with the aircraft.To configure the RF settings, do as follows:1. Connect to the Maintenance connector on the front panel of the SBU and enter the web interface (default: http://192.168.0.1)2. From the left navigation pane select SETTINGS > RF settings.Figure 6-33: Web interface: Settings, RF settings3. Below Antenna insert in Heading Offset: Deg. (Clockwise), Roll Offset: Deg. (Right Wing Down) and Pitch Offset: Deg. (Nose up) the degrees by which the current installation deviates from the antenna position recommended in the antenna installation instructions. These settings are greyed out for the AVIATOR 200.4. Below CABLE LOSS enter the cable loss for the cables between the• Antenna and the HLD, allowed range for AVIATOR 200: 0 to 0.3 dB, for AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350: 0 to 0.7 dB• HLD and the SBU, allowed range for AVIATOR 200: 0 to 17 dB, for AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350: 0 to 20 dB5. Click Apply to save the new settings.SB-Lite.book Page 43 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-44 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.5.13 Set up the navigational inputBefore you can configure the navigational input you must select the system type.The AVIATOR 200/300/350 supports input from several sources to retrieve navigational information, depending on the installed satcom antenna type. The following table gives an overview of the supported navigational input sources for the different satcom antenna types.Table 6-3: Navigational input for system types and satcom antennasSystem type Satcom antenna typeNavigational inputIRSAHRS+GPSNRSNPIGNSSGPS onlyAVIATOR 200 TT-3002A LGA/LGA-3000 X X X XAVIATOR 300 TT-5006A IGA X X XIGA-5001 X XAMT-3800 X XAVIATOR 350aa. AVIATOR 350 can also be used with TT-5006 IGA or IGA 5001, then the system is an AVIATOR 300. HGA-6000/HGA-6500 X XHGA-7000/HGA-7001 X XAMT-50/700/3800 X XCMA-2102/CMA-2102SB X XFor further information on supported navigational systems see About satcom antenna steering for IGA and HGA (AVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350) on page 5-4.When using IRS, AHRS, NPI or GNSS, ARINC 429 Speed can individually be set to high or low speed on the primary and secondary input, depending on your configuration. For redundancy reasons the system supports a secondary source, in case the primary source fails.To set up the navigational input, do as follows:1. Connect to the Maintenance connector on the front panel of the SBU and enter the web interface (default address: http://192.168.0.1)Note If you use IRS, AHRS, NPI or GNSS, make sure that you configure the primary and secondary IRS or AHRS to the correct speed in your configuration. This is essential to provide the necessary navigation data needed for the correct positioning of the antenna.SB-Lite.book Page 44 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-4566662. From the left navigation pane select SETTINGS > External systems.Figure 6-34: Web interface: Settings, External systems (AVIATOR 350 with TT-5006 antenna)3. Below Antenna select in the drop down list the connected antenna. See Table 6-3 on page 6-44 for available selections. Check in Table 6-7 on page 6-51 that CMU/ACARS is disabled for antennas supporting BSU. 4. For NAVIGATIONAL INPUT select one option. Which options are available depends on the installed antenna, see Table 6-3 on page 6-44. 5. Only for ARINC sources1: For Primary and Secondary select Connected and Speed.6. Only for ARINC sources: If you do not have second navigational input source available you must set Connected of SECONDARY input to No.7. Only AHRS+GPS and GPS only: GPS VOLTAGE is needed if you have selected AHRS+GPS as a navigation source and HGA-6000 or AMT-50 as an antenna. In this case you have a separate GPS antenna that needs to be powered by the SBU. Use GPS VOLTAGE to set the voltage to the correct value for the GPS antenna. It is not used for the TT-5006A antenna. The TT-5006A antenna has an integrated GPS antenna, then you do not need to set the GPS voltage.8. Click Apply to apply the new settings.Note1. ARINC sources are IRS, AHRS + GPS, GNSS and NPI.SB-Lite.book Page 45 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-46 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H9. MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATIONThis is only necessary for TT-5006A IGA and NRS selected. If you use the satcom antenna TT-5006A with NRS you must do a MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION to compensate for potential magnetic interference on the navigational input signal. This procedure is described in the following section Calibrate the NRS magnetometer in the TT-5006A IGA.For an overview of the supported navigational input sources for the different satcom antennas see Table 5-2 on page 5-4.6.5.14 Calibrate the NRS magnetometer in the TT-5006A IGAFor a system with a TT-5006A IGA you can use the built-in NRS if no IRS/AHRS are available. The NRS system consists of a 3D magnetometer, a pitch sensor and a GPS receiver. The magnetometer measures the strength and direction of the magnetic field (the magnetic vector), and compares is to what is expected at the current GPS position (values from a database). Based on these values, the orientation of the aircraft can be calculated.For the NRS system to work properly, it is essential that the magnetic environment around the TT-5006A antenna is without too much magnetic influence from the aircraft. If magnetic sources are present (e.g. loudspeakers, iron screws, nuts etc.), remove these or encapsulate them as much as possible.Remaining magnetic influence can be compensated for by means of the calibration procedure. Note that the calibration can only be used to compensate for influence from STATIC magnetic components. If the magnetic influence is from a source which may vary, e.g. a DC-current in a cable running near the antenna, then a change in the current will make the calibration inaccurate.When using NRS, you must calibrate the integrated magnetometer to compensate for potential magnetic interference. During the calibration, data is collected about the orientation of the antenna installation on the aircraft (pitch, roll and heading offset) and about local magnetic fields. A proper calibration is essential to track the satellites correctly. Failure to calibrate the system may cause the system not to work properly.Note that you must repeat the calibration procedure if you exchange the antenna or if the magnetic environment inside the aircraft changes (mounting of loudspeakers close to the satcom antenna etc.). The calibration data is stored in the CM.You start and stop the magnetometer calibration procedure using a PC connected to the maintenance connector of the SBU and the web interface.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 46 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-476666Magnetometer calibration procedureTo calibrate the magnetometer do as follows:1. Connect a PC to the Maintenance connector of the SBU and enter the web interface.2. Find a suitable location where the AVIATOR system can obtain GPS synchronization and where there is sufficient space for the aircraft to complete a turn of at least 360°. Make sure that a full circle of 360° is covered, 370° is fine too. 350° is not sufficient to produce a valid calibration result. Make sure that the aircraft is away from large buildings or vehicles which could disturb the terrestrial magnetic field. Preferably use the compass calibration field in the airport area.3. Power up all aircraft systems, including the engines. This is to create the aircraft magnetic environment as it is in in-flight condition.4. Wait until the GPS of the aircraft is operational. Check on the page DASHBOARD whether the field GPS position shows a valid value. 5. From the left navigation pane select SETTINGS > External systems.Figure 6-35: Web interface: Settings, External systems, Magnetometer Calibration6. Advise the pilot to make a slow 360° circle on a smooth, flat, and level surface. Make sure that the turn rate is between 1 and 2° per second, i.e. one circle should take minimum 3 minutes, maximum 10 minutes, to produce valid calibration results. Keep NoteSB-Lite.book Page 47 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-48 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-Hthe movement as even as possible, avoid sudden movements or changes in speed. The start direction of the turn is not relevant.It is recommended for the calibration to succeed, that the turn is performed in a constant direction. If the aircraft e.g. turns a bit counterclockwise before completing a full turn clockwise, this might bring the calculations of calibration parameters to fail. Make the turn radius as small as possible.7. In the section for magnetometer calibration click the button Start to start the calibration procedure.When a calibration is completed successfully, any previously stored calibration data is overwritten without further notice.8. When a turn is complete, click Stop. The system initiates a calculation in the background that may take between 10 seconds and a few minutes. Click optionally the button Refresh until the result is shown. The resulting calibration score is shown as two digits. 9. See the following table for guidelines how to evaluate the calibration score.NoteImportantCalibration quality score Hard iron interference calibration score9: Good8: Good7: Good6: Acceptable5: Acceptable4: Marginal3: Marginal2: Unacceptable1: Unacceptable0: Unacceptable9: <10% Good8: <20% Good7: <30% Good6: <40% Acceptable5: <50% Acceptable4: <60% Acceptable3: <70% Investigate2: <80% Investigate1: <90% Investigate0: >90% InvestigateTable 6-4: Evaluation of the magnetometer calibration scoreSB-Lite.book Page 48 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-496666Investigate a low Hard Iron scoreThe hard iron score is an indication of how much magnetic flux (Tesla) the magnetometer inside the antenna has measured, compared to what was expected at the current latitude and longitude based on the Earth's magnetic model stored inside the SBU. In other words, it is an indication of how big a static magnetic disturbance is present from the aircraft structure itself (magnetic screws etc.).The lower the number, the more unwanted flux and the more difficult it will be for the system to correctly calculate heading, pitch and roll. While a high hard iron score is not a strict requirement, since the purpose of the calibration is to map this disturbance so it can be compensated for later, a low score should always be investigated and fixed if possible:1. Confirm that non-magnetic screwdrivers and non-magnetic screws were used for the antenna installation. 2. Ensure that any nearby speakers in the cabin have been properly shielded.3. Ensure that nearby metallic objects do not interrupt the calibration. DC cables with high current will also generate flux and can cause low hard iron score. All though the calibration procedure is done to counter this unwanted magnetic flux, you must determine if the disturbance comes from a wire where the current may change during flight. If this DC current changes, the disturbance will also change, and hence the calibration will no longer be accurate.There are a couple of different ways to investigate hard iron disturbance. The area around the antenna can be surveyed with a simple Boy Scout compass, making sure there is only a slight deflection of the needle, when the compass is moved to and from and around the antenna. If there are more than 10-15 degrees, investigate what the cause is.Another way is to use the values from the magnetometer inside the antenna itself. This is especially useful if you suspect disturbance from DC cables, e.g. from generators, which can be impractical to measure outside the aircraft, with engines running. These values can be read out once at a time via the command line with the stat -m tt5006a command or printed every second with the following two commands: • trace -m tt5006A:cno -c 1 set <enter>• console_set <enter> See Appendix G, Terminal commands, for information on how to use terminal commands.The magnetometer gives 3 values named Bx, By and Bz, shown in nT (nano Tesla).Monitor these values, while high current systems with cables near the antenna are turned on and off, and make sure the values don't vary significantly. If they do, reroute the cables to make the NRS work reliable. SB-Lite.book Page 49 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-50 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HError messages during magnetometer calibrationError messages at failing START procedure How to proceedFailure due to missing GPS satellite fix.Wait some time to get a GPS fix, check that there is free line of sight to GPS satellites, i.e. the plane must be outside the hangar.Check on the page DASHBOARD whether the field GPS position shows a valid value.Could not obtain the matrix of Earth’s magnetic field.Restart the system. If the error persists, contact your Cobham SATCOM partner’s support hotline or Cobham SATCOM e-support.Failure due to memory exhaustion.Restart the system. If the error persists, contact your Cobham SATCOM partner’s support hotline or Cobham SATCOM e-support.Could not communicate with antenna.Check the satcom antenna and cables to the satcom antenna.Unknown start error. Restart the system. If the error persists, contact your Thrane & Thrane partner’s support hotline or Thrane & Thrane e-support.Table 6-5: Magnetometer calibration: Error messages at failing Start procedure Error messages at failing STOP procedure How to proceedCalibration stopped outside allowed time interval (min. 3 minutes, max. 10 minutes).Rerun the calibration within the allowed time interval.Calibration convergence error, possibly due to the aircraft being rotated less than 360 degrees.Rerun the calibration within the allowed time interval.Unknown calibration error.Rerun the calibration. Try to follow the instructions how to perform the 360° turn more carefully. If this does not help, restart the system. If the error persists, contact your Cobham SATCOM partner’s support hotline or Cobham SATCOM e-support.Table 6-6: Magnetometer calibration: Error messages at failing Stop procedure SB-Lite.book Page 50 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-5166666.5.15 Set up CMU/ACARS (option)The AVIATOR 200/300/350 supports ACARS communication over Swift Broadband. The connection to the CMU uses the same A429 lines as the ACU/BSU of the antenna system or an AIS 380 Aircraft Interface Module1, This option is only available with certain types of antennas, i.e. antennas controlled via modem on the coax cable or LGAs without control. For a list of antenna that support the CMU/ACARS option see the table below.You must have SBU software version minimum AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E): 1.07, AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D (Level D): 2.01, in order to support the CMU/ACARS option.Table 6-7: Satcom antennas in AVIATOR systems supporting CMUSatcom antenna system CMU supportTT-3002A/LGA-3000TT-5006AIGA-5001AMT-50/700AMT-3500AMT-3800HGA-6000/6500/7000HGA-7001HGA-8000CMA-2102SB/2200SBWhen using the SBU/ACARS interface for SBB Safety Services (e.g. CPDLC traffic) note that additional user traffic and interface connections to the SBU shall be addressed in the Security Safety Assessment (SSA) of the particular aircraft. The SBU does not comply to the ARINC-781 attachment 8, Security Considerations. There is no segregation between the user interfaces. All interfaces of the SBU shall be considered as 'Aircraft Control Domain'.The setup of CMU/ACARS is divided into 3 areas:• ACARS Aircraft Gateway (AAGW)• Aircraft• ACARS Ground Gateway (AGGW)1. For software version 2.03.NoteYesYesYesNoaa. CMU support possible with the converter RS-422 to A429 (AIS 380 Aircraft Interface Module)NoaNoaYes, if coax modem is usedNoaYesNoaImportantSB-Lite.book Page 51 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-52 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HTo set up CMU/ACARS, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > External systems > CMU/ACARS.Figure 6-36: Web interface: CMU/ACARS2. At ACARS Select Enabled. Check in the table above that your system supports CMU.3. At CMU Speed select High or Low, depending on the CMU.4. At CMU SAL select Automatic (default) or User. Allowed octal range: 0-377. This number is used for identification of the CMU in the installation.5. At SBU SAL select Default or type in the number. Allowed octal range: 0-377. This number is used for identification of the SBU in the installation.6. At Position report you can select whether to include the aircraft’s GPS position to the AGGW (Enabled) or not (Disabled).7. At Satellite Switch you can select whether the hand over to the new satellite is done after a logoff to the ACARS Ground Gateway (Yes) or the switch happens instantaneously (No).8. At ICAO Address you can select to send the aircraft’s address automatically or you can enter it manually. Allowed octal range: 0-777777779. At Tail No and Type you can enter the aircraft’s tail number and type. You must at least enter multiple blank spaces. These 2 fields cannot stay empty.10. At APN Name and AGGW Name keep the default values or enter new data received from your service provider.11. Click Apply to save the settings.SB-Lite.book Page 52 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-5366666.5.16 Enable system options with FLEX keysOn the FLEX page you can view the options for your system that are currently enabled or disabled. Enabling the purchased options is typically done at the factory. You can buy options at a later stage and open up for them by entering a FLEX key sequence for the specific built-in option. The available options are listed in Table 2-6 on page 2-10.To enable a built-in option, do as follows:1. Connect to the Maintenance connector on the front panel of the SBU and enter the web interface (default: http://192.168.0.1).2. From the left navigation pane select SETTINGS > FLEX. Figure 6-37: Web interface: Settings, FLEX (example) 3. Have the FLEX key ready and enter it into the insert fields.4. Click Apply to enable the new option.5. Click Show System Types to display the system types and their status (enabled or disabled).SB-Lite.book Page 53 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-54 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.5.17 TrackingWith tracking you can set the SBU to send reports with current position information at specified time intervals or distances to a server address. To set up tracking, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS, Tracking.2. The information in the sections SERVER CONNECTION and APN must be provided by your airtime provider.3. In POSITION REPORTS you can select among the following:•Compressed: Aircraft’s position with latitude and longitude.•Extended: Aircraft’s position latitude, longitude, heading, speed and UTC time.•ECEF: Aircraft’s position in x,y,z coordinates and a velocity vector.4. In INTERVAL REPORT and DISTANCE REPORT you can enable the respective report and set a report interval or distance.5. Click Apply to save the settings. Figure 6-38: Web interface, Settings, TrackingSB-Lite.book Page 54 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-5566666.5.18 SB-Safety Voice (option)To use the SB-Safety Voice service, the SBU must have software version 4.00 or higher. Note that the POTS#1 configuration cannot be changed and the POTS#2 and ISDN are forcibly disabled.When using the SBU/ACARS interface for SBB Safety Services (e.g. CPDLC traffic) and/or SB-Safety Voice is enabled, note that additional user traffic and interface connections to the SBU shall be addressed in the Security Safety Assessment (SSA) of the particular aircraft. The SBU does not comply to the ARINC-781 attachment 8, Security Considerations. There is no segregation between the user interfaces. All interfaces of the SBU shall be considered as 'Aircraft Control Domain'. The software version is shown on the DASHBOARD.Figure 6-39: Web interface, DASHBOARD software version 4.00To set-up SB-Safety Voice, do as follows:1. Check that the SBUhas software version 4.00.2. Check that the option for Built-in ACARS/SB-Safety Voice is enabled.Figure 6-40: Web interface, SETTINGS, Flex key, software version 4.003. If it is not in the list and enabled, request the flex key and see Enable system options with FLEX keys on page 6-53.ImportantSB-Lite.book Page 55 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To set up the interfaces6-56 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H4. Click the menu SETTINGS, System Type.Figure 6-41: Web interface, SETTINGS, System Type, software version 4.005. At SB-SAFETY VOICE, select Enabled.6. Click Apply.When SB-Safety Voice is enabled, make sure that the following settings are as follows: • Multi-Voice is disabled• WLAN is disabled• Discrete output TP27 set to Active high7. Restart the SBU.Important Do not enable Multi-Voice and WLAN in the web interface. Multi-Voice and WLAN are not allowed together with SB-Safety Voice.SB-Lite.book Page 56 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-5766666.6 LAN/WLAN network users6.6.1 IntroductionWith the built-in router functionality the system offers a flexible use of the data channel of the BGAN service. You can configure the use of the data channel by defining network user groups and profiles. The following picture gives an overview of the parameters involved.Figure 6-42: Overview over network user groups and traffic flow filtersThe network user group you belong to is determined by one or more of the following:• the IP address of the device you are using• the MAC address of the device you are using• the LAN port you connect toA connected IP device will automatically be assigned to the default network user group, if it is not specified otherwise.For specific purposes like video streaming, a server on the network, a fixed IP address on the connected device or changing the startup mode of a connection, you must set up network groups with specific primary and/or secondary profiles. How to do this is described in the following sections.Network user groupsThe network management system divides the users of the SBU into network user groups. Each network user group has a profile which determines how the users connect to the Inmarsat BGAN network. The network user groups can allow or restrict certain services for different users.For example, you may want to define:• one network user group allowing both Standard and Streaming connections,• one network user group for Internet, e-mail and VPN, allowing Standard connections,• one network user group for Remote management of systems. This would be a direct Standard connection (Bridge mode).You can have up to 11 network user groups and global IP addresses.Necessary steps when managing network usersThe steps necessary for managing network users include:1. Defining a network user group. See Set up the network user groups on page 6-59.The network user groups determine settings such as:•QoS (Standard/Streaming),SB-Lite.book Page 57 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-58 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H• IP addressing (Static or Dynamic, this is decided by the SIM card setup and the service provider)• Internet access mode (Router Mode, Bridge Mode or No Internet Access)2. Identifying a network device. See Manage network devices on page 6-62. The network devices are identified by their IP address, MAC address and (optionally) device name.3. Associating the network user group and the network device. See The network classification table on page 6-63. The network classification table determines which devices should belong to which network user group. When a network device is connected, the SBU runs through the network classification table to check if the new connection matches any of the entries in the table. When a match is found, the SBU establishes a packet data connection (PDP context) with the settings determined for the belonging network user group, and the device is ready for use with the SBU.Access to the network management settingsAccess to the network management settings requires an administrator password. The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234.The administrator can create and manage network user groups and set up a network classification table defining priorities for devices, network user groups and LAN ports.Important All user connections to the LAN interface may be affected when you change the settings below, including your own current connection.SB-Lite.book Page 58 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-5966666.6.2 Set up the network user groupsOverviewA network user group, in this context, is a group of network users sharing the same Quality of Service profile and network parameters.There are 11 configurable network user groups. For the Default network user group, certain settings are locked, to make sure there is always one functional network user group available. For example, the Default network user group does not allow you to select a Bridge mode connection.You cannot delete network user groups. If you do not want to use them, click Edit and select Disabled at Status in the NETWORK USER GROUP field.Edit a network user groupThe default setting of this network user group is a standard IP data connection with automatic IP address allocation and automatic activation of the connection.For further explanation of the terms used below, see Definitions for network terms on page 6-65.To edit a network user group, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > LAN > Network user groups.If prompted, enter the administrator user name and password. The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234.The following screen shows the 11 user groups available and their current status, Internet connection type, and whether automatic activation is enabled or disabled.2. Click Edit next to the network user group you want to set up.NoteNoteFigure 6-43: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network user groupsSB-Lite.book Page 59 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-60 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H3. Type in a name for the group.4. Select Enabled or Disabled.5. Select the type of Internet connection.•Router mode means the connection will be shared with other users, and the NAT module of the SBU will make the necessary address translations. Read more about NAT in NAT (Network Address Translation) on page 6-66. Use this mode if one or more computers are connected using the LAN interface, and the SBU should acts a router. •Bridge mode is an exclusive connection, it is not shared with other users and NAT is disabled. Use the Bridge mode together with a network classification entry that selects a single computer (see The network classification table on page 6-63). The SBU acts a a bridge for this network user group. This mode is not available in the Default network user group.•No internet access means no connection to the Internet is allowed. Use this setting e.g. for IP handsets, where an Internet connection is not required. The external voice connection is still available; this setting only affects communication over the Internet.Note Changes to the status and internet connection only take effect after reboot of the SBU. This is also valid if a user wants to change the network user group, then the SBU must be restarted before the user has access to the new network user group.Figure 6-44: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network user groups, EditSB-Lite.book Page 60 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-6166666. Select Dynamic IP address. This is the IP address used externally on the satellite network.If you want to use a static IP address, and your subscription allows it, you must still leave this setting at Dynamic. Then select SIM default in step 8 and type in the APN user name and password from your provider in step 9.Your SBU will then use the static IP address set up for your SIM card.7. Set IP Header compression to Enabled or Disabled. For information on IP Header compression, see Header compression on page 6-65.8. Select the source of the APN (Access Point Name).You have the following options:•Common. The APN is taken from the Common APN defined under SETTINGS > Common. Refer to Set the common interface settings on page 6-27.•SIM default. The APN is taken from the SIM card. If you want to use a static IP address on the external network, select this option either here or in the Common setting.•Network assigned. The APN is assigned from the network.•User defined. This is the preferred option. Type in the APN. APNs are provided from the Airtime Provider. Use this option if there is no automatic provisioning for a static IP address from the service provider.9. If your APN uses a password, type in the user name and password provided from the Airtime Provider.10. At Automatic activation select whether the profile selected in the next step should be activated automatically or manually.•Disabled means you can activate/deactivate the profile from the Dashboard.•Enabled means the profile is activated automatically.11. Select the Primary profile.Select a profile from the Primary scroll list. This profile is used by this network user group as a first choice, when possible.There are several predefined profiles: Standard, Streaming 8, Streaming 16, Streaming 32, Streaming 64 and Streaming 128. Additionally, you can define your own custom profiles or any newer ones, Inmarsat defines.Note Typing in a static IP address is currently not supported by the SwiftBroadband network.Note If you are going to use the static IP address from your SIM card, the user name and password are mandatory! See the documentation for the airtime subscription from the service provider. See step 6 above.Note If the selected primary profile is a Streaming profile, this setting has no effect. Streaming profiles must always be activated manually from the Dashboard.Important If you have selected and started a Streaming connection as your primary profile, the LAN interface will be running a Streaming connection until you stop it or disconnect the interface. SB-Lite.book Page 61 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-62 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HFor further information on profiles and traffic flow filters, see To use profiles on page 6-78 and To use traffic flow filters on page 6-82.12. Select the Secondary profile.To select more than one secondary profile, press and hold Ctrl or Shift while selecting.The Context Identifiers (CIDs) for the selected primary and secondary profiles are listed under Profile CIDs.13. Click Apply.Note that changes to the status and the Internet connection type of a network user group first take effect after rebooting the AVIATOR 200/300/350 SBU.6.6.3 Manage network devicesOverviewA network device, in this context, is an Ethernet hardware device, identified by its unique MAC address.When a network device with dynamic IP address is connected to the SBU, it is automatically listed in the Network devices list.View the list of network devicesTo view the list of network devices, select SETTINGS > LAN > Network devices. All network devices that have been connected to the SBU are listed here.Figure 6-45: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network devicesNote If you have selected both a primary and one or more secondary profiles you must define a traffic flow filter before you can establish a valid connection.SB-Lite.book Page 62 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-636666Lock an IP address to a MAC addressWhen the device is locked to an IP address, the SBU will always assign this IP address to the device with this MAC address (if DHCP is enabled and the Internet connection is in Router mode, and not a Bridge mode connection).To lock an IP address to a MAC address, do as follows:1. If prompted, log in as an administrator. The default user name and password are admin and 1234.2. To lock a device to its current IP address, click the link next to the device. The device is then locked to the current IP address and added to the list of locked IP addresses at the top of the page.3. To unlock a device from the IP address, click Delete next to the device in the LOCKED IP ADDRESSES list.6.6.4 The network classification tableOverviewThe network classification table is used to define which network devices, IP addresses and/or LAN ports are associated with which network user groups.Each entry in the table shows MAC address, IP address, LAN port and network user group.When a network device is connected, the SBU runs through the network classification table to check if the new connection matches MAC address, IP address and LAN port in any of the entries in the table. When a match is found, the SBU establishes a PDP context with the settings of the network user group assigned in the matching entry. The device is now ready for use with the SBU.Add or edit an entry in the network classification tableThe network classification table shows which devices are associated with which LAN ports and network user groups. An Asterisk (*) is a “wild card”, meaning that any value is accepted.You can add, edit and delete entries in the network classification table.To add a new entry to the table or to edit an existing entry, do as follows:1. If prompted, log in as an administrator. The default user name and password are admin and 1234.SB-Lite.book Page 63 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-64 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H2. Select SETTINGS > LAN > Network classification.Figure 6-46: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network classification table3. Click Edit next to the entry you want to edit, or click Add at the bottom of the list.Figure 6-47: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network classification table, Edit or Add4. Click Add next to a network device you want to use, or type in the MAC address manually at the top of the page.If you leave a field empty, it is the same as a “wild card” and it will be shown as an Asterisk in the Network classification table. Unless you are using a Static IP address, the IP address field should always be left empty.5. Select the LAN port and Network user group you want to associate with the device.Network user groups are created and defined in the Network user group page. See Set up the network user groups on page 6-59.6. Click Apply.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 64 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-656666Change the priority in the network classification tableConnections are evaluated in the order they are listed. The first entry (and only the first entry) that matches the properties of the connected device is applied, meaning that the connection will be using the settings of the network user group assigned to that entry.To change the priority of an entry, click the up or down arrow next to the entry.Figure 6-48: Web interface: Settings, LAN, Network classification table, change priorityThe Default network user group is always last, so it is only used if none of the other entries match the properties of the connected device.Remove an entry in the network classification tableIn the network classification table, click Delete next to the entry you want to delete.6.6.5 Definitions for network termsHeader compressionThe header of a data packet contains control information belonging to that specific packet. The information in the header can take up a considerable amount of bandwidth. In order to use the bandwidth more efficiently, you can enable Header Compression, meaning the header information is compressed, leaving some of the information out. With disabled header compression the full header ist transmitted with each data packet. This takes up bandwidth and means a more reliable data transmission with less data loss. You can select whether or not to use Header Compression for your data transmission.•Header Compression enabled: More efficient use of the bandwidth available, recommended typically for Internet, e-mail, ftp applications etc.•Header Compression disabled: More reliable data transmission. Recommended for time-critical applications like VoIP and streaming applications, as well as other applications where packet loss is to be minimized.If there are problems with packet loss you might want to disable header compression and see whether the header compression is the reason for the packet loss. SB-Lite.book Page 65 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-66 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.6.6 NAT (Network Address Translation)NAT enables a local-area network to use one set of private IP addresses for internal traffic and an assigned or static IP address for external traffic. The built-in NAT module in the SBU makes all necessary address translations between the local-area traffic and the external traffic.Figure 6-49: NAT (Network Address Translation) If more than one user is connected, you must select a network user group with Router mode to use the NAT functionality of the SBU. 6.6.7 Start and stop any data sessionThe administrator can start and stop data sessions for all network user groups connected to the SBU.To start or stop a data session, do as follows:1. Select CONNECT.If prompted, enter the administrator user name and password. The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234.Under ONGOING DATA SESSIONS at the top you can see which data sessions are currently active.$%&7HUPLQDOZLWK1$77UDIILF$7UDIILF&7UDIILF$%DQG&7UDIILF%3ULYDWH,3DGGUHVVHVIRU$%DQG&$VVLJQHGRUVWDWLF,3DGGUHVV,QWHUQHW/RFDODUHD ([WHUQDOFigure 6-50: Web interface: Connect, to start and stop data sessions (example)SB-Lite.book Page 66 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-676666In the example above you can manually start the Streaming 128 connection of GROUP 0 and stop the Standard connection of the DEFAULT GROUP.2. Click on the session you want to start or stop.3. Click Refresh to update the current state of the connection(s). Note that there might be some latency when updating the connection status, you might have to wait and click Refresh again to update the Dashboard to the current state.The PDP context for the data session is not activated before any unit in the LAN tries to communicate, e.g. sends a DHCP request.6.6.8 Establish a PPPoE connectionOverviewYou can establish a Point-to-Point-over-Ethernet (PPPoE) connection to the BGAN network using the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. Use this connection type if you want to control start and stop of the connection independently from the built-in web interface of the SBU.Possible applications for this type of connection are as follows:• Connecting a router• Connecting broadcast equipment, optionally through a PC• Establishing a Pico cell for the use of cell phonesWithout the built-in Router option the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is limited to one PPPoE connection.The following drawing shows how the PPPoE connection and the built-in web interface handle connections to the SwiftBroadband network.Figure 6-51: Example for PPPoE connectionsNoteNote6%83'3&RQWH[WXSWR6ZLIW%URDGEDQGQHWZRUN%XLOWLQZHELQWHUIDFH333R(FRQQHFWLRQ3&DQGRUEURDGFDVWHTXLSPHQW8VHU3&$SSOLFDWLRQVIRU333R(+DQGOLQJFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH%*$1WHUPLQDO$VVLJQLQJFRQQHFWLRQ3'3FRQWH[WWRJRRXWRQWKH6ZLIW%URDGEDQGQHWZRUN5RXWHU3LFRFHOO333R(FRQQHFWLRQ8VHU3&333R(FRQQHFWLRQ:LUH+DQGVHW,3+DQGVHWSB-Lite.book Page 67 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-68 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HEnable PPPoE network connections in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 systemDuring the configuration of the system you can configure whether the system should allow and handle PPPoE network connections.To enable or disable the system to support PPPoE network connections do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > LAN > PPPoE Figure 6-52: Web interface, Settings, LAN, PPPoE2. Select Enabled or Disabled (default).3. Check with your airtime provider what your APN is and select accordingly.4. Click Apply to send the settings to the terminal.How to configure the connected PC, router or other equipmentYou must configure the equipment correctly to establish a network connection using PPPoE. How to set up a new network connection depends on the type of equipment, refer to the user documentation of the equipment.You need the following parameters:•User name and passwordThe user name and password can be left blank. Then the registration on the APN is most commonly done in a way that the data connection will be established with a dynamic IP address from the airtime provider. To request a static IP (if subscribed to) from the APN you must type in the user name and password from your airtime subscription.Note for MAC OS: User name and password are required. Use user name void and password void. This works for some ISPs. Contact your airtime provider for further information.• For setups that have a check box for Enable LCP extensions, deselect this.SB-Lite.book Page 68 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-696666•Service name: For certain services, i.e. a streaming class, you must type in a specified text string when asked for a service name. The following table shows the service names and descriptions that are supported by the terminal.PPPoE setup with a non-default APNYou can set up a network connection using PPPoE for another APN than the default APN. Check the documentation from the Service provider for the new APN name. Enter the following commands in the field Service name when setting up the network connection:Table 6-9: PPPoE connection, service names and descriptions for custom APN Service name for custom APN DescriptionXBBaa. For SwiftBroadband the part of the service name “XBB” can be replaced by “SBB”.:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,3Standard IP data connectionXBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,1,8,8,8,8,2,0,“0E0”,”0E0”,3,0,0Streaming IP data connection 8 kbpsXBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,1,16,16,16,16,2,0,“0E0”,”0E0”,3,0,0Streaming IP data connection 16 kbpsXBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,1,32,32,32,32,2,0,“0E0”,”0E0”,3,0,0Streaming IP data connection 32 kbpsXBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,1,64,64,64,64,2,0,“0E0”,”0E0”,3,0,0Streaming IP data connection 64 kbpsXBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,1,128,128,128,128,2,0,“0E0”,”0E0”,3,0,0streaming IP data connection 128 kbpsXBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”<APN name>”; +CGEQREQ=1,1,512,512,512,512,2,0,“0E0”,”0E0”,3,0,0streaming IP data connection X-StreamService name DescriptionBlank default, primary standard IP data connectionXBBa:BACKGROUNDa. For SwiftBroadband the part of the service name “XBB” can be replaced by “SBB”.default, primary standard IP data connectionXBB:STREAM8K primary streaming IP data connection 8 kbpsXBB:STREAM16K primary streaming IP data connection 16 kbpsXBB:STREAM32K primary streaming IP data connection 32 kbpsXBB:STREAM64K primary streaming IP data connection 64 kbpsXBB:STREAM128K primary streaming IP data connection 128 kbpsXBB:X-STREAM primary streaming IP data connection up to 512 kbps.Table 6-8: PPPoE connection, service names and descriptionsSB-Lite.book Page 69 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
LAN/WLAN network users6-70 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HExample: To set up a standard background data connection using the APN “bgan.inmarsat.com” enter: XBB:AT+CGDCONT=1,ip,”bgan.inmarsat.com”;+CGEQREQ=1,3For more information about the command syntax see the standard 3GPP TS 27.007.6.6.9 To set up static routingWhen you have an external gateway connected to your SBU, the SBU is not automatically able to “see” the network on the other side of the gateway. However, you can set up your SBU to communicate with a device on the other side of a gateway, by using Static routing.To set up a new device for static routing, do as follows:1. Select SETTINGS > LAN > Static route.Figure 6-53: Web interface, Settings, LAN, Static route2. Click Add.Figure 6-54: Web interface, Settings, LAN, Static route, add3. Enter the values for your device.• Destination: The IP address you want to route to.•Netmask: The netmask you want to route to.• Gateway: The gateway, e.g. the address of a wireless access point or router to which the destination device is connected.SB-Lite.book Page 70 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-7166664. Click Apply.The values for the new entry are now in the list. This means that the SBU can communicate with the destination IP address on the other side of the gateway.6.6.10 SNMP interface You can connect equipment to perform SNMP queries on the SBU in order to retrieve configuration and present settings. Contact AVIATOR.support@cobham.com to obtain the MIB files.6.7 AdministrationIn this section of the web interface you can configure a number of administrative settings:•Access the administration settings•Save and load a configuration•Call charges•Log handling•Data limits•To use profiles•To use traffic flow filters•SIM card access protection: SIM PIN and SIM Lock•Set up user permissions•Remote management•Remote activation of a connection using SMS•Link monitoring (SwiftBroadband only)•Restricted dialing•Multi-voice (option)6.7.1 Protect the SBU against unintended configuration changesYou can protect the SBU against unintended changes of the setup:1. Change the administrator password from user name: admin and password: 1234 to a user name and password of your choice. For further details see Change the administrator password on page 6-72.2. You can deny non-administrator users access to certain functions and make the respective pages in the web interface read-only. For further details see Set up user permissions on page 6-87.SB-Lite.book Page 71 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-72 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.7.2 Access the administration settingsLog on as administratorThe Administration settings require an Administration user name and password. You must also login as an administrator in the sections for SETTINGS, LAN, Network Devices, Network classification, Network user groups and PPPoE.To log on as administrator, do as follows:1. Select ADMINISTRATION from the left navigation pane.2. Enter the Administration user name and password.The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234. If you have forgotten the administrator password, you can reset the password by clicking the link at the bottom of the page.1 For further information, see the next section Reset the administrator password.3. Click Logon.The Administration page is now updated to let you change the user name and password, Save/load a configuration or log off Administration.Change the administrator passwordIf you have a Level D system with the Built-in CMU/ACARS option and the ACARS service is enabled, the admin password must fulfill the following requirements:• have at least 8 characters• must contain letters, figures and special characters (<>,;.:-_/*-+!.#¤%&()=?@£${[]}|)The default password 1234 is allowed, but it will trigger a warning that is displayed after each reboot of the system.Figure 6-55: Web interface: Administration1. The link is only shown when the PC is connected to the Maintenance connector on the SBU front plate.SB-Lite.book Page 72 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-736666To change the administrator password, do as follows:1. After entering the administrator user name and password in the ADMINISTRATION page, locate the section Change administrator logon.Figure 6-56: Web interface: Administration, change administrator logon2. Type in the existing user name.3. Type in the new password and retype it on the next line.4. Click Change. At the next logon the new password is required.Reset the administrator passwordIf you have forgotten and need to reset the administrator password, do as follows:1. Contact your supplier for a reset code.Report the serial number and IMEI number of the terminal.You find the serial number and IMEI number in the Dashboard.Important To reset the administrator password you must connect the PC to the Maintenance connector on the SBU front plate. If not, the link Forgot administrator password? on the ADMINISTRATOR LOGON page will not be visible.SB-Lite.book Page 73 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-74 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H2. Click the link Forgot administrator password? at the bottom of the ADMINISTRATOR LOGON page (see the previous section).Figure 6-57: Web interface: Administration, Reset administrator password3. Type in the reset code obtained from your supplier and click Reset.4. Type in the user name Admin and the default password 1234.5. Click Logon.For information on how to change the password, see the next section Change the administrator password.Log off administrationIf you have not entered anything for 30 minutes under ADMINISTRATION, you are logged off automatically. To log off manually, click Logoff under administrator logoff in the ADMINISTRATION page.SB-Lite.book Page 74 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-7566666.7.3 Save and load a configurationIf you need to reuse a configuration in another SBU, you can save the current configuration to a file, which can then be loaded into the other SBU. You can also use this feature for backup purposes.Configuration files can only be exchanged between SBUs with the same software version!Save a configuration to a fileThe settings from the following pages of the web interface are saved in the configuration file:• SETTINGS• ADMINISTRATION• PHONE BOOKTo save your current configuration to a file, do as follows:1. In the ADMINISTRATION page, under Configuration, click Save.Figure 6-58: Web interface: Administration, saving a configuration file2. Accept the default destination file name or type in the destination file name and location.3. Click OK. The configuration is now saved to a file. This file is used to load the configuration into another SBU.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 75 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-76 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HLoad a configuration from a fileIn this example the PC is connected to the SBU front maintenance connector. To load a configuration from a file, do as follows:1. In the ADMINISTRATION page, under Configuration, select the upload type:•Load configuration from file (include install data), available when connected to the SBU front maintenance connector. The install data are the pages Discrete I/O, RF settings and External systems.•Load configuration from file (user data only). This upload type is available on any other LAN/WLAN interface of the SBU.2. Click Browse... to browse to the file you want to import. Then click Open.3. Click Load.The new configuration is now loaded into your SBU.4. Restart the SBU to activate the new configuration.Note This feature can only be used with systems of the same system type, for example one AVIATOR 200 SBU to another AVIATOR 200 SBU. To use this upload type the PC must be connected to the SBU front maintenance connector.Figure 6-59: Web interface: Administration, saving a configuration fileNote Configuration files can only be exchanged between SBUs with the same software version!SB-Lite.book Page 76 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-7766666.7.4 Call chargesIn this section you can enter the call charges so you at all times can see the current charges for the services used. Consult the documentation from your service provider for the subscribed services, then enter these tariffs in the web interface. The system automatically calculates the charges for your calls and data sessions. The entered tariffs are used for estimating the charges for calls and data sessions. The estimated charge is listed for each call or data session in the call log. For further information, see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.To enter the call tariffs, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINISTRATION > Call Charges.Figure 6-60: Web interface: Administration, Call Charges2. Select the currency from the Currency drop-down list.3. Enter the tariff for each of the services.4. Click Apply.Note Thrane & Thrane does not take responsibility for the correctness of the estimated charges. This calculation is only a rough estimate of the charge, based on the tariff entered by the user. Also, the Airtime Provider may have different methods of calculating the charge.SB-Lite.book Page 77 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-78 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.7.5 Log handlingTo clear the logs of the SBU and/or reset the counters for the time connected, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane in the ADMINISTRATION page, select Log Handling.Figure 6-61: Web interface: Administration, Log Handling2. To clear the Call log, click OK next to Clear call log?. 3. To clear the total counters, click OK next to Clear total counters?.This will reset the Time connected counters on the Calls page.6.7.6 Data limitsYou can set a limit for the use of data services that can be downloaded over the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. You either specify a maximum number of MB for the standard data connection, and/or a time interval from start to end for a streaming connection.For a detailed description how to access the SBU from a remote location see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.6.7.7 To use profilesThe profiles are used in the network user groups. You select one or several profiles when setting up a network user group. You need an administrator password to define profiles and traffic flow filters.Together with traffic flow filters the profiles are used as a tool to manage the traffic flow.If you have selected more than one profile (one primary and one or more secondary profiles) for an interface, you must define traffic flow filter(s) before you can establish a valid connection.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 78 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-796666What is a profile?A profile is a collection of Quality of Service (QoS) settings and other settings defining the mode in which data is transmitted on an interface. For example, a profile is used to define whether the connection is a Streaming connection or a Standard connection.You can select between a number of predefined profiles or define your own profiles for your data transmission. For further information on profiles, refer to the 3GPP standard TS 23.107 “Quality of Service (QoS) concept and architecture”.If no traffic flow filters are defined, the Primary profile for a network user group is used for all traffic from that network user group. Then the secondary profile will not become active.To learn more about traffic flow filters see What are traffic flow filters? in the next section.Select the profiles for a network user groupWhen you set up a network user group, you typically select one of the predefined profiles to use as a Primary profile for that network user group. You select optionally one or more Secondary profiles.For further information on how to select the profiles, see LAN/WLAN network users on page 6-57.You typically do not need to define new profiles, the predefined profiles cover the most common applications. You can customize a user profile and set up several user-defined profiles.NoteFigure 6-62: Web interface, Administration, Profiles, Example: StandardSB-Lite.book Page 79 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-80 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HDefine new profilesWhen you define your profiles you can select Subscribed for many of the settings. If you select Subscribed, the value given in your Airtime subscription is automatically used.For AVIATOR 200/300/350, the maximum Streaming bit rate is 128 kbps. AVIATOR 350 with an HGA can also handle the X-Stream service (up to approximately 450 kbps).To define a new profile, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINISTRATION > Profiles.Figure 6-63: Web interface. Administration, Profiles, select profile (Example AVIATOR 350)2. Click Edit for the profile you want to define.3. Fill in the top field with the name for your profile.4. In the Traffic class row of your new profile, select a class from the drop-down list.You may select one of the following:•Conversational is real-time two-way conversation. It is primarily used for voice over IP and video conferences.•Streaming is real-time one-way communication. It is primarily used for video and audio.•Interactive is two-way communication (not real-time). It is used for communication that is not very delay-sensitive, such as web browsing, data base retrieval and server access. Examples of machines interaction with remote equipment are: polling for measurement records and automatic data base enquiries (tele-machines).NoteImportant For best performance, choose the right traffic class for your application. In general, Standard IP (Background) is best suited for TCP/IP applications, e.g. web browsing, e-mail, file transfer, VPN. Streaming IP is best suited for UDP traffic, e.g. live video or audio.SB-Lite.book Page 80 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-816666•Background is used for data which is not delay-sensitive, such as E-mail, SMS, download of databases and reception of measurement records.5. Type in the bit rates in kbps in the following rows:•Maximum bit rate Ul (kbps) is the maximum upload bit rate allowed for this profile.•Maximum bit rate Dl (kbps) is the maximum download bit rate allowed for this profile.•Guaranteed bit rate Ul (kbps) is the guaranteed upload bit rate needed for this profile.•Guaranteed bit rate Dl (kbps) is the guaranteed download bit rate needed for this profile.6. In the Delivery order row, select from the scroll list whether or not data should be delivered in the same order it was sent. •Yes means the data packets are delivered in the same order they were sent.7. In the Maximum SDU size (byte) row, type in the maximum allowed packet size in Bytes (rounded off to nearest 10). The maximum packet size possible is 1520.8. In the Delivery of erroneous SDUs row, select one of the following from the list:•Yes means packets are allowed to contain errors. This setting is suitable for delay-sensitive transmission, because the need for retransmission is limited. The SDU Error settings in step 9 and step 10 will apply.•No means packets are not allowed to contain errors, and the SDU Error setting in step 9 will not be applied. This setting is suitable where error-free transmission is important and delays are accepted.•No detect means that errors will not be detected, and the SDU Error setting in step 9 will not be applied.9. If you selected Yes in step 8, select from the SDU error ratio drop-down list the fraction of a packet allowed to be lost or erroneous.10. Select from the Residual bit error ratio drop-down list the undetected bit error ratio of a packet. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered packets.11. In the Transfer delay (ms) row, type in the delay in ms. This is the delay from the time data is received in the SBU until it arrives at the receiving end.• If the Transfer delay is 500 ms, error correction is disabled.• If the Transfer delay is 4000 ms, error correction is applied.12. In the Traffic handling priority row, select from the drop-down list which priority this connection should have.13. Click Apply.The new profile is now added, and can be selected from the lists of primary and secondary profiles when you set up your interfaces.Note When you click Apply, the bit rate values you typed in may be rounded off because only certain values are allowed.SB-Lite.book Page 81 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-82 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.7.8 To use traffic flow filtersPurpose of the traffic flow filtersThe purpose of the traffic flow filters is to assign different priorities to different types of traffic, in order to optimize performance.Example: When you are browsing the Internet, a Standard IP connection is normally sufficient. However, to have a video conference you may need a Streaming IP connection in order to obtain a direct connection without interruptions. Your traffic flow filters can define these priorities, so that your connection automatically switches to Streaming e.g. when you have a video conference. Note that you have to activate a streaming connection in the web interface. What are traffic flow filters?When more than one type of traffic is needed, you must use both a primary and one or more secondary profiles. A traffic flow filter provides preferred treatment of a data packet. The traffic flow filter classifies data packets for the BGAN core network and the SBU received from the external network into the proper profile.You can define up to eight traffic flow filters. Each packet filter has an evaluation precedence index that is unique within all traffic flow filters associated with the profiles that share the same PDP (Packet Data Protocol) address. The evaluation precedence index determines the order in which the filters are applied; 0 is applied first, then 1 and so forth. Information of source, destination, type of service etc. is combined in each packet filter in the list.Figure 6-64: Traffic flow filters to filter traffic types6WDQGDUG,3FRQQHFWLRQNESVWRWDOGDWDUDWH6WDQGDUG,3FRQQHFWLRQ6WUHDPLQJ,3FRQQHFWLRQNESVNESVWRWDOGDWDUDWHW\SHRIWUDIILF SURILOHQRWUDIILFIORZILOWHUQHHGHGW\SHVRIWUDIILF SURILOHVWUDIILFIORZILOWHUQHHGHGSB-Lite.book Page 82 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-836666Define traffic flow filtersTo define the traffic flow filters, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINISTRATION > Traffic flow filters. The example below shows one traffic flow filter.2. Click the link New entry.Figure 6-66: Web interface: Administration, Traffic flow filters, New entry3. Select a number in the Eval.Prec. Index drop-down list.The evaluation precedence index defines the order in which the traffic flow filters are applied to packets. 0 is first, then 1, 2 etc.4. Select the Profile from the drop-down list.The available profiles are the profiles listed under ADMINISTRATION > Profiles. The selected profile is applied to all traffic that matches the conditions entered in step 5.Figure 6-65: Web interface: Administration, Traffic flow filtersSB-Lite.book Page 83 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-84 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H5. Fill in one or more of the following fields to define the filter. The allowed ranges appear in hover text when you pass the mouse over the fields.•Source address + Subnet mask. This is an IPv4 IP address and subnet mask. Only packets received from the specified source are accepted by the filter.•Protocol number. This is uniquely assigned for the protocol being used. For TCP (typically Internet, e-mail, FTP) set this to 6, for UDP (typically streaming) to 17. The protocol number determines which protocol is used by the traffic flow filter.•Destination port range (From and To). This parameter requires knowledge of ports being used by the selected applications. Note that Source and Destination are relative to the BGAN core network. This means that Destination is your SBU.•Source port range (From and To). This parameter requires knowledge of ports being used by the selected applications. Note that you must fill in both From and To, even if there is only one port.•Type of Service + Type of Service mask. Set this value to a number between 0 and 255. Type of Service (TOS) is an 8-bit field in a packet header, with associated mask, that is used to define Quality of Service.For further information on the principles and parameters of the traffic flow filters, refer to the 3GPP standards TS27.007 V4.2.0 and TS 23.060 V4.7.0.6. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.Example of a list of traffic flow filtersBelow is an example of a list with two traffic flow filters.Figure 6-67: Web interface: Example of two traffic flow filtersIn this example, data packets are filtered in the following order:1. The filter with evaluation precedence index 0 checks for UDP packets (protocol number 17), in the port range 2455-5000. When these packets are identified, they are assigned a 64 kbps Streaming channel (the Streaming 64 profile).2. The filter with evaluation precedence index 1 checks remaining packets for TCP packets (protocol number 6), on port 524. These packets are routed to the standard IP connection (the Standard profile).3. Remaining traffic is routed to the standard IP connection.SB-Lite.book Page 84 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-8566666.7.9 SIM card access protection: SIM PIN and SIM LockSIM PINTo avoid unauthorized use of the system you can enable the SIM PIN. Then the user has to enter the SIM PIN before being able to use the system. The SIM PIN is disabled per default. You enable the SIM PIN in the web interface. You can also specify a new SIM PIN in the web interface. To do this you have to enter the original SIM PIN and then specify a new one.To manage the SIM PIN of the terminal do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINSTRATION > SIM PIN. 2. If you want to protect the system with a system SIM PIN select Enabled.3. You can enter a new PIN or change the existing PIN.4. Click Apply to save the changes.Figure 6-68: Web interface, Administration, SIM PINNote There is typically no SIM PIN needed for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. The following functions might apply for special airtime subscriptions that have a SIM PIN.SB-Lite.book Page 85 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-86 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HSIM LockThe supplier may lock the SIM card of the terminal to a specific service provider. For further information contact your supplier. To unlock the SIM lock of the SIM card from your airtime provider do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINSTRATION > SIM LOCK.2. Enter the SIM Lock Code and click Apply.Figure 6-69: Web interface, Administration, SIM LOCKSB-Lite.book Page 86 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-8766666.7.10 Set up user permissionsYou can manage user access to certain functions of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. You can allow or deny users that are not administrators access to certain functions and make these pages read-only. This is useful if you want to protect the system against unintended changes or tampering of the system.Protect the SBU against unintended change of setup. We recommend to study the following screen thoroughly and decide which areas of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system you want to give non-administrator users access to.To set up the user permissions, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINISTRATION > User permissions.Figure 6-70: Web interface: Administration, User permissions2. For each item under ALLOW USERS TO:, select•Yes to allow access ImportantSB-Lite.book Page 87 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-88 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H•No to block access to the settings. Then the pages are read-only for non-administrators. The settings on the page cannot be changed. 3. Under ALLOW AT COMMANDS ON: select•Yes to allow the use of AT commands on the LAN/WLAN interface•No to block the use of AT commands on the LAN/WLAN interfaceAT commands are typically used during maintenance and service.4. Under ALLOWED SERVICES select:•Yes to allow that the user can send and receive text messages•No to block sending and receiving text messages. Note that the menu item MESSAGES is not displayed any longer.5. Click Apply.The settings to which access is denied are now greyed out for the non-administrator user.Note This setting does not take effect until the SBU is restarted.SB-Lite.book Page 88 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-8966666.7.11 Remote managementYou can set up the SBU for control from a remote location.If you want to remotely control the SBU, it must have activated a connection. This can be done in several ways:• Automatic activation of a Standard data connection, see step 10 on page 6-61 in Edit a network user group.• Manual start of a data connection (Standard data or Streaming, see Start or stop a standard data connection on page 6-14)• Remote start of a data connection with an SMS, see Remote activation of a connection using SMS on page 6-90.To set up the SBU for remote management, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINISTRATION > Remote management.Figure 6-71: Web interface: Administration, Remote management2. Select whether remote access using a web server should be Enabled or Disabled and enter the Incoming port number.3. Select whether AT commands should be Enabled or Disabled and enter the Incoming port number.4. Under TRUSTED IP ADDRESSES, type in the IP addresses of the devices you want to give access to the SBU.5. Click Apply to save the new settings.You can now access the SBU from one of the trusted IP addresses, using the incoming port defined in the Incoming port field. For a detailed description how to access the SBU from a remote location see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 89 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-90 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.7.12 Remote activation of a connection using SMSIf you want to remotely control the SBU, it must have activated a connection. You can do this by sending an SMS to the SBU. The SBU must be powered up and logged on to the satellite services to receive the SMS and then start the connection. For a detailed description how to activate a connection using SMS see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.The SBU must be logged on to the satellite services to receive and accept an activation SMS. If the SMS is considered too old or sent before the SBU has been switched on and has logged on, the SMS will be ignored.6.7.13 Link monitoring (SwiftBroadband only)You can monitor the external SwiftBroadband IP connection of the AVIATOR system using the link monitoring feature. With this feature activated, the terminal will send out ping commands (ICMP Echo Requests) to a server of your choice.Link monitoring is only performed on data connections with the Default network user group (see Set up the network user groups on page 6-59). This data connection must be activated before link monitoring can start.To set up link monitoring, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select ADMINISTRATION > Link monitoring.2. Select Enabled if you want to enable Link monitoring.3. Select the Interval between each ping.4. Select the number of Retries before the terminal reboots.5. Type in the Primary and optionally the Secondary IP address.This is the IP address of the server(s) to which the terminal will send ping commands.6. Click Apply.NoteNoteFigure 6-72: Web interface: Administration, Link monitoringNote Use a server that is reliable and that supports and responds to ICMP Echo Requests.SB-Lite.book Page 90 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-916666When a data session is started with the Default network user group, the terminal will start sending ping commands to the Primary IP address the number of times specified at Retries. If no response is received, it will send the same number of ping commands to the Secondary IP address, if available. If no response is received here either, the terminal will reboot.6.7.14 Restricted dialingIn order to manage the use of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system efficiently you can set up the SBU to limit all calls to allowed numbers or numbers in the phone book. This feature can be enabled for each connected handset separately. For a detailed description how to restrict dialing see the AVIATOR 200/300/350 user manual.6.7.15 Multi-voice (option)You can subscribe to Multi-voice with or without additional numbers. Multi-voice is disabled per default.You must have Multi-voice in your airtime subscription, AVIATOR Wireless Handset software version minimum 1.03 and SBU software version minimum AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E): 1.07, AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D (Level D): 2.01, in order to support the Multi-voice function.Table 6-10: Multi-voice, number of callsMulti-voice AVIATOR 200 LGA (Class 15)AVIATOR 300 IGA (Class 7)AVIATOR 350 HGA (Class 6)Number of voice calls2 (best effort quality)Up to 9 (best effort quality)Up to 9 (best effort quality)To enable Multi-voice, do as follows:1. Enter the web interface of your terminal.2. Select Administration > Multi-voice.3. Select Multi-voice.If you want to use an external PBX, select Using external Multi-voice PBX and select the interface used to connect the PBX to the terminalYou are now ready to use Multi-voice. For more detailed information about configuring Multi-voice see Configure Multi-voice on page 6-95.NoteImportant For software 4.00 and higher and SB-Safety Voice: Do not enable Multi-voice. Multi-voice is disabled automatically when enabling SB-Safety Voice.SB-Lite.book Page 91 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-92 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HRules for concurrent calls (without cockpit reserve)• First call initiated: You can use any connected handset and any call type for incoming as well as outgoing calls.• Second and subsequent calls: You can only use handsets connected to the WLAN interface for calls initiated/received while another call is active. The call type for the second and subsequent calls is always Standard Voice.Additional numbers for Multi-voiceIn addition to the phone numbers for incoming Standard Voice, and 3.1 kHz Audio and UDI/RDI, your subscription may include extra phone numbers that can be assigned to specific handsets. If you want to use the additional phone numbers in your subscription, you must set up the following in the web interface:• Enable the use of additional numbers in the web interface under ADMINISTRATION > Multi-voice. See Configure Multi-voice on page 6-95.• Add the additional numbers from your airtime subscription under PHONE BOOK > MOBILE NUMBERS > ADDITIONAL NUMBERS.• Assign the numbers to handsets. Depending on the handset interface you want to use, see the pages SETTINGS > Phone/Fax, SETTINGS > ISDN or SETTINGS > IP handsets in the web interface.Check with your service provider for individual billing of an additional number.Handset contextsCalls to the SBU are treated differently depending on the handset context. If additional numbers are used, there are 3 possible handset contexts, which are explained in this section:•Call type groups•Directly assigned handsets•Unassigned handsetsCall type groupsThe handsets are called using one of the mobile numbers for either Standard Voice or 3.1 kHz audio. All handsets in a group will ring when the belonging number is called.For information on how to associate a handset with a group, see•Set the call types for AVIATOR Wireless Handsets on page 6-36•Configure the Phone/Fax interface (2-Wire) on page 6-24•Configure the ISDN interface on page 6-25Note If you have additional numbers in your airtime subscription, you must set up how the system should use them. See the sections Handset contexts on page 6-92.Note You must have Multi-voice with additional numbers in your airtime subscription to be able to use this feature.SB-Lite.book Page 92 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-936666Directly assigned handsetsThe mobile numbers are assigned to individual handsets. Only the assigned handset will ring when the associated number is called.For information on how to assign a number to a handset, see the pages SETTINGS > Phone/Fax, SETTINGS > ISDN or SETTINGS > IP handsets in the web interface.Note that you can also assign the call type numbers directly (in the example above, the Standard Voice number is assigned to IP handset number 0501). If you do so, be aware that only the assigned handset can receive a call to this number. The handset connected to the Phone port 1 and the IP handset no. 0502 are each assigned an additional number.Figure 6-73: Multi-voice, call type groups (example)&DOO7\SH 6WDQGDUG &DOO7\SH N+]6WDQGDUG9RLFHQXPEHU,6'13RUW3KRQH)D[3RUW,6'13RUW3KRQH)D[3RUWN+]$XGLRQXPEHU[Note To use this feature you must have additional numbers in your airtime subscription and enable the use of additional numbers in the web interface. Then you can assign the numbers to individual handsets. For details on additional numbers, see Additional numbers for Multi-voice on page 6-92.Figure 6-74: Multi-voice, example of directly assigned handsets (example),3KDQGVHWORFDOQR $GGLWLRQDOQXPEHU&DELQ,3KDQGVHWORFDOQR 6WDQGDUG9RLFHQXPEHU3DQWU\3KRQH)D[SRUW $GGLWLRQDOQXPEHU&RFNSLWSB-Lite.book Page 93 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-94 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HUnassigned handsetsThese are IP handsets that are not assigned a number, and that do not belong to a call type group. Use this handset context if you want to create a group of IP handsets that can be called together. All unassigned IP handsets will ring when you call a mobile number which has not been assigned to a handset.To make an IP handset unassigned, clear all call types and the Assigned number field when setting up the handsets in the web interface. See Set the call types for AVIATOR Wireless Handsets on page 6-36.Figure 6-75: Multi-voice, example of unassigned handsetsCockpit reserveWith Cockpit reserve enabled, is it possible to reserve at least one call line to the handsets in the cockpit. The free call line is reserved for all handsets not assigned an additional Multi-voice number.In the following example of a Multi-voice configuration with cockpit reserve, all handsets in the cabin have been assigned an additional number while the handsets in the cockpit belong to the standard call type group.Figure 6-76: Multi-voice, example for a configuration with Cockpit reserve.&DELQ,3KDQGVHWORFDOQR1RQXPEHUDVVLJQHGAll handsets ring when calling a mobile number which is in the subscription but not assigned to any handset.&RFNSLW&DOOW\SHJURXS&DELQ$GGLWLRQDOQXPEHUDVVLJQHGWRHDFK,3KDQGVHW0RELOHQXPEHUV$GGLWLRQDOQXPEHUV$GGLWLRQDOQXPEHUV0RELOHQXPEHUVSB-Lite.book Page 94 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-956666Configure Multi-voiceTo enable and configure Multi-voice, do as follows:1. From the left navigation pane, select Administration > Multi-voice.Figure 6-77: Web interface: Administration, Multi-voice2. To use the AVIATOR 200/300/350 terminal for Multi-voice, select Multi-voice.You can also use an external Multi-voice PBX. If so, select Using external Multi-voice PBX and select the interface used to connect the PBX to the terminal. Refer to the manufacturer documentation for your Multi-voice PBX.3. If you want to assign additional numbers, select Use additional numbers. You must have additional numbers in your subscription and enter the additional numbers under PHONE BOOK > Mobile numbers. (See also Set up additional numbers on page 6-96.)Then you can use the setup page for the handset interface, e.g. SETTINGS > IP handsets > Call settings, to assign the additional numbers to the handsets you want to be able to call directly. (See also Assign additional numbers on page 6-97).4. You can configure a reserved line for the handsets in the cockpit by selecting Use additional numbers and Cockpit reserve Yes.• There will at all times be a free line for the handsets in the cockpit so a call can be made and received regardless the use of other handsets. Set up a call type group to assign handsets to the cockpit-reserved group, see Set the call types for AVIATOR Wireless Handsets on page 6-36, Configure the Phone/Fax interface (2-Wire) on page 6-24 and Configure the ISDN interface on page 6-25.• Use the additional numbers for other handsets, e.g. in the cabin. 5. Type in the VoIP APN used for Multi-voice. You find the Multi-voice APN name in your subscription documentation.6. Click Apply.Note The handsets using additional numbers must be AVIATOR Wireless Handsets or other SIP phones, a normal 2-wire handset cannot be used.SB-Lite.book Page 95 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration6-96 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-HSet up additional numbersEnter the additional numbers under PHONE BOOK > Mobile numbers. Figure 6-78: Web interface: Phone book, mobile numbers (example, Multi-voice)SB-Lite.book Page 96 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Administration98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-976666Assign additional numbersAssign additional numbers under SETTINGS > IP handsets > Call settings.Figure 6-79: Web interface: Settings, IP handsets, Call settings (with Multi-voice, example)SB-Lite.book Page 97 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Site map6-98 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.8 Site mapThe web interface offers a site map page. Use this page to get an overview over the menus, submenus and topics. The following drawing shows the site mapFigure 6-80: Web interface: Site map.To access the site map, select SITE MAP from the left navigation pane. You can click on each menu in the site map to go directly to the page or display the respective submenu.3RUWIRUZDUGLQJ 1HWZRUNGHYLFHV1HWZRUNFODVVLILFDWLRQ1HWZRUNXVHUJURXSV333R(6WDWLFURXWH&DOOIRUZDUG &DOOEDUULQJ &DOOZDLWLQJ /LQHLGHQWLILFDWLRQ &ORVHGXVHUJURXS/RFDOH[FKDQJH/$1:/$13KRQH)D[,6'1&RPPRQ,3KDQGVHWV'LVFUHWH,26\VWHPW\SH5)VHWWLQJV([WHUQDOV\VWHPV)/(;7UDFNLQJ8SORDG&DOOFKDUJHV /RJKDQGOLQJ'DWDOLPLWV 3URILOHV 7UDIILFIORZILOWHUV 6,03,16,0/RFN 8VHUSHUPLVVLRQV5HPRWHPDQDJHPHQW/LQNPRQLWRULQJ5HPRWHDFWLYDWLRQ5HVWULFWHGGLDOLQJ0XOWLYRLFH(YHQWOLVW (YHQWORJ([WHQGHGVWDWXV 6HOIWHVW'$6+%2$5'&211(&73+21(%22.0(66$*(6&$//66(77,1*6$'0,1,675$7,21+(/3'(6.6,7(0$3&DOOVHWWLQJV&08$&$56SB-Lite.book Page 98 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Configuration of 3rd party phone systems98-127093-H Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 6-9966666.9 Configuration of 3rd party phone systems6.9.1 Sigma7 setupThere are a few adjustments that are typically made at the time of installation testing. Normally it is necessary to set the ear volume of the handset initially, in order to obtain sufficient volume in the ear piece. The information in this section is only meant as a guideline. For complete information on the function of the Sigma7 handset, refer to the Sigma7 manual.To set up the ear volumeTo set up the ear volume of the handset, do as follows:1. Take the handset out of the cradle and enter the menu system of the handset.2. Use the volume control keys to scroll to the EARVOL setting.3. Press the Flash key to select EARVOL.4. Change the volume setting to 4 using the volume control keys.5. Press # to store the setting. To adjust other settings, press Flash to return to the menu. 6. Place the handset back into the cradle.For further information on the Sigma7 handset, refer to the manual for the Sigma7 handset.6.9.2 ICG DECT Cordless Handset setupIt is sometimes necessary to adjust the volume of the ICG DECT Cordless Handset, in order to have sufficient volume in the ear piece. Also, you may want to change the setting of the handset from pulse to tone, if this is not already set.The information in this section is only meant as a guideline. For complete information on the function of the ICG DECT Cordless Handset phone, refer to the manual for your ICG DECT Cordless Handset phone.To set the volumeTo change the volume setting, enter the handset menus and do as follows:1. Scroll to Audio Sett and press OK.2. Select H/Set Vol and press OK. The current volume is heard in the ear piece and the level is displayed.3. Scroll to the desired volume and press OK.To switch to Tone dialingTo change the dialing mode, do as follows:1. Open the handset menu.2. Scroll to Temp Tone and press OK. Tone dialing is now active.NoteNoteSB-Lite.book Page 99 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ready for use6-100 Chapter 6: Configuration of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system 98-127093-H6.10 AVIATOR 200/300/350 system ready for use Having installed the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system, activated the SIM card and configured the system you can verify whether the system is fully operational. Check that all LEDs on the SBU front panel are green.Figure 6-81: AVIATOR 200/300/350 system Note Line of sight during operation!Make sure that there is a line of sight between the Satcom antenna and the satellite in order to logon to and use the satellite service.6%8*UHHQ/('VRQ6%83RZHU/RJRQ)DLO3DVVSB-Lite.book Page 100 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H 7-1Chapter 77777Maintenance and troubleshooting 77.1 Continued Airworthiness7.1.1 GeneralMaintenanceThe AVIATOR system requires no periodic scheduled servicing tasks. When replacing the TT-5040A SwiftBroadband Unit (SBU), it is important to leave the TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module behind, attached to the airframe with a wire.Contact for supportAVIATOR 200/300/350 system purchased from a Cobham SATCOM distributor: If you need assistance and you have purchased your system from a Cobham SATCOM distributor, contact the distributor’s support line.AVIATOR 200/300/350 system purchased directly from Cobham SATCOM: If you need assistance and you have purchased your system directly from Cobham SATCOM, you can contact Cobham SATCOM by telephone or send an e-mail to the Cobham SATCOM esupport.Telephone numbers:For urgent technical support please contact us at one of the following numbers:• One Dial Phone: +45 39 88 89 89• US, Virginia Beach office: +1 757 463 9557 or +1 866 SATCOMS.The eSupport e-mail address is AVIATOR.support@cobham.com.7.1.2 InstructionsDocumentationMaintenance information for the AVIATOR 200/300/350 System is contained in this manual. Place the wiring diagram information in this manual in the aircraft operator's appropriate aircraft wiring diagram manuals.Inoperative unitsIf a system component is inoperative, remove or replace the unit.If a level-D certified system detects an inconsistent hardware unit (level E) or software image (level E), it enters failure mode and the system will not be operational. Inconsistency messages are displayed to clearly inform the service personnel about the reason for this failure mode.NoteImportantSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Continued Airworthiness7-2 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-HIf an inoperative SBU is removed, take out the TT-5040A-001 CM and fasten the CM and wiring to the air frame. Secure all cables, collect applicable switches and circuit breakers, and label them inoperative. Revise the equipment list and weight and balance as applicable prior to flight and make a log book entry that the unit was removed.For information on how to return a unit for repair, see Return units for repair on page 7-19. Once repaired, reinstall the unit in the aircraft in accordance with the instructions in this Installation and Maintenance Manual.SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Get support: HELPDESK98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-377777.2 Get support: HELPDESKIf this manual does not provide the remedies to solve your problem, you may want to contact your Airtime Provider or your local distributor.7.2.1 Airtime supportIf you need assistance from your Airtime Provider, call the help desk, click HELP DESK or check your Airtime subscription for a contact number.7.2.2 System supportIf you need assistance with problems caused by the SBU or the antenna, please call a distributor in your area. A list of certified partners and distributors is available on Cobham SATCOM web site: www.cobham.com/satcom. Select Where to buy, then AVIATOR, EXPLORER, SAILOR and Sea Tel branded products resellers.7.2.3 Help desk and diagnostic reportHelp deskIf you need help with airtime-related issues for the SwiftBroadband subscription you may call the Help desk. Enter the phone number for your Airtime Provider on this page. To access the Help desk, select HELP DESK from the left navigation pane. Figure 7-1: Web interface: Help deskIf you have entered the Help desk number, it is displayed as a link. To change the number, click the link, change the number and click Apply. If you need help with SBU- or antenna-related issues call your local distributor.SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Get support: HELPDESK7-4 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-HGenerating a diagnostic reportWhen contacting your distributor for support, please include a diagnostic report. The diagnostic report contains information relevant for the service personnel during troubleshooting. When contacting your distributor for support, please enclose this file.To generate a diagnostic report with valuable information for the service team, do as follows:1. Reboot the system.2. Establish the problem or situation in which the error occurred, or 3. Make a CS call (if possible), i.e. making a call with a handset connected to the SBU.4. Make a PS call (if possible), i.e. establish a data connection.5. Click Generate report from the HELP DESK page. In some browsers the file may open directly in your browser. If it does, choose File > Save As to save the file.6. Choose a location for the file and save it on your computer.Extended statusClick Extended status in the HELP DESK page to display further status information on logon status, ongoing data sessions and ongoing calls.Figure 7-2: Web interface: Help desk, Extended statusSB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Software update98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-577777.3 Software updateMinimum Software Version required for AVIATOR 200/300/350 (Level E):• SBU: AVIATOR 200/300/350: Swift_broadband-E_105.zip File: Swift_broadband-E_105.dl1Minimum Software Version required for AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D (Level D):• SBU: AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D: Swift_broadband-D_200.zip File: Swift_broadband-D_200.dlHardware and software requirementsThe following items are required before the software can be updated:• One computer with a standard Ethernet port available.• A standard Internet browser.• 1024×768 pixels or higher display resolution. The program is best viewed using small fonts.• One straight LAN cable.• The zipped file containing the new software.• Select Product software > Aeronautical > Satcom Systems to narrow the search.Important Level-D and Level E consistency! A level-D certified system detecting an inconsistent hardware unit or software image enters failure mode, and the system will not be operational. Inconsistency messages clearly inform the service personnel about the reason for this failure mode.Pay great attention to selecting the correct software file: Level D or Level E. A mismatch of Level D and Level E software is not allowed and will result in a non-functioning system. A mismatch will be displayed in the built-in web interface.1. For Level E, this software version is not mandatory, but recommended.SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Software update7-6 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.3.1 SBU software updatePreparing the software update1. On the PC, unzip the zip file containing the new software. Remember or write down which folder you extracted the file to.2. Connect the SBU to the PC LAN port, using the SBU maintenance connector and a straight LAN cable.3. Power on the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system.4. Open your browser and enter the IP address of the SBU. The standard IP address is 192.168.0.1.If the local IP address of the SBU has been changed and you do not have the new address, you can temporarily set the IP address to the default value by pushing the Reset button next on the front plate of the SBU. For detailed instructions see How to reset the IP address or the terminal software to default settings on page 7-15.For further information on the Reset button, see IP Reset (Default) button on page 7-14.For further information on IP addresses of the SBU see Set up the LAN IP addressing on page 6-19.You are now connected to the web interface of the SBU.Note Software update should only be done by qualified service personnel.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Software update98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-77777Updating the software1. In the web interface of the SBU, select SETTINGS from the left navigation pane.2. Click Upload from the left navigation pane.Figure 7-3: Web interface: Settings, Upload3. The Current software version field shows the current software version.4. To automatically find new software available click Check for updates.This works from software 1.06 (Level D) and 2.01 (Level E).or click Browse...5. Browse to the new software version and accept it.6. Click the Upload button.Note that the upload procedure takes a couple of minutes. When done, the SBU automatically restarts with the new software version.If software upload fails - how to recoverTo recover from a failed software upload, turn off the SBU and turn it on again. Then repeat the upload procedure as described in Updating the software on page 7-7.If software upload still fails, use the IP Reset button as described in IP Reset (Default) button on page 7-14 to initiate a software upload from an external server.NoteSB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Software update7-8 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.3.2 Verify the software updateTest procedure1. The SBU software version can be viewed in the DASHBOARD window of the web interface.2. After completing the software update procedure, the SBU will perform a POST (Power On Self Test).3. When the POST has finished, the green Fail/Pass LED on the front of the SBU must become steadily green. Verify that the Fail/Pass LED is not red nor flashing orange once every 2 seconds. Wait until the Fail/Pass LED is green.4. Verify that the software update has been completed successfully. You find the software version number in the DASHBOARD window of the web interface.Software identification procedureOn the PartNumber / SerialNumber identification label on the SBU make a cross mark in the Software Ver. field number according to the new software version.Figure 7-4: Software identification on the SBU label, Level D and Level E SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To exchange LRUs98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-977777.4 To exchange LRUsThis document describes the procedures for removal and re-installation of an AVIATOR 200/300/350 LRU:• SBU (405040A-THD).7.4.1 Time consumptionThe time consumption for removal and re-installation of an LRU is estimated to 15 minutes.7.4.2 ToolsNo tools required.7.4.3 Removal and re-installation of the SBU1. Ensure that power is removed from the satcom system before removing any LRU!2. Pull and turn to loosen the knurled knob(s) that retain(s) the LRU in the tray.Figure 7-5: Exchanging an LRU (example)SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
To exchange LRUs7-10 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H3. Pull the LRU straight out from the tray by the handle. Be careful not to drop the unit.Figure 7-6: Pull out the LRU4. If the LRU has a Configuration Module (CM), unscrew it and pull it out from the rear of the LRU. Make sure that the Configuration Module is attached to the airframe.Figure 7-7: Attach CM to the airframeRe-installationFollow the procedure above in reverse order. Make sure that the LRU is completely seated against the mating A404 connector.ImportantPull straight out!Attach tothe airframe!SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-1177777.5 Troubleshooting7.5.1 Status signallingBuilt-In Test EquipmentThe SBU provides a Built-In Test Equipment (BITE) function in order to make fault diagnostics easy during service and installation. The BITE test is performed during:• Power On Self Test (POST), which is automatically performed each time the system is powered on.• Person Activated Self Test (PAST), which is initiated by pushing the Push To Test button on the SBU front panel. Also, during operation a Continuous Monitoring BITE function is performed. Details on error messages after a POST or PAST for the SBU can be found in the event list of the SBU, see View the Event list, Event log and extended status on page 7-16.Means of signallingThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system provides various methods for signalling the status of the system.•LEDs on the front panel of the SBU are used to signal:• Power on/off• Logon• Fail/Pass• The built-in web interface of the SBU shows any BITE error codes with a short message describing each error.Push to Test button on SBUThe SBU has a hardware reset/test button placed on the front panel for BITE purposes. Use the button on the SBU to activate a self test (PAST).SB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting7-12 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.5.2 Status signalling with LEDsLEDs on SBUDuring the power-up procedure all LEDs on the front plate are orange. If all 3 LEDs on the front stay orange after power up, check that TP8 of the SBU is connected to ground. If the wiring is good, the SBU software is corrupted. Contact your local distributor for instructions how to proceed.Power LED on SBUBehavior DescriptionGreen Power OKOrange During upstart procedureOff No powerTable 7-1: Function of the SBU Power LEDLogon LED on SBUBehavior DescriptionRed Acquiring satellite networkOrange Network synchronizationGreen Network logonOff No acquired satellite/logged offTable 7-2: Function of the SBU Logon LEDFail/Pass LED on SBUBehavior DescriptionSteady red A fault which may degrade the system operation is present in the SBUFlashing: short green/ long pausePower On Self Test (POST) or Person Activated Self Test (PAST) in progressFlashing: long green/ short orangeNo current failure, but a BITE failure / warning is logged in the error logSteady green No faultsTable 7-3: Function of the SBU Fail/Pass LEDSB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-137777LEDs on maintenance connectorFigure 7-8: Function of the LEDs on the front maintenance connectorLED Flashing yellow Activity (data in/out)LED Steady green Link (correct connection)SB-Lite.book Page 13 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting7-14 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.5.3 IP Reset (Default) buttonThe SBU has an IP Reset (Default) button next to the front LAN maintenance connector below the metal cover. The button has two functions: To reset the terminal’s IP address and netmask to the default value, 192.168.0.1 and to reset the terminal to factory default settings.Figure 7-9: IP Reset (Default) button on SBU frontThe table on the next page describes how you can use the IP reset button.SB-Lite.book Page 14 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-157777Action FunctionWith the SBU running, push the IP Reset button normally.Temporary reset to default values: The SBU’s IP address and IP netmask are temporarily set to the default value (default IP address: 192.168.0.1, default netmask: 255.255.255.0). With this function, even if the IP address has been changed and you do not remember the new IP address, you can still access the web interface and see your current configuration. The default value is not saved in the configuration, but is only valid until next reboot.With the terminal running, push and hold the IP Reset button for 30 seconds, until the Power indicator on the SBU front plate flashes orange.Reset to factory settings: The SBU restores factory settings and reboots the system. All settings are reset to factory default, incl. the IP address of the SBU and the administrator password.Exception: The settings that are specific for the installation are not reset. These are the settings on the pages:• SETTINGS > System Type• SETTINGS > RF Settings• SETTINGS > External Systems (including ACARS)• SETTINGS > Flex• ADMINISTRATOR > User permission > SMSWhile the terminal is booting, push and hold the IP Reset button.For service use only! This firmware upload procedure is only to be used if the other procedures fail due to missing or corrupted firmware. This setup uploads software to the SBU from a TFTP server via the LAN connection. The procedure is as follows:1. Activate or install a TFTP server on a PC. 2. Locate the correct software image (xxx.dl) for the SBU and place it in the TFTP server directory.3. Rename the image to ttexp.dl.4. Reconfigure the PC LAN interface to use the static address 192.168.0.2/255.255.255.0.5. Power off the SBU.6. Connect the PC LAN Interface to the SBU,7. Push and hold down the Reset button. 8. Keep the Reset button pushed while powering on the SBU, and through the next step. 9. Monitor the TFTP server window. When the upload starts you can release the Reset button. 10. When the TFTP upload finishes the SBU boots up using the new image. Table 7-4: How to reset the IP address or the terminal software to default settings SB-Lite.book Page 15 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting7-16 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.5.4 View the Event list, Event log and extended status OverviewWhen an event is registered, the web interface shows an event icon in the icon bar as long as the event is active. The Event list only shows events that are currently active, whereas the Event log shows the history of events that have occurred.Event listTo view the event list, click the event icon from the icon bar at the top of the web interface, or select HELPDESK > Event list from the left navigation pane.Figure 7-10: Web interface: Help desk, Event listThe Event list page shows a detailed list of active events including the time of the first occurrence, ID and severity of the event message, and a short text describing the error. For a list of events with description, ID, explanation and remedy see List of events on page C-2.Event logThe Event log shows the same information as the Event list, but also includes events that occurred in the past and are no longer active. Additionally, it lists events of informational character, describing normal phases of operation for the SBU. The event log holds information of events registered in the SBU or antenna. The same events are also indicated in the Antenna and Terminal LEDs on the SBU LED panel. The log includes the time of the occurrence, a short description, location of the error etc. This information can help troubleshooting errors in the system. You can see the event log in the web interface. To view the Event log, select HELPDESK > Event log from the left navigation pane.Extended statusThe Extended Status page shows the following information:• The antenna Product ID.• The status of the connection to the air interface (IAI-2). This field should normally show “Registered”, unless the system is still in the startup process.• Ongoing data sessions (IP address) and connection status, e.g. Active or Suspended.SB-Lite.book Page 16 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-177777• Ongoing calls and their connection status.To update the information on the Extended status page, click Refresh.7.5.5 Self testThe Self test performs system test on the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system, similar to the tests that are performed during the Power On Self Test (POST).To activate a Self test, do as follows:1. Select HELPDESK > Self test.Figure 7-11: Web interface: Help desk, Self test2. Click Self test.3. Click OK in the Warning dialog.The SBU now performs a self test and resets the SBU.Important The SBU will reboot when performing the self test. All ongoing calls or data sessions will be terminated.SB-Lite.book Page 17 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Troubleshooting7-18 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.5.6 Initial troubleshootingThis section describes an initial check of the primary functions of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system.Means available for troubleshootingThe following means are available for troubleshooting:•LEDs. Generally, if a fault occurs without any obvious reason, it is always recommended to observe the LEDs. For information on the LEDs, refer to Status signalling on page 7-11.•Web interface. For troubleshooting errors in the SBU, you may connect to the front LAN interface on the SBU and use the web interface to inspect any alarm messages. For information on the web interface refer to Tool for setup and use: Built-in web interface on page 6-6.•Diagnostic report. You can generate a diagnostic report that can be used for troubleshooting errors in the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system. To generate the diagnostic report, access the web interface and select HELPDESK. then click Generate report. Save the report on your PC.• Enclose the diagnostic report and the service log when requesting support.Problem What to doNo connection to the SBU maintenance connectorDepending on the options in your system you might experience limitations when using an Ethernet interface of the AVIATOR 200/300/350. For systems without the built-in router option enabled, i.e. the basic version or the version with Wireless option, note the following limitation:• To use the SBU Maintenance connector disconnect or switch off any PC connected to another LAN interface of the SBU.No GPS signal: Interference from satcom antenna on GPS antennaIf the existing GPS antenna on board the aircraft does not provide sufficient filtering of the satcom antenna signal to provide a usable GPS signal, you must replace the existing GPS antenna with a GPS antenna that has a satcom filter.Registration for voice or data not possibleIn case the system cannot register properly for voice or data service, check with your Service provider that the SIM card in the Configuration module of the SBU is not blocked.Table 7-5: Initial troubleshootingSB-Lite.book Page 18 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Return units for repair98-127093-H Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 7-1977777.6 Return units for repairShould your Cobham SATCOM product fail, please contact your dealer or installer, or the nearest Cobham SATCOM partner. You will find the partner details on www.cobham.com/satcom, Technical Service Partner List. You can also access the Partner Portal at www.cobham.com/satcom, Cobham SYNC Partner Portal, which may help you solve the problem. Your dealer, installer or Cobham SATCOM partner will assist you whether the need is user training, technical support, arranging on-site repair or sending the product for repair. Your dealer, installer or Cobham SATCOM partner will also take care of any warranty issue. Repackaging requirementsShould you need to send the product for repair, please read the below information before packing the product.The shipping carton has been carefully designed to protect the AVIATOR 200/300/350 and its accessories during shipment. This carton and its associated packing material should be used when repacking for shipment. Attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, part number and full serial number. Mark the carton FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.Correct shipment is the customer’s own responsibility.If the original shipping carton is not available, the following general instructions should be used for repacking with commercially available material.1. Wrap the defective unit in heavy paper or plastic. Attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, part number and full serial number.2. Use a strong shipping container, e.g. a double walled carton.3. Protect the front- and rear panel with cardboard and insert a layer of shock-absorbing material between all surfaces of the equipment and the sides of the container.4. Seal the shipping container securely.5. Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.Failure to do so may invalidate the warranty. NoteSB-Lite.book Page 19 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment7-20 Chapter 7: Maintenance and troubleshooting 98-127093-H7.7 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipmentOld electrical and electronic equipment marked with this symbol can contain substances hazardous to human beings and the environment. Never dispose these items together with unsorted municipal waste (household waste). In order to protect the environment and ensure the correct recycling of old equipment as well as the re-utilization of individual components, use either public collection or private collection by the local distributor of old electrical and electronic equipment marked with this symbol. Contact the local distributor for information about what type of return system to use.SB-Lite.book Page 20 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AppendicesSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H A-1Appendix AAAAAEquipment specifications AA.1 IntroductionImportant note!The information, drawings, and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a reference for engineering planning only. It is the installer’s responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. For specifications of the antenna please see the documentation provided with the antenna.For equipment drawings of the AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle see AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle Installation & Maintenance Manual (98-129600). Note Cables and connectors are not included. NoteSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsA-2 Appendix A: Equipment specifications 98-127093-HA.2 AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsA.2.1 TT-5040A SwiftBroadband Unit (SBU)Characteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H)ARINC 404A 1/4 ATR short320.5 mm x 193.5 mm x 57.15 mm (12.62” x 7.62” x 2.25”)Weight 2.8 kg ±0.1 kg (6.2 lbs ±0.22 lbs) including TT-5040-001 CMMounting Mount in an ARINC 404A 1/4 ATR short tray in a temperature controlled location. Forced cooling is not required and not recommended.Supply VoltagePower Hold-upNominal: +28.0 V DCVoltage range,continuous operation: +20.5 V DC to 32.2 V DCshort time operation: +18.0 V DC to 32.2 V DC200 ms. Fully operational: 5 ms.Typical Power Consumption (idle) (SBU, CM, HLD & satcom antenna)30 WTotal Maximum Power Consumption (SBU, CM, HLD and satcom antenna)See examples: With LGA-3000 (LGA, RF + GPS): Max. 84 W With TT-3002A (LGA, RF only): Max. 83 W With TT-5006A (IGA, Coax Modem): Max. 98 W With AMT-50, HGA-6000 (HGA, ARINC-781): Max. 83 W With HGA-7000 (HGA, Coax Modem): Max. 107 WMaximum Heat Dissipation (SBU & CM)<33 WConnectors Rear: ARINC 404A Front: RJ45 Female.Operating TemperatureGround Survival TemperatureShelf life-25 °C to +55 °C-55 °C to +85 °C 7 years at 35°C in original packingTable A-1: Equipment specifications for TT-5040A SBU SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components98-127093-H Appendix A: Equipment specifications A-3AAAAA.2.2 TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module (CM) for SBUAltitude Non pressurized (Cat. F1): 55,000 ft Pressurized (Cat. A1): 15,000 ft Decompression (Cat. A1): 55,000 ft Overpressure (Cat. A1): -15,000 ftRelative humidity 95% non-condensing at +50°CEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form in SwiftBroadband unit (SBU) on page B-2 in Appendix B.Characteristics SpecificationTable A-1: Equipment specifications for TT-5040A SBU (Continued)Characteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H) 47 mm x 45.5 mm x 20.0 mm (1.85” x 1.79” x 0.79”)Weight 0.07 kg ±0.01 kg (0.15 lbs ±0.02 lbs)Mounting The CM is inserted in the TT-5040A SBUSupply Voltage The CM is powered by the SBU.Heat dissipation Included in TT-5040A SBUConnector 9-pin Sub-D connectorOperating TemperatureGround Survival Temperature-25 C to +55 C-55 C to +85 CAltitude Non pressurized (Cat. F1): 55,000 ft Pressurized (Cat. A1): 15,000 ft Decompression (Cat. A1): 55,000 ft Overpressure (Cat. A1): -15,000 ftRelative humidity 95% non-condensing at +50°CEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form in SwiftBroadband unit (SBU) on page B-2 in Appendix B.Table A-2: Equipment specifications for TT-5040A-001 CMSB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsA-4 Appendix A: Equipment specifications 98-127093-HA.2.3 TT-5016A High Power Amp./Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD)Characteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H) 228.0 mm x 200.0 mm x 50.0 mm (8.98” x 7.87” x 1.97”)Weight 2.6 kg ±0.1 kg (5.7 lbs ±0.22 lbs)Mounting Can be installed in a non-temperature controlled location. Forced cooling is not required. Should be mounted as close to the Antenna unit as possible for minimum cable loss. Place the HLD with sufficient contact to the surface, respecting the max. resistance of 25 m. The HLD can be mounted on a shelf or directly on the fuselage. Supply Voltage The HLD is powered by the SBU.Heat dissipation < 40 WConnectors Tx input: N-female Rx output: TNC-female Satcom antenna: TNC-female Ground studOperating TemperatureGround Survival Temperature-55 C to +70 C-55 C to +85 CAltitude Non pressurized (Cat. F1): 55,000 ft Pressurized (Cat. A1): 15,000 ft Decompression (Cat. A1): 55,000 ft Overpressure (Cat. A1): -15,000 ftRelative humidity 95% non-condensing at +50°CEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form in High Power Amplifier/Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD) on page B-4 in Appendix B.Table A-3: Equipment specifications for TT-5016A HLDSB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components98-127093-H Appendix A: Equipment specifications A-5AAAAA.2.4 TT-5040A-004 WLAN antennaA.2.5 TT-5038A-003 Rx Power SplitterCharacteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H) 12 mm x 119 mm x 13 mm (0.48” x 4.7” x 0.5”)Weight 28.3 g (1 ounce)Mounting For mounting instructions for WLAN antennas see Figure 5-2: Mounting two WLAN antennas for optimum performance in TT-5040A-004 WLAN antennas on page 5-7.Connector Male TNCOperating TemperatureGround Survival Temperature-40 C to +71 C-55 C to +85 CAltitude Pressurized (Cat. A1): 15,000 ft Decompression (Cat. A1): 45,000 ft Overpressure (Cat. A1): -15,000 ftRelative humidity 95% non-condensing at +50°CCable type Plenum, RG-316U coaxialCable length (including connector)7.5” ± 0.25” (190.5 ±6.4 mm) Table A-4: Equipment specifications for WLAN antenna Characteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H)86.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 19.1 mm (3.42” x 2.00” x 0.75”) including connectors.Weight 146 g ±10 g (0.32 lbs ±0.02 lbs)Mounting If the Rx Power Splitter is to be mounted on a flat surface, mount it on a 3 mm mounting plate to provide enough space for mounting of the connectors. Can be mounted in an unpressurized but temperature controlled location.Connectors 3 x N-connector, Female.Built-in DC-block on the HSU (SBU) port.Table A-5: General specifications for Rx Power SplitterSB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsA-6 Appendix A: Equipment specifications 98-127093-HOperating TemperatureGround Survival Temperature-25 C to +55 C-55 C to +85 CAltitude 55000 ftEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form in Rx Power Splitter on page B-6 in Appendix B.Characteristics SpecificationTable A-5: General specifications for Rx Power SplitterSB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradles98-127093-H Appendix A: Equipment specifications A-7AAAAA.3 AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradlesA.3.1 TT-5621B 2-Wire HandsetA.3.2 TT-5622B 2-Wire CradleNote For specifications of the AVIATOR Wireless Handset see AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle Installation & Maintenance Manual (part number: 98-129600)Characteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H) 200.0 mm x 52.0 mm x 31.5 mm (7.87” x 2.05” x 1.24”)Weight 0.22 kg ±50 g (0.49 lbs ±0.11 lbs) incl. cable.Mounting Mount in a pressurized and temperature controlled location.Power consumption Max. 750 mW for handset and cradle (included in SBU power consumption).Operating TemperatureGround Survival Temperature-25 C to +55 C-40 C to +80 CAltitude 55,000 ftEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form in 2-Wire Handset and 2-Wire Cradle on page B-8 in Appendix B.Table A-6: Equipment specifications for 2-Wire HandsetCharacteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H) 160.5 mm x 61.0 mm x 28.4 mm (6.30” x 2.40” x 1.12”)Weight 0.20 kg ±50 g (0.43 lbs ±0.11 lbs) incl. connector cable.Mounting Mount in a pressurized and temperature controlled location.Power consumption See TT-5621B 2-Wire Handset on page A-7.Operating TemperatureGround Survival Temperature-25 C to +55 C-40 C to +80 CAltitude 55,000 ftEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form in 2-Wire Handset and 2-Wire Cradle on page B-8 in Appendix B.Table A-7: Equipment specifications for 2-Wire CradleSB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradlesA-8 Appendix A: Equipment specifications 98-127093-HSB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H B-1Appendix BBBBBDO-160 specifications BB.1 GeneralB.1.1 Certifying agencyApproval of the installation of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system is not authorized by this installation manual. Acceptance for the installation and use of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system and its associated components must be obtained through the appropriate offices of the FAA or other certifying agency. It is recommended that all proposed installations be coordinated with the local jurisdiction of the FAA or other certifying agency prior to performing the installation.B.1.2 Environmental Qualification FormsThe Environmental Qualification Forms list the environmental categories under which all Cobham SATCOM components of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system are approved.Please refer to RTCA DO-160D/E for further details on the following Environmental Qualification Forms.SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsB-2 Appendix B: DO-160 specifications 98-127093-HB.2 AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsB.2.1 SwiftBroadband unit (SBU)Part Number: 405040A (AVIATOR 200/300/350) or 405040A-THD (AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D)DO-160E string: [(A1)(F1)X]CAB[SB2M]ExxxxxZ[AB]A[RB][ZC][RR]M[A3J33]XXAXConditions DO-160E Cat. CommentsTemperature and Altitude 4.0 A1, F1 Installation in temperature controlled areas and inside or outside pressurized locations.Low Temperature 4.5.1 & 4.5.2 Short time operating low is -40°C. Unit is active, but inoperable until the unit temperature is > -30°C.Min. operational temperature is -25°C.High Temperature 4.5.3 & 4.5.4 Short time operating high (30 min.): +70°CMax. operating high temperature is +55°CIn-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 X Forced cooling is not required and not recommended.Altitude 4.6.1 Max. altitude: 55000 ftDecompression 4.6.2 Decompression test at 55000 ftOverpressure 4.6.3 Overpressure at -15000 ftTemperature Variation 5.0 C Installation within temperature controlled areas: 2°C/min.Humidity 6.0 A Standard Humidity: 95% relative humidity at 38°C to 50°C for 48 hours. Installation within environmentally controlled zonesOperational Shocks and Crash Safety7.0 B Equipment tested to: Standard operational shock and crash safety.Vibration 8.0 S, B2, MEquipment tested without shock mounts to Category S, Curve B2 and Curve M.Explosion Proofness 9.0 E Not hermetically sealed equipmentWaterproofness 10.0 X No test requiredFluids Susceptibility 11.0 X No test requiredTable B-1: Environmental Qualification Form for SBU SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components98-127093-H Appendix B: DO-160 specifications B-3BBBBSand and Dust 12.0 X No test requiredFungus Resistance 13.0 X No test requiredSalt Spray 14.0 X No test requiredMagnetic Effect 15.0 Z Magnetic deflection distance: < 0.3 mPower Input 16.0 AB Power supply: +28 V DC. Reconnection of voice and data calls is not required, if a power interrupt less than 200 ms occurs during transfer of power sources.Voltage Spike 17.0 A Power supply: +28 V DC.Audio Susceptibility 18.0 RB Power supply: +28 V DC.Induced Susceptibility 19.0 ZC Equipment intended for operation in systems where interference-free operation is required.Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 RR High Intensity Radiated Field (HIRF) associated with normal environment.Emission of Radio Frequency Energy21.0 M Installation in areas with significant electromagnetic apertures.Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility22.0 A3J33 Equipment and wiring in moderately exposed environment in an all metal airframe.The Configuration Module is an integrated part of the SBU, and so the pin injection tests are not required for the Configuration Module interface.Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X No test requiredIcing 24.0 X No test requiredElectrostatic Discharge ESD 25.0 A Operation, installation and repair in an aerospace environment.Fire, Flammability 26.0 X Equipment is tested according to FAR 25 Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Airplanes, Paragraph 25.853(a) and Appendix F - Part I (a)(1)(ii) and Paragraph 25.869(a)(4) and Appendix F - Part I (a)(3).Conditions DO-160E Cat. CommentsTable B-1: Environmental Qualification Form for SBU (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsB-4 Appendix B: DO-160 specifications 98-127093-HB.2.2 Configuration Module (CM) for SBUPart Number: 405040A-001DO-160E string: Please refer to the section SwiftBroadband unit (SBU) on page B-2, as the Configuration Module is an integral part of the SBU during normal operation and tests. However, the section 25 Category A test is performed on the Configuration Module as an individual LRU.B.2.3 High Power Amplifier/Low Noise Amplifier/Diplexer (HLD)Part Number: 405016A (AVIATOR 200/300/350) + 405016A-THD (AVIATOR 200D/300D/350D)DO-160E string: [(A2)(F2)X]BBB[SCL]E[(Y)(W)]XXFXZXXX[ZC][RR]M[A3J33]XXAXConditions DO-160E Cat. CommentsTemperature and Altitude 4.0 A2, F2 Installation in non-temperature controlled locations and inside or outside pressurized locations.Low Temperature 4.5.1 & 4.5.2 Min. operational temperature is -55°C. Short time operating low is -55°C.High Temperature 4.5.3 & 4.5.4 Max. operating high temperature: +70°C Short time operating high: +70°CIn-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 X Forced cooling is not required and not recommended.Altitude 4.6.1 Max. altitude: 55000 ft.Decompression 4.6.2 Decompression at 55000 ft.Overpressure 4.6.3 Overpressure at -15000ft.Temperature Variation 5.0 B Installation in a non-temperature-controlled or partially temperature controlled internal section of the aircraft.Humidity 6.0 B Severe Humidity: 95% relative humidity at 38°C to 65°C for 240 hours. Installation within environmentally controlled zones.Operational Shocks and Crash Safety7.0 B Equipment tested to: Standard operational shocks and crash safety.Vibration 8.0 SCL Fixed wing turbojet & turboprop/fuselage zone: Category S, Curve C & L.Table B-2: Environmental Qualification Form for HLD SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components98-127093-H Appendix B: DO-160 specifications B-5BBBBExplosion Proofness 9.0 E Not hermetically sealed equipment.Waterproofness 10.0 Y, W Tested to condensing and dripping water.Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 X No test required.Sand and Dust 12.0 X No test required.Fungus Resistance 13.0 F Equipment tested to Category F.Salt Spray 14.0 X No test required.Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Magnetic deflection distance: < 0.3 m.Power Input 16.0 X No test required (power from SBU).Voltage Spike 17.0 X No test required (power from SBU).Audio Frequency Conducted Susceptibility - Power Inputs18.0 X No test required (power from SBU).Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZC Equipment intended for operation in systems where interference-free operation is required.Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 RR High Intensity Radiated Field (HIRF) associated with normal environment.Emission of Radio Frequency Energy21.0 M Installation in areas with significant electromagnetic apertures.Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility22.0 A3J33 Equipment and wiring in moderately exposed environment in an all metal airframe.Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X No test required.Icing 24.0 X No test required.Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) 25.0 A Operation, installation and repair in an aerospace environment.Fire, Flammability 26.0 X Equipment is tested according to FAR 25 Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Airplanes, Paragraph 25.853(a) and Appendix F - Part I (a)(1)(ii) and Paragraph 25.869(a)(4) and Appendix F - Part I (a)(3).Conditions DO-160E Cat. CommentsTable B-2: Environmental Qualification Form for HLD (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system componentsB-6 Appendix B: DO-160 specifications 98-127093-HB.2.4 Rx Power SplitterPart Number: 405038A-003DO-160D string: [(A1)(F1)X]CBB[SCL]EXXXXXZXXXZ[RR]M[A3E3]XXARTCA/DO-160D Change NumbersChange Number Date of Issue Title SectionChange No. 1 Dec. 14, 2000 VibrationRadio Frequency Susceptibility8.020.0Change No. 2 June 12, 2001 Power InputAudio Frequency Conducted Susceptibility - Power Inputs16.018.0Table B-3: RTCA/DO-160D Change Numbers, Tx Coupler and Rx Power SplitterConditions DO-160D Cat. CommentsTemperature and Altitude 4.0 A1 and F1Installation in controlled temperature locations and inside or outside pressurized locations.Low Temperature 4.5.1 Min. operating low temperature: -25°CHigh Temperature 4.5.2 & 4.5.3 Max. operating high temperature: +55°CIn-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Forced cooling is not recommended.Altitude 4.6.1 Max. altitude: 55000 ftDecompression 4.6.2 Decompression at 55000 ftOverpressure 4.6.3 Overpressure at -15000 ftTemperature Variation 5.0 C Installation within controlled temperature locations: 2°/min.Humidity 6.0 B Severe humidity: 95% relative humidity at 38°C to 65°C for 240 hours. Installation within non-environmentally controlled zones.Operational Shocks and Crash Safety7.0 B Equipment tested to: Standard operational shocks and crash safety.Vibration 8.0 SCL Standard sinusoidal and random vibration: Aircraft type: Fixed wing. Turbojet, turbofan, reciprocating or turbo propeller engines.Aircraft zone: FuselageTable B-4: Environmental Qualification Form for Tx Coupler and Rx Power Splitter SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 system components98-127093-H Appendix B: DO-160 specifications B-7BBBBExplosion Proofness 9.0 EWaterproofness 10.0 X No test requiredFluids Susceptibility 11.0 X No test requiredSand and Dust 12.0 X No test requiredFungus Resistance 13.0 X No test requiredSalt Spray 14.0 X No test requiredMagnetic Effect 15.0 Z Magnetic deflection distance: < 0.3 mPower Input 16.0 X No test requiredVoltage Spike 17.0 X No test requiredAudio Frequency Conducted Susceptibility - Power Inputs18.0 X No test requiredInduced Signal Susceptibility19.0 Z Equipment intended for operation in systems where interference-free operation is requiredRadio Frequency Susceptibility20.0 RR High Intensity Radiated Field (HIRF) associated with normal environment.Emission of Radio Frequency Energy21.0 MLightning Induced Transient Susceptibility22.0 A3E3 Equipment and wiring in moderately exposed environment in an all metal airframe.Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X No test requiredIcing 24.0 X No test requiredElectrostatic Discharge (ESD)25.0 A Operation, installation and repair in an aerospace environment.Conditions DO-160D Cat. CommentsTable B-4: Environmental Qualification Form for Tx Coupler and Rx Power Splitter (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradlesB-8 Appendix B: DO-160 specifications 98-127093-HB.3 AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradlesB.3.1 2-Wire Handset and 2-Wire CradlePart Number: 405621B-THW / 405621B-THR / 405622B-THW / 405622B-THRDO-160C String: [A1X]CAB[(SMB2)(SM)(UFF1)]XXXXXXAXXXB[RR]M[A2E3]XXANote For DO-160 specifications of the AVIATOR Wireless Handset see AVIATOR Wireless Handset and Cradle Installation & Maintenance Manual (part number: 98-129600)Conditions DO-160D Cat. CommentsTemperature and Altitude 4.0 A1 Installation in controlled temperature and pressurized location.Low Temperature 4.5.1 Min. operating low temperature: -25°CHigh Temperature 4.5.2 & 4.5.3 Max. operating high temperature: +55°CIn-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X No forced cooling required.Altitude 4.6.1 Max. altitude: 55000 ftDecompression 4.6.2 Decompression at 55000 ftOverpressure 4.6.3 Overpressure test at -15000 ftTemperature Variation 5.0 C Installation within controlled temperature locations: 2°/min.Humidity 6.0 A Standard Humidity: 95% relative humidity at 38°C to 50°C for 48 hours. Installation within environmentally controlled zones.Operational Shocks and Crash Safety7.0 B Equipment tested to: Standard operational shocks and crash safety.Table B-5: Environmental Qualification Form for 2-Wire Handset and Cradle SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradles98-127093-H Appendix B: DO-160 specifications B-9BBBBVibration 8.0 S2B2 SM UFF1Standard random vibration: Aircraft type: Fixed wing. Turbojet or turbofan engines.Standard sinusoidal vibration: Aircraft type: Fixed wing. Reciprocating or turbo propeller engines.Robust Sine-on-Random vibration: Aircraft type: Helicopter. Turbojet or reciprocating engines.Aircraft zone: Instrument panel, console or equipment rack.Explosion Proofness 9.0 X No test requiredWaterproofness 10.0 X No test requiredFluids Susceptibility 11.0 X No test requiredSand and Dust 12.0 X No test requiredFungus Resistance 13.0 X No test requiredSalt Spray 14.0 X No test requiredMagnetic Effect 15.0 A Magnetic deflection distance: 0.3 m to 1 mPower Input 16.0 X No test requiredVoltage Spike 17.0 X No test requiredAudio Frequency Conducted Susceptibility18.0 X No test requiredInduced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 B Installation where interference is controlled to a tolerable level.Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 RR High Intensity Radiated Field (HIRF) associated with normal environment.Emission of Radio Frequency Energy21.0 MLightning induced Transient Susceptibility22.0 A2E3 Cable bundle test: Equipment and wiring in moderately exposed environment in an all metal airframe.Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X No test requiredConditions DO-160D Cat. CommentsTable B-5: Environmental Qualification Form for 2-Wire Handset and Cradle (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
AVIATOR 200/300/350 handsets and cradlesB-10 Appendix B: DO-160 specifications 98-127093-HIcing 24.0 X No test requiredElectrostatic Discharge (ESD) 25.0 A Operation, installation and repair in an aerospace environment.Conditions DO-160D Cat. CommentsTable B-5: Environmental Qualification Form for 2-Wire Handset and Cradle (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H C-1Appendix CCCCCSystem messages CC.1 Types of messagesThe AVIATOR 200/300/350 system announces messages in the built-in web interface of the SBU.SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of eventsC-2 Appendix C: System messages 98-127093-HC.2 List of eventsThe following list explains the events (warnings and errors) that may show in the web interface of the SBU.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation Remedy0100 00100 to 00199ERROR System data damagedImportant system data is damagedDo not use the terminal. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0210 00210 to 00219ERROR SIM module errorThe SIM interface on the terminal cannot be used.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0240 00240 to 00249ERROR Temperature sensor errorThe terminal is in danger of overheating.Do not use the terminal. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0260 00260 to 00269ERROR System error The terminal cannot communicate on the satellite network.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0300 00300 to 00309ERROR GPS module errorThe GPS module is out of function. The terminal cannot obtain a valid GPS position.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0310 0310 ERROR WLAN module errorThe WLAN access point failed initializationContact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.0330 00330 to 00339ERROR ISDN failure The ISDN interface on the terminal cannot be used.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0340 00340 to 00349ERROR 2-wire failure The Phone/Fax interface of the terminal cannot be used.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.0350 00350 to 00359ERROR AD9864 calibration data errorInternal error in the receiving part of the terminal.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.0360 00360 to 00369WARNING No antenna foundThe terminal cannot communicate with the antenna.Check antenna cable between terminal and antenna. Reboot the terminal.0370 0370 ERROR No HLD found The SBU (TT-5040A) cannot detect the HLD (TT-5016A).Check that the cable between SBU and HLD (cable W1) is correctly mounted and fulfils the requirements listed in this document. Check all connectors between SBU and HLD.Table C-1: SBU events SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of events98-127093-H Appendix C: System messages C-3CCCC0380 0380 ERROR SNMP agent initialization failedThe SNMP agent failed initializationContact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.1010 01010 to 01019WARNING Temperature too low (critical)Low ambient temperature is causing the performance of the terminal to be degraded or halted.Move the terminal to a warmer location. For information on ambient temperature limits, see the installation manual.1020 01020 to 01029WARNING Too low temperature warningLow ambient temperature is causing the performance of the terminal to be degraded or halted. The terminal will assume radio silence if the problem is in the HLD.Move the terminal to a warmer location. For information on ambient temperature limits, see the installation manual.1110 01110 to 01119WARNING Temperature too high (critical)Terminal: Critically high temperature is causing the terminal to shut down. HLD: Critically high temperature is causing the HLD to stop transmission.If possible, move the failing unit to a cooler location. For information on ambient temperature limits, see the installation manual. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.1120 01120 to 01129WARNING Too high temperature warningHigh ambient temperature is causing the performance of the terminal to be degraded or halted. If the problem is in the terminal: All PoE ports are shut down, except port 1 and the bit rate for Standard data is reduced. If the problem is in the HLD: The bit rate is reduced.Move the terminal to a cooler location. For information on ambient temperature limits, see the installation manual.1400 01400 to 01409WARNING Satellite signal lostThe AVIATOR system no longer receives a signal from the satellite.Make sure the antenna has a free line of sight to the satellite. Check the Rx cables W2 between the SBU and the HLD and W3 between the satcom antenna and the HLD.1600 01600 to 01609WARNING SOS call only The SIM card is not accepted by the network. Only emergency calls are allowed.Enter the PIN and wait for network approval. If the problem persists, contact your Airtime Provider.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of eventsC-4 Appendix C: System messages 98-127093-H1700 01700 to 01709WARNING Registration for voice failedThe AVIATOR system has not yet been allowed to register for voice services (Circuit Switched).Your SIM card may be blocked by the service provider.Contact your service provider if the problem persists.1800 01800 to 01809WARNING Registration for data failedThe AVIATOR system has not yet been allowed to register for data services (Packet Switched).Your SIM card may be blocked by the service provider.Contact your service provider if the problem persists.2900 02900 to 02909WARNING Network failed authenticationThe AVIATOR system does not accept the network as a valid BGAN network.Restart the AVIATOR system. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.3100 3100 ERROR Antenna cable loss calibration failedThe TX cable calibration between the SBU (TT-5040A) and HLD (TT-5016A) has failed.Check that the cable between SBU and HLD (cable W1) is correctly mounted and fulfills the requirements listed in this document. Check all connectors between SBU and HLD.3500 3500 ERROR 2-wire calibration failure2-wire calibration failed on the Phone/Fax interface, because of: Common mode balance error. The phone is off hook. Wires are shorted to each other or shorted to ground.Check the wires to your phone or fax. Put the phone on hook. Check the wires.3600 03600 to 03609ERROR 2-wire operational failureThe Phone/Fax interface fails to operate, for one of the following reasons: Ground shorted. Power overload. Temperature overload.Check the wires. Wait until the event is cleared; then try again. Wait until the event is cleared; then try again.3900 3900 ERROR Air link error Problems related to TX and Rx DSPs. Example: PLL out of lock.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner801D 801D WARNING Uploading firmware to antennaNew firmware is being uploaded to the antenna. The event will be cleared when upload has finished.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the event is not cleared within 5 minutes.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of events98-127093-H Appendix C: System messages C-5CCCC801F 801F WARNING Power Hold-up - the input voltage has droppedA power glitch was detected, the length of the glitch exceeds what the power supply can absorb. This event could have negative influence on ongoing connections.Check external power connection.8020 8020 ERROR Power Hold-up - the terminal has lost power for more than 200 msThe terminal has lost power for more than 200 ms.Check the external power connection.802C 802C FATAL Firmware update still fails after several retriesThe terminal was unable to upload new firmware to the HLD, even after several retries.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner802E 802E FATAL Firmware is older than current antenna versionThe firmware in the HLD is newer than expected by the terminal.Update the terminal software.802F 802F ERROR Antenna main image could not be loadedHLD failed to start up normally.Restart the terminal.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.8030 8030 FATAL Antenna could not enter main application modeHLD failed to start up normally.Restart the terminal.Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.8031 8031 ERROR Failed to enter normal operationHLD failed to start up normally.Restart the terminal. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.8035 8035 ERROR Unable to open port for HPA burst monitoringThere was an error communicating with the HLD.Restart the terminal. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner if the problem persists.8040 8040 WARNING Excessive writes to the flash memoryWrong APN name or user name/ password for a connection which is set to auto-activate.Check that the APN name, user name and password are set up correctly for your connections.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of eventsC-6 Appendix C: System messages 98-127093-H8041 8041 ERROR Flex key is missing or corruptThe license system has detected a corrupt or missing Flex Key.Re-install your Flex key. Please find your Flex key on the Certificate of Conformity (CoC) of the TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module.8042 8042 ERROR Can not read from Configuration ModuleThis error occurs when the TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module has not been inserted into the back of the TT-5040A SBU.Insert the TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module into the back of the TT-5040A SBU.8043 8043 ERROR Flash on Configuration Module corruptThe AVIATOR system has detected corrupt data on the TT-5040A-001 Configuration Module.Please contact your Cobham SATCOM partner for further assistance.8044 8044 ERROR Flash on Configuration Module is getting worn outThe Configuration Module is aging and will have less that 10% of the expected lifetime left.The Configuration Module still works but has to be replaceable in a timely manner8049 8049 WARNING Data rate reduction due to high temperatureThe bit rate of the data channel is reduced because the temperature is too high.None (if possible, provide cooling for the SBU)804A 804A WARNING Flash on Configuration Module is worn outThe Configuration Module is completely worn-out and will have to be replaced.The Configuration Module might still be operational but can fail at any time since the expected lifetime has been exceeded.804C 804C WARNING The chosen satellite is not visible at current GPS positionThe terminal is set up to use a satellite that is not visible at the current GNSS position.Enter the web interface and select SETTINGS > Satellite selection. Then select Auto to let the terminal automatically find the satellite with the best signal, or select a satellite visible from your current position.804F 804F WARNING ARINC-429 Navigational input is missing or not yet readyNone of the navigational inputs receive valid data for one of the following reasons: Wiring is broken. The navigational source is not switched on or power-on sequence takes longer time than expected.Check the wiring. Wait until power-on sequence has completed for the external navigational data source. Check if the external unit has been configured properly.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of events98-127093-H Appendix C: System messages C-7CCCC8050 8050 WARNING NRS (Mag-netometer) Calibration is missingCalibration of the TT-5006A antenna Magnetometer has not yet been done.Calibrate the TT-5006A antenna Magnetometer as described in your AVIATOR installation manual.8051 8051 WARNING NRS (Mag-netometer) Calibration was performed on different antenna than currentThe AVIATOR system has detected that the TT-5006A antenna has been replaced. This requires a new calibration of the TT-5006A antenna Magnetometer.Calibrate the TT-5006A antenna Magnetometer as described in your AVIATOR installation manual.8052 8052 ERROR HLD is operating below minimum specified temperature - TX is turned offThe temperature sensor in the HLD has detected a cooling below minimum threshold. To avoid operation outside of certified temperature range, all transmission has ceased.When the temperature of the HLD increases above the minimum temperature, the system will automatically recover and enable transmission.8054 8054 WARNING Transmission aborted due to extreme temperatureThe system stops all transmission because the temperature is critically high or critically low.None. The system must operate within the allowed temperature range to work properly. For information on ambient temperature limits, see the installation manual.8056 08056 WARNING USIM rejected The type of USIM card inserted in the terminal is not correct for your terminal.Make sure you have the correct type of USIM card.8060 8060 WARNING NAT session table fullThere are too many open connections through NAT - typically too many users generating too much web traffic.Do not establish new connections until the load has been reduced.8062 8062 WARNING No connection to network. Voice Distress unavailable.SB-Safety Voice is enabled, and the SBU could not establish contact to the satellite network within the expected time.Check that satellite selection is either Auto or a visible satellite. If problem persists, contact your service provider.8065 8065 WARNING Voice Distress Supplementary Service (eMLPP) subscription failureSB-Safety Voice is enabled, but the SBU could not register the enhanced Multi Level Priority and Preemption service on the network.Contact your service provider.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of eventsC-8 Appendix C: System messages 98-127093-H8066 8066 WARNING Voice Distress Supplementary Service (Call Waiting) subscription failureSB-Safety Voice is enabled, but the Call Waiting supplementary service is not available.Contact your service provider.8075 08075 ERROR DO-178B or DO-254 certification level is inconsistentThe system consists of mixed Level-E and Level-D units.The system is not operational. Contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.8077 8077 WARNING Multi-voice control connection config failureData write procedure failed when making a connection.Reboot the SBU or make a reset to factory default settings. If this does not help contact your Cobham SATCOM partner.8079 8079 WARNING Multi-voice control connection errorNot possible to establish connection to Multi-voice server.Check that Multi-voice is included in your airtime subscription. Check that the Multi-voice APN entered in the web interface under ADMINISTRATION > Multi-voice matches the Multi-voice APN from your airtime subscription.807C 807C WARNING Multi-voice register failedNot possible to register on the Multi-voice server.Check that Multi-voice is included in your airtime subscription. 808D 808D WARNING ACARS failed, cannot create PDP contextThe SBU cannot open ACARS PDP context.A unique PDP context is used for the transfer of ACARS data and this PDP context cannot be opened.Check with the service provider that the SBU is allowed to logon to the ACARS APN. Use the default ACARS APN name if not instructed otherwise.808E 808E WARNING ACARS failed, cannot perform DNS lookupThe SBU cannot lookup the IP address for the AGGW.The SBU has created an ACARS PDP context and tries to find the IP address for the AGGW.Use the default AGGW name if not instructed otherwise. Check with your service provider that the AGGW name is correct.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of events98-127093-H Appendix C: System messages C-9CCCC808F 808F WARNING ACARS failed, logon to AGGW rejectedThe AAGW in the SBU cannot log in to the AGGW.Check with your service provider that your SBU (IMSI and ICAO) has been registered in the AGGW. Try again later. This can be a temporary error in the AGGW.8090 8090 WARNING ACARS failed, lost contact with Ground Gateway (AGGW).The connection between AAGW and AGGW has been lost.The AAGW in the SBU has had contact with the AGGW but it has been lost. The AAGW in the SBU and AGGW on the ground can no longer communicate.This is typically a temporary problem. The signal can be lost or blocked. Try to make a normal voice call or data session. You cannot expect ACARS traffic to work if you can not make a normal voice or data call. Check if other alarms have been reported. Reboot the system.8091 8091 WARNING CMU link failureThe connection between CMU and SBU is not working.The CMU and SBU cannot communicate.Check the cabling between CMU and SBU. Check that the CMU is powered on.8092 8092 WARNING WLAN failure or power offWLAN FailureThe WLAN interface is not working. Check that the WLAN is not disabled with a discrete input (TP5).8093 8093 ERROR Selected Antenna cannot coexist with CMU/ACARS unitsMismatch between CMU and antenna configuration.The CMU interface is enabled together with an ARINC 741/781 antenna. It is not allowed since they are using the same ARINC 429 interface.Change configuration to use an antenna that does not use the ARINC 429 interface.8094 8094 WARNING Enabling ACARS Position reporting violates discrete operationMismatch between ACARS position reporting and discrete USIM.The SBU has a discrete USIM installed so that the airplane position is hidden, but at the same time can report if position reporting is enabled in ACARS.Disable position reporting in ACARS.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of eventsC-10 Appendix C: System messages 98-127093-H8095 8095 WARNING The password is too weak for ACARS Safety or 700D use. See the manual for password requirements.Administrator password too weak.The administrator password is too weak when ACARS is enabled, it creates a safety risk. The SBU is probably using the default administrator password.• Change the administrator password following the guidelines provided in Change the administrator password on page 6-72.809F 809F ERROR Aero basic config is not initialisedThe basic configuration of the system is not complete.Check the configuration in the web interface, see Configuration tasks on page 6-2.80A0 80A0 ERROR Tracking register failedThe system fails to register on the Tracking server.Check with your Airtime provider that you have registered with the correct IMSI and IMEI/ICAO address. See Tracking on page 6-54.80A2 80A2 ERROR Tracking unregisteredThe system has not yet registered on the tracking server even though tracking is enabled.Check that you have the correct IP address, port numbers and encryption key. See Tracking on page 6-54.9400 9400 ERROR Antenna failure The antenna has reported an error and may not work properly.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9401 9401 ERROR TT-5006A, Inclinometer FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the inclinometer sensor, and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9402 9402 ERROR TT-5006A, Magnetometer FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the magnetometer, and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9403 9403 ERROR TT-5006A, Motor FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the motor, and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of events98-127093-H Appendix C: System messages C-11CCCC9404 9404 ERROR TT-5006A, Motor Temperature FailureThe antenna is too hot. Try to power off the system and antenna for a longer period of time, i.e. park the airplane in the shade such that the antenna can cool down. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9405 9405 ERROR TT-5006A, Endstop Sensor FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the endstop sensor and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9406 9406 ERROR TT-5006A, Flash FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the flash test and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9407 9407 ERROR TT-5006A, SRAM FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the SRAM test and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9408 9408 ERROR TT-5006A, EEPROM FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the EEPROM test and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.9409 9409 ERROR TT-5006A, Supplied Power FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the supplied power from the SBU and the antenna is not working.Check cabling between SDU and TT5006A antenna (cable W4). Measure the voltage on the inner core of the antenna cable (cable W4), the voltage should be 28 V. Check that system is configured to a TT-5006A antenna.940A 940A ERROR TT-5006A, Floating Point FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a floating point error and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antennaEvent ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
List of eventsC-12 Appendix C: System messages 98-127093-H940B 940B ERROR TT-5006A, Flash Checksum FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the flash checksum and the antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna940C 940C ERROR TT-5006A, EEPROM Checksum FailureThe software in the TT-5006A antenna has detected a problem with the EEPROM. The antenna is not working.Try to reset the system and antenna. If the failure persists then replace the antenna.Event ID ID range Severity Description Explanation RemedyTable C-1: SBU events (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H D-1Appendix DDDDDWLAN country codes DD.1 Restrictions in WLAN useNot all countries allow full use of all channels. Also, some countries do not allow operation according to the 802.11g standard. Therefore the WLAN interface must be set up to the right country code.By default, the SBU is set up to the US country code that allows the WLAN interface to operate according to the 802.11b and 802.11g standards on the channels 1 to 11. If the equipment is used in the countries listed in Table D-1 on page D-2, the default country code “US” can be used. In other countries the country code “other countries” must be used, allowing the interface to operate only according to the 802.11b standard on channels 4-9.To set up the country code, use the WLAN page of the built-in web interface in the SBU. For further information see WLAN interface (option) on page 6-22.SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Countries where the “US” country code appliesD-2 Appendix D: WLAN country codes 98-127093-HD.2 Countries where the “US” country code appliesThe below table shows the countries in which country code “US” applies.Antigua and Barbuda Estonia Latvia SingaporeAruba El Salvador Kuwait Saudi ArabiaAustralia EU Countries Latin America Serbia and MontenegroAustria Finland Liechtenstein SloveniaBahamas France Luxembourg South AfricaBarbados Germany Malaysia South KoreaBelgium Greece Malta SpainBermuda Guam Mexico SwedenBulgaria Guatemala Morocco SwitzerlandCanada Haiti Netherlands TaiwanCayman Islands Honduras Netherlands Antilles ThailandChina Hong Kong New Zealand TurkeyColombia Hungary Norway UKCosta Rica Iceland Oman UkraineCyprus Indonesia Peru United Arab EmiratesCzech Republic Ireland Poland USDenmark Israel Portugal VenezuelaDominican Republic Italy Puerto Rico Virgin Islands / BritishEcuador Japan Romania Virgin Islands / USEgypt Jordan Russia XAaa. The two letter code XA is available for individual use and will not be allocated to countries. (ISO 3166-1, Codes for the representation of names of countries and their subdivisions – Part 1: Country codes)Table D-1: Countries that accept the country code “US” for WLAN indoor operationSB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H E-1Appendix EEEEEReferences EE.1 Applicable standards[1] IEEE Standard for Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. IEEE Std 802.3, 2000 Edition (Incorporating IEEE Std 802.3, 1998 Edition, IEEE Std 802.3ac-1998, IEEE Std 802.3ab-1999, and IEEE Std 802.3ad-2000) [Adopted by ISO/IEC and re-designated as ISO/IEC 8802-3:2000(E)].[2] ISO/IEC 8877:1992 Information technology -- Telecommunications and information exchange between systems -- Interface connector and contact assignments for ISDN Basic Access Interface located at reference points S and T[3] RTCA/DO-160D. Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment. RTCA Inc. July 29, 1997[4] RTCA/DO-160E. Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment. RTCA Inc. December 9, 2004[5] Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN). Basic User-Network Interface (UNI). ETSI EN 300 012-1 V1.2.2 (ITU I.430))[6] Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN). ISDN User Network Interfaces. ITU-T Recommendation I.420[7] ARINC 429. Mark 33 Digital Information Transfer Systems (DITS)[8] ARINC 404A. Air Transport Equipment Cases and Racking[9] CCITT Rec. G.473. Standard US DTMF Telephone[10] RTCA/DO-178B. Software Considerations in Airborne Systems and Equipment Certification, December 1, 1992[11] RTCA/DO-254. Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic Hardware, April 19, 2000[12] ARINC CHARACTERISTIC 704A. Inertial Reference System[13] ARINC CHARACTERISTIC 705. Attitude and Heading Reference System[14] ARINC CHARACTERISTIC 743A. GNSS SensorSB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Applicable standardsE-2 Appendix E: References 98-127093-H[15] ARINC CHARACTERISTIC 741P1. Aviation Satellite Communication System Part 1. Aircraft installation provisions[16] ARINC CHARACTERISTIC 781. Mark 3 Aviation Satellite Communication SystemsSB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H F-1Appendix FFFFFTT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter FF.1 IntroductionYou can use the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system on aircrafts with installed IRIDIUM satellite phones. To have the SwiftBroadband and IRIDIUM service working smoothly next to each other an Iridium Band Reject Filter must be installed between the SBU and the HLD unit.An INMARSAT Dual RF Filter (Aircell P/N P13167) must also be inserted in the antenna coax cable of the Iridium system.F.1.1 System block diagramThe following block diagrams show the location of the Iridium Band Reject Filter between the SBU and the HLD.Figure F-1: System configuration with TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter (1)$QWHQQD$9,$725V\VWHP77 $ &0 8VHU,QWHUIDFHV5[5[7[7[77$,ULGLXP%DQG5HMHFW)LOWHU7[77$+/'77$6%8SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Equipment drawingF-2 Appendix F: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter 98-127093-HF.2 Equipment drawingFigure F-2: Outline drawing: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject FilterSB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Installation98-127093-H Appendix F: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter F-3FFFFF.3 InstallationF.3.1 Mounting considerationsForced cooling is not required for the Iridium Band Reject Filter.Mount the TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter on the Tx connection between the SBU and the HLD. The filter works in both directions.• Install the Iridium Band Reject Filter in non-temperature controlled locations and inside or outside pressurized locations.• If possible mount the Iridium Band Reject Filter in a temperature controlled location to ensure optimum performance.• The Iridium Band Reject Filter has an attenuation of 1 dB, consider this during wiring.• For grounding purposes, you may remove the paint around the mounting holes of the Iridium Band Reject Filter.AVIATOR 200: Loss of W1a + loss of W1b < 16 dBAVIATOR 300 and AVIATOR 350: Loss of W1a + loss of W1b < 17 dBSafe distance to Inmarsat satcomUsing Iridium and Inmarsat satcom systems on the same aircraft will normally cause problems, because the two systems use frequency bands next to each other. The problem is that the transmit signal from the Inmarsat satcom system will overload the receiver section of the Iridium system. This is due to the fact that Iridium systems in general have no filters, Figure F-3: Wiring TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject FilterImportant:D:77$+/'77$6%873$73$;;7[0RGHPDQG'&5[0D[Pȍ ;:EG%G% DVVKRUWDVSRVVLEOH77$,ULGLXP%DQG5HMHFW)LOWHUSB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
ConfigurationF-4 Appendix F: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter 98-127093-Hwhich could ensure resilience against transmissions in adjacent bands. Appropriate filtering, in the Inmarsat and in the Iridium systems allows having both systems. The filtering reduces the impact to an acceptable minimum.The following table shows the minimum distances between the two systems for various antenna types and degrees of acceptable impact.Table F-1: Distance to IridiumProbability of interference / Distance between antennasAntenna type Very low LowLGA 1.9 m 1.3 mIGA 3 m 2 mHGA 7 m 4.5 mF.3.2 Electrical installation and wiringThe filter works in both directions. Connect it to the SBU and HLD to provide the best fit in the current installation. F.4 ConfigurationNo configuration is necessary for the TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter.F.5 SpecificationsCharacteristics SpecificationDimensions (L x W x H) 293.12 mm x 71.37 mm x 66.04 mm (11.54” x 2.81” x 2.6”)Weight 5 lbs +/- 0.5 lbs (2.28 kg +/- 0.23 kg)Mounting holes 4 x 5 mm (0.2”) diameterInsertion loss <0.1 dB at 1627.15 - 1660.5 MHzOperating TemperatureStorage Temperature-25C to +70C-55C to +85CAltitude 55000 ftEnvironmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification form inDO-160 specifications on page F-5.Table F-2: Equipment specifications for TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject FilterSB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
DO-160 specifications98-127093-H Appendix F: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter F-5FFFFF.6 DO-160 specificationsT&T Part Number: 405019ADO-160E string: [(A1)(F1)X]BAB[SCLM]EXXXXXZXXXXXXXXXAXConditions DO-160E Cat. CommentsTemperature and Altitude 4.0 A1, F1 Installation in temperature controlled areas and inside or outside pressurized locations.Low Temperature 4.5.1 & 4.5.2 Short time operating low temp.: -40°C. Min. operational temperature: -25°C.High Temperature In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.3 & 4.5.4 Short time operating high temperature: +70°C. Max. operational high temp.: +55°C.In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 X Forced cooling is not required and not recommended.Altitude 4.6.1 Max. altitude: 55000 ft.Decompression 4.6.2 Decompression at 55000 ft.Overpressure 4.6.3 Overpressure at -15000ft.Temperature Variation 5.0 B Installation within non-controlled temperature locations: 5°/min.Humidity 6.0 A Standard Humidity: 95% relative humidity at 38°C to 50°C for 48 hours. Installation within environmentally controlled zones.Operational Shocks and Crash Safety7.0 B Equipment tested to: Standard operational shocks and crash safety.Vibration 8.0 SCLM Fixed wing turbojet & turboprop/fuselage and equipment rack: Category S, Curve C, L & M.Explosion Proofness 9.0 E Not hermetically sealed equipment.Waterproofness 10.0 X No test required.Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 X No test required.Sand and Dust 12.0 X No test required.Fungus Resistance 13.0 X No test required.Table F-3: Environmental Qualification Form for Iridium Band Reject Filter SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
DO-160 specificationsF-6 Appendix F: TT-5019A Iridium Band Reject Filter 98-127093-HSalt Spray 14.0 X No test required.Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Magnetic deflection distance: < 0.3 m.Power Input 16.0 X No test required (passive device).Voltage Spike 17.0 X No test required (passive device).Audio Susceptibility 18.0 X No test required (passive device).Induced Susceptibility 19.0 X No test required.Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 X No test required.Emission of Radio Frequency Energy21.0 X No test required.Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility22.0 X No test required.Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X No test required.Icing 24.0 X No test required.Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) 25.0 A Operation, installation and repair in an aerospace environment.Fire, Flammability 26.0 X Equipment is compliant with FAR 25 Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Airplanes, Paragraph 25.853(a) and Appendix F - Part I (a)(1)(ii).Conditions DO-160E Cat. CommentsTable F-3: Environmental Qualification Form for Iridium Band Reject Filter (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H G-1Appendix GGGGGTerminal commands GG.1 Get startedG.1.1 Connect to the SBUHardware and software requirementsThe following items are required to run terminal commands:• One IBM compatible PC with an Ethernet port available.• One standard Ethernet cable. RJ-45<->RJ-45.• A suitable Telnet client. In Windows XP and previous versions of Windows, you can use the included HyperTerminal. In Windows Vista and Windows 7 you can use the included DOS-based client, but this is not optimal. A 3rd party client that supports logging to a file is recommended.Prepare the telnet clientDo as follows to set up the telnet client:1. Connect the SBU front connector to the PC Ethernet port.2. Open the Telnet client, and make a TCP/IP (winsock) connection to IP address (host) 192.168.0.1 and port 23 (default).3. Login with admin and 1234 (default) and press <Enter> a couple of times and confirm that the SBU prompt telnet:/$ appears.Option: If you need to save the output from HyperTerminal, go to the Transfer menu and select Capture text… In other clients, the menus will be different.SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Commands for troubleshooting the SBUG-2 Appendix G: Terminal commands 98-127093-HG.2 Commands for troubleshooting the SBUG.2.1 Monitor the ARINC interfaces on the SBUBelow is an example on how to get a status for the ARINC interfaces. After the debug command for getting the status report (first line, bold) the status report is shown. stat -m arincSTAT ReportModule: ARINC, Status: Ok, Message:REPORT: SHORTCONFIGURATIONPrimary Receiver : ARINC 704-7 Inertial Reference System (IRS), speed: HighSecondary Receiver: Disabled, speed: LowAntenna Modem : ARINC AMT-50/HGA-6000, speed: Split STATUS ARINC DRIVERCurrent Time : Thu Jan 01 00:00:54 1970Primary Receiver : 6 RO_6_IRS_CONNECTED Qualified Forwarding forwardingPeriods:1Secondary Receiver: 0 RO_0_NULL Await-Label Standby forwardingPeriods:0Antenna Modem : 1 RT_1_INIT Await-LabelPrimary Receiver:Label Status Error Active Age Value Name 101 No Label 422 0 0 0.000000 HDOP 150 No Label 422 0 0 00:00:00 gnss UTC Time 260 No Label 422 0 0 00/00/00 UTC Date 273 Normal 353 69 158 Self Test GNSS Sensor Status 274 Normal 353 69 158 Self Test GPIRS Status 310 Normal 353 69 158 55.794067 N Latitude 311 Normal 353 69 158 12.523041 E Longitude 312 Normal 353 69 158 0.000000 Knots Ground Speed 313 Normal 353 69 158 0.000000 Deg Track Angle True 314 Normal 353 69 158 0.000000 E True Heading 324 Normal 353 69 158 0.010986 Deg Pitch Angle 325 Normal 353 69 159 0.120850 Deg Roll Angle 336 Normal 353 69 159 -0.015625 Deg/Sec Inertial Pitch Rate 337 Normal 353 69 159 0.000000 Deg/Sec Inertial Roll Rate 361 Normal 353 69 159 167.250000 Feet Altitude Inertial 377 Plus 353 69 159 0x004 IRS (704) Equipment IdentificationDetails: 273 Satellites-Tracked:0 Visible:0 273 IRS/FMS : Present Source: Primary 273 DADC/FMS: Present Source: Primary 274 Satellites-Tracked: 0 274 Primary GPSSU Validity: Valid 274 Secondary GPSSU Validity: Valid 274 GPSSU Source: Primary 377 Source Identifier: PrimaryAntenna Modem:Label Status Error Active Age Value Name 144 No Label 0 0 0 0.000000 dB Tx Gain Antenna Status 152 No Label 0 0 0 Azimu:0 Eleva:0 Open Loop SteeringSB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Commands for troubleshooting the SBU98-127093-H Appendix G: Terminal commands G-3GGGG 350 No Label 0 0 0 Bit 25-11: 0x0 Antenna MaintenanceDetails: 144 OperationalStatus: OmnidirectionalMode SDI:ALL_CALL 144 EqId:0 TrackingMode:Open HGA/IGA LNA Status:Disabled AntennaType:HGA AntennaLocation:PORT/TOP 350 SDI: ALL_CODEErrors / Warnings NoneCOUNTERS ARINC-429: Primary Secondary Ant-Rx Ant-Txallocation 20 0 0wordsA429 6752 0 0 0discardError 0 0 0 0framingError 0 0 0parityError 0 0 0overflowError 0 0 0regStatusRead 422 0 0 FPGA Status ReadregTimeTagRead 422 0 0 FPGA TimeTag ReadregCtrlWrite 2 0 5 FPGA Control Writeinterrupt 0 0 0 FPGA Interruptreset 0 0 0 0 Debug onlyclearCounters 0 0 0 0G.2.2 Description of the status reportThe status report consists of up to seven parts:1. Report header2. ARINC driver configuration3. The overall status for the ARINC driver4. Status for the Primary ARINC Receiver5. Status for the Secondary ARINC Receiver, if configured6. Status for the ARINC Antenna modem, if configured7. Low level ARINC-429 countersBelow is a detailed description of each part of the status report.STAT ReportThe following lines are part of the standard system header, there is no information relevant for the ARINC interfaces present in the header, you may just ignore these lines:STAT Report Module: ARINC, Status: Ok, Message: REPORT: SHORT CONFIGURATIONThe configuration part is a mirror of the ARINC information already available at Set up the navigational input on page 6-44, SETTINGS > External systems of the SBU.SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Commands for troubleshooting the SBUG-4 Appendix G: Terminal commands 98-127093-HSTATUS ARINC DRIVERCurrent Time: This is the current UTC time, if available. In this example the year 1970 indicates that the UTC time not yet is available.Read the following overview information in the following way:Table G-1: Status ARINC driver, overviewInterface State number and name Status Source Source ActivationsPrimary Receiver6 RO_6_IRS_CONNECTED Lost-Label Forwarding forwardingPeriods:1Secondary Receiver0 RO_0_NULL Await-Label Standby forwardingPeriods:0Antenna Modem1 RT_1_INIT Await-LabelThe states for receivers have the following purpose:Table G-2: Purpose of the states for receiversState name DescriptionRO_0_NULL The receiver is not configured and therefore not started.RO_1_INIT The receiver is in the progress of starting up.RO_2_LOOPBACK A loop back test command has been running and a power-cycle is needed.RO_4_AHRS_CONNECTED The AHRS driver is running.RO_6_IRS_CONNECTED The IRS driver is running.The states for the antenna modem can be used for the following purpose:Table G-3: Purpose of the states for the antenna modemState name DescriptionRT_0_NULL The antenna modem is not configured and therefore not started.RT_1_INIT Awaits the BSU (Beam Steering Unit) start sending the status word.RT_2_LOOPBACK A loop back test command has been running and a power-cycle is needed.RT_3_AMT50 The ARINC AMT-50 / HGA-6000 driver is running.SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Commands for troubleshooting the SBU98-127093-H Appendix G: Terminal commands G-5GGGGStatus: This reflects the overall status considering all mandatory labels on the interface in question.Table G-4: Status for all mandatory labels on the interface in questionStatus DescriptionAwait-Label At least one mandatory label has never showed up on the interface.Lost-Label A label previously received is now missing on the interface.Unreliable May be used in the future for selecting between two channels where one of them is more degraded than the other.Degraded One or more of the labels is degraded.Evaluation All mandatory labels are operational and has to be stable for a period of time before they can be qualified.Qualified All mandatory labels are operational and this port can now be forwarded.Source:Table G-5: Status ARINC driver: SourceSource DescriptionForwarding This ARINC receiver is forwarding valid navigational date to the SBU. Forwarding means that the data on the interface is used by the system.Standby This ARINC receiver is on standby and not forwarding data to the SBU. Standby means that the data on the interface are not used by the system.Forwarding Periods: The number of periods the interface has being forwarding data to the system.RECEIVERHeader DescriptionLabel The label number in octal number system.Status Take status of the label word according to bit 30 and 31 Sign/Status Matrix. See table directly below.Error The number of 100mS interval the label has not been operational.Active The number of 100mS interval the label has been operational.Age The age of the label in ms sampled every 100 ms.Table G-6: Receiver: Header line for the table SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Commands for troubleshooting the SBUG-6 Appendix G: Terminal commands 98-127093-HThe specific label type (BCD/BNR/DISC) can be looked up in the ARINC-429 Specification.Table G-7: Status for label typesStatus BCD BNR DISC0 Plus Failure Normal1 No Data No Data No Data2 Test Test Test3 Minus Normal FailureThe underlined status is the operational state for the specific label type.Value The decoded value of the labelName The name of the label according to ARINC-429Header DescriptionTable G-6: Receiver: Header line for the table (Continued)SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H H-1Appendix HHHHHSIP setup for Wifi-enabled phones HH.1 IntroductionThe built-in PBX of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 can route VoIP calls that are terminated in the SIP server of the SBU. If you have a phone with a SIP client and WLAN interface you can connect to the SBU via WLAN and configure the SIP client in your phone to communicate with the SBU. After successful configuration you can use your phone to make calls through the AVIATOR 200/300/350 system.There are two tasks you have to do:•Connect to the WLAN interface•Set up a SIP profileH.1.1 Connect to the WLAN interfaceTo connect to the WLAN interface of the SBU, do as follows:1. Refer to the user documentation of your phone for instructions how to connect to a wireless access point.2. You can see the name of the wireless network in the web interface at SETTINGS > WLAN, SSID. The default value is the name of the system type, for example ‘AVIATOR 200’.H.1.2 Set up a SIP profileSIP telephony and SIP profilesIf your phone has an integrated SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) client you can use SIP telephony between your phone and the SBU, which has an integrated SIP server.How to set up the SIP profile in your phone depends on your subscription, the SIP server in the terminal and the network which your phone is connected to, in this case the WLAN network on board the aircraft.Where to get a SIP client applicationIf your smartphone does not have a SIP client, you can download one from one of the links below: • Apple iPhone App store (www.apple.com/iphone/from-the-app-store/)• Android Market (www.android.com/market/)Note The SIP client is a third party application. Thrane & Thrane dose not offer technical support for it.SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
IntroductionH-2 Appendix H: SIP setup for Wifi-enabled phones 98-127093-HTo setup a SIP profileSetup a SIP profile if you want to connect the SIP client of your phone to the SIP server of the terminal. You need to enter several network specific values so your phone can communicate with the SIP server.Depending on your phone, some or all of the following parameters may have to be set up in the SIP profile of your phone:• Profile name• SIP server and port• User name• Password• Codec priority• Realm• Audio configuration, Silence support User name: When connecting to the AVIATOR 200/300/350, the user name should be a local number, i.e. 05xx. This must be configured in the built-in web interface under SETTINGS > IP handsets.Password: When connecting to the AVIATOR 200/300/350, the password must match the IP Handset password entered in the web interface of the AVIATOR 200/300/350 on the page SETTINGS > IP handsets.Codec priority: The SIP client must have G.729A as highest priority codec and G.711 A-LAW as second highest priority. The G.729A codec is required for the Multi-voice option.Realm: When asked for Realm enter the serial number of the SBU.Audio configuration, Silence support enable: Set to No. The phone should not stop sending data packets even though there is silence and no one speaks.SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H Glossary-19999GlossaryGlossary 9AACARS Airborne Communications Addressing and Reporting System AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System APN Access Point Name. The Access Point Name is used by the terminal operator to establish the connection to the required destination network. ARINC Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated. A provider of transport communications and systems engineering solutions AT AT commands are used for controlling modems. AWG American Wire Gauge BBGAN Broadband Global Area Network, simultaneous voice and broadband data BITE Built-In Test Equipment. A BITE error is a hardware error detected by the automatic error detection system in the AVIATOR 700 System. BSU Beam Steering Unit CCID Context Identifier CM Configuration Module CMU Communications Management Unit CPDLC Controller-Pilot Data Link Communications, a method for air traffic controllers to communicate with pilots over a datalink system. , , DdB decibel , DC Direct Current DCE Data Communication Equipment. Equipment that does not generate data, but only relays data generated by someone else. DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network. With dynamic addressing, a device can have a different IP address every time it connects to the network. DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency. The signal to the phone company that is generated when you press an ordinary telephone’s touch keys. DTMF has generally replaced loop disconnect (pulse) dialing. EECS Electronic Cable Specialists, Inc., a Carlisle IT company SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
GlossaryGlossary-2 98-127093-HEIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility eMLPP enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute FFAA Federal Aviation Administration FNBDT Future Narrowband Digital Terminal. A US Government standard for secure voice communication. GGlonass GLObal’naya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema, Global Navigation Satellite System in English GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System GPS Global Positioning System HHLD High Power Amplifier, Low Noise Amplifier and Diplexer in one unit II/O Input/Output IAI-2 Inmarsat Air Interface-2. The air interface used for BGAN. IAI-2 is an evolution of MPDS with new bearer types, which give a wide range of data rates from 16 kbps up to 492 kbps. By utilizing different modulation schemes, variable coding rate and power adjustment, it is possible to change the bearer type to give optimum throughput with efficient use of the satellite resources. ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization ICG International Communications Group IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity. A unique number identifying your terminal IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity IP Internet Protocol IP Internet Protocol, used for communicating data across a packet-switched internetwork. IRS Inertial Reference System ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISP Internet Service Provider ITU International Telecommunication Union SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Glossary98-127093-H Glossary-39999LLAN Local Area Network LED Light Emitting Diode LGA Low Gain Antenna , LLC Limited Liability Company LRU Line Replaceable Unit. A separate unit or module which can easily be replaced. Examples are the SDU and the HPA. MMIB Management Information Base MOD Modification MSN Multiple Subscriber Numbering. In most pieces of ISDN equipment you can program multiple subscriber numbers. The number programmed into the equipment should be the dial-in number that you wish that piece of equipment to answer. NNAT Network Address Translation. An Internet standard that enables a local-area network to use one set of IP addresses for internal traffic and a second set of addresses for external traffic. A NAT module makes all necessary address translations. NC No Connect nON Power-on control signal, active low NPI Navigation Position Information, a Thrane abbreviation NRS Navigation Reference System NT Network Termination. A device connecting the customer’s data or telephone equipment to the local ISDN exchange carrier’s line. It provides a connection for terminal equipment (TE) and terminal adaptor (TA) equipment to the local loop. PPAST Person Activated Self Test PBX Private Branch Exchange, telephone exchange that serves a particular business or office. PC Personal Computer PDF Portable Document Format, a file format created by Adobe Systems for document exchange PDP Packet Data Protocol. A network protocol used by external packet data networks that communicate with a GPRS network. POST Power On Self Test. A system test that is activated each time the system is powered on. POTS Plain Old Telephone Service PS Packet switched SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
GlossaryGlossary-4 98-127093-HQQoS Quality of Service SSAL System Address Level SATCOM Satellite Communications SB Swift Broadband, based on BGAN and offers similar services, simultaneous voice and broadband data. SBU SwiftBroadband Unit. Unit in the system providing access to the aeronautical BGAN service, SwiftBroadband. SDU Service Data Unit. Also known as a data packet. SIM Subscriber Identity Module SIP Session Initiation Protocol. An application-layer control (signaling) protocol for creating, modifying, and terminating sessions with one or more participants. Used e.g. for Internet telephony. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. An Internet-standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks. It is used mostly in network management systems to monitor network-attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention. SSA Security Safety Analysis , , SSID Service Set IDentifier. An SSID is the name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices on a WLAN must use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. STC Supplemental Type Certificate. FAA or EASA certification document issued to companies that perform significant modifications on an aircraft. STE Secure Terminal Equipment STU Secure Telephone Unit TTE Terminal Equipment TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. A very simple file transfer protocol, with the functionality of a very basic form of FTP. Since it is so simple, it is easy to implement in a very small amount of memory. TP Top Plug WWLAN Wireless Local Area Network SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-H Index-110101010IndexIndex 10Numerics2-Wire Cradleconnector functions, 4-11DB9 male connector, 4-11Environmental Qualification Form, B-8outline drawing, 3-9specifications, A-72-Wire HandsetEnvironmental Qualification Form, B-8outline drawing, 3-8specifications, A-72-wire interfacesetting call type, 6-24AAAGWsetup, 6-51about this manual, 1-1ACARSpassword requirements, 6-72setup, 6-51wiring, 5-28Access Point Name, 6-27activationSIM card, 5-50additional numbersdescription, 6-92enter, 6-16addressmanufacturer, -iiadministration settings, 6-71administration, remote, 6-89administratorlog off, 6-74log on, 6-72password, reset, 6-74administrator passwordrequirements, 6-72advanced configurationWLAN, 6-22AFISwiring, 5-28AGGWsetup, 6-51AHRSnavigational input, 5-4wiring, 5-25AHRS/GPS, 5-4air interfacestatus, 7-16AirCell Axxesscontact information, 2-13aircraftinterfaces, 4-6mating connectors, 4-12airtime services, 5-50Airworthiness, Continued, 7-1AIS 380 Aircraft Interface Module, 2-13, 4-7, 6-51wiring, 5-17alarmslog, 7-16view, 7-16AMT-3800wiring, 5-20annunciatorsdefault setting, 4-5wiring, 5-42antennaconnectors, 4-9Glonass distance, 5-6GPS distance, 5-6mounting, 5-4supported types, 2-9systems, 2-4viewing properties, 6-17viewing status, 6-12viewing type, 6-12, 7-16wiring, 5-10antenna steering, 5-4antenna upgrade, 6-40APN, 5-50common, 6-27setup, 6-27, 6-28ARINCstat command, G-2stat report, G-2ARINC 404connectors, 4-1ARINC 429wiring, 5-25ARINC sources, 6-45SB-Lite.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
IndexIndex-2 98-127093-Hassigned numbers, 6-92assistance, telephone number, 7-1AT commands, 6-88ATE pins, 5-46automatic test equipment pins, 5-46AVIATOR Wireless Handsetconnect, 6-34setup, 6-35setup call types, 6-36Bbackup.configuration, 6-75barring calls, 6-30bit error ratio, 6-81bit ratesstreaming class, 2-3block diagrams, 2-14Broadcast SSID, 6-23browser settingsfor web interface, 6-9browsers supported, 6-6buttonsPush To Test, 7-11Ccable loss, 6-43antenna system, 5-23RF cables, 5-10WLAN, 5-36cable specificationSBU maintenance connector, 4-2cablesallowed lengths for power, 5-47ARINC 429, 5-29ARINC 429, recommended types, 5-49discrete signals, 5-50Ethernet, 5-49Ethernet, recommended, 5-49ISDN, requirements, 5-37maximum length for HLD, 5-47maximum length, SBU to HLD, 5-49maximum length, WLAN, 5-49power, recommended types, 5-48recommended, 5-47RF, general requirements, 5-6RF, recommended types, 5-48SBU power supply, 5-10WLAN, max. length, 5-49calibrationanalysis, 6-48magnetometer, turn radius, 6-48NRS, 6-46calibration proceduremagnetometer, 6-47call chargescalls, 6-77call limiting, 6-91call logclear, 6-78Call output, 6-38call typesetting for AVIATOR Wireless Handset, 6-36setting for ISDN, 6-26setting for Phone/Fax interface, 6-24callsbarring, 6-30closed user group, 6-33forwarding, 6-29line identification, 6-32ongoing, 7-17viewing ongoing, 6-13waiting indication, 6-31chargescalls, 6-77data sessions, 6-77Chime/Lamps Inhibitconfiguration, 6-37wiring, 5-42Circuit breakerspecifications, 2-11circuit breaker, 5-10Class 15services, 2-3, 6-91Class 6services, 2-3, 6-91Class 7services, 2-3, 6-91clearing logs, 6-78clearing usage counter, 6-78closed user group, 6-33CMDO-160 form, B-4Environmental Qualification Form, B-4CMU support, 6-51CMU, wiring, 5-28CMU/ACARS, 2-5configuration, 6-51Coax, 5-8Cockpit reserve, 6-95SB-Lite.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Index98-127093-H Index-310101010common network settings, 6-27configurationcable losses, 6-43discrete I/O, 6-38exporting to file, 6-75importing from file, 6-76input of navigational systems, 6-44ISDN, 6-25LAN, 6-19phone systems, 6-99phone, fax, 6-24step-by-step, 6-7upload, 6-76web interface, 6-2WLAN, 6-22configuration dataenter, 2-4, 6-6Configuration Module, 2-4configuration of SBUbackup, 6-75connectAVIATOR Wireless Handset, 6-34connectionstandard data, 6-14start or stop, 6-14connectors, 4-12-Wire Cradle, 4-11antenna, 4-9ARINC 404, 4-1Configuration Module, 4-1HLD, 4-9Maintenance front, 4-1mating, in aircraft, 4-12part number, 2-12SBU front, 4-1SBU rear receptacle, 4-3contactaddress, -iicontact information, 7-3AirCell Axxess, 2-13ICG DECT Cordless Handset, 2-12Sigma7 handset, 2-13Switch Annunciator panel, 2-13Continued Airworthiness, 7-1cooling requirements, 5-3counter reset, 6-78Countryselecting for WLAN, 6-23country codeWLAN, default, D-1WLAN, US, D-2Ddashboard, 6-12dataprofiles, 6-78traffic flow filters, 6-82data limits, 6-78data sessionscost, 6-77viewing ongoing, 6-13debug commandARINC, G-2default button, 7-14default netmask, 7-15defect units, 7-1DHCP, 6-19no router option, single user, 6-19DHCP request, 6-14diagnostic report, 7-3, 7-18dimensionsHLD, A-3, A-4, A-5SBU, A-2direct diallocal phone, 6-34disableWLAN, 6-22, 6-24discrete I/Oconfiguration, 6-38discretestypes and description, 5-44wiring, 5-42DO-160 forms, B-12-Wire Handset and Cradle, B-8CM, B-4HLD, B-4Iridium Band Reject Filter, F-5SBU, B-2drawings, 3-12-Wire Cradle, 3-92-Wire Handset, 3-8HPA Tray, 3-11Rx Power Splitter, 3-4SBU, 3-2SBU Tray connector, 3-13SDU Tray, 3-11Switch Annunciator Panel, 3-17Eelectrical installation, 5-8SB-Lite.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
IndexIndex-4 98-127093-Henable, 6-22WLAN, 6-22encryption key, 6-23Environmental Qualification Forms, B-12-Wire Handset and Cradle, B-8CM, B-4HLD, B-4Iridium Band Reject Filter, F-5SBU, B-2error codes, C-1error correction for data packets, 6-81Ethernet interfacesetting up, 6-19Eval.Prec. Index, 6-83eventslist of, C-2list of active, 7-16exchanging units, 7-1exporting configuration, 6-75extended status, 7-4, 7-16external access, 6-89External systems, 6-45Ffactory settings, 7-15Fail/Pass LED, SBU, 7-12features, 2-7FLEX key sequence, 6-53forwarding calls, 6-29front connectorSBU, 4-1GGlonass antennadistance from antenna, 5-6GNSS, 5-4, 5-5, 5-25ARINC data format, 5-27GPS antenna, 5-2, 5-4, 6-45cable loss, 5-30distance from antenna, 5-6gain, 5-30input, 4-6interference, 5-6wiring, 5-29ground speed, 5-26groundingHLD, 5-3Hhandset contexts for Multi-voice, 6-92handsetsAVIATOR Wireless, configuration, 6-34initial configuration, 6-99wiring, 5-37header compression, 6-65heading, 5-26magnetic, 5-26Heading Offset, 6-43help desk number, 7-3changing in web interface, 7-3helpdesktelephone number, 7-1HGAservices, 2-3, 6-91High Gain Antenna, 2-3, 6-91HLDcable length, 5-47connectors, 4-9cooling, 5-3dimensions, A-3, A-4, A-5DO-160 form, B-4Environmental Qualification Form, B-4grounding, 5-3location in aircraft, 5-3mounting, 5-3specifications, A-3hotlinetelephone number, 7-1IIAIair interface status, 7-16ICG DECT Cordless Handsetcontact information, 2-12initial configuration, 6-99wiring (2-wire), 5-41IDSBU software, 7-8IGAservices, 2-3, 6-91IMEI number, 6-12importing configuration, 6-76IMSI number, 5-51inoperative units, 7-1inputGPS antenna, 4-6SB-Lite.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Index98-127093-H Index-510101010installation kitcontact information, 2-12part number, 2-12installation kitssupplier, 5-1interfaceSNMP, 6-71WLAN, disable, 6-24interface for software upgrades, 4-2interfaces, 5-1user, 2-19interferenceGPS antenna, 5-6Iridium, F-4Intermediate Gain Antenna, 2-3, 6-91IP address, 7-14default, 7-14external, setting up, 6-61for connected device, 6-62for web interface, 6-8local, setting up, 6-20local, viewing, 6-12reset, 7-14IP connectionmonitoring, 6-90IP handsetsetting call type, 6-36setting up, 6-34Iridiumdistance to Inmarsat antenna, F-4interference, F-4Iridium Band Reject Filter, F-1DO-160 form, F-5Environmental Qualification Form, F-5equipment drawing, F-2mounting, F-3specifications, F-4IRIDIUM filter, 2-6, F-1, H-1IRS, 5-4navigational input, 5-4, 6-44wiring, 5-25ISDNcable requirements, 5-37interface description, 5-37pins, 5-36setup, 6-25wiring, 5-36ISDN interfacesetting up, 6-25ISDN routingphone, fax and data, 5-38Llamp driver interfacespecifications, 5-44LANmanaging network users, 6-57setting up interface, 6-19setup, 6-19LAN communication, 6-14LEDs on SBUFail/Pass, 7-12Logon, 7-12Maintenance connector, 7-13Power, 7-12system ready, 6-100LGAservices, 2-3, 6-91limit calls, 6-91limitingdata services, 6-78streaming, 6-78line identification, 6-32link monitoring, 6-90local exchange, 6-34Multi-voice, 6-34locationHLD non-temperature controlled, 5-3SBU temperature controlled, 5-3log offadministrator, 6-74log onadministrator, 6-72Logon LEDon SBU, 7-12logs, clearing, 6-78Low Gain Antenna, 2-3, 6-91low pass filter, 5-34WLAN, order information, 5-35MMAC address, 6-12magnetdistance from, for IGA, 5-6magnetic environment, 5-5, 5-6calibration, 6-46magnetometercalibration analysis, 6-48calibration procedure, 6-47magnetometer calibrationturn radius, 6-48SB-Lite.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
IndexIndex-6 98-127093-HMaintenance connectorfunctional description, 4-2LED, 7-13PC and Reset, wiring, 5-45pin-out, 4-2Maintenance interfacepin allocation, 5-46manufactureraddress, -iimenu tree, 6-7messages, C-1MIB files, 6-71minimum setupSBU, 6-2minimum systemdrawing, 5-2mobile numbersviewing and editing, 6-15model numbers, applicable, 2-9monitoring external IP connection, 6-90mounting considerations, 5-3antenna, 5-4HLD, 5-3Iridium Band Reject Filter, F-3magnetic environment, 5-6SBU, 5-3WLAN antenna, 5-7MSN number, 6-26Multi-voice, 2-5, 6-16, 6-95additional numbers, 6-92additional numbers, assign to 2-wire, 6-25additional numbers, assign to AVIATOR Wireless Handset, 6-36additional numbers, assign to ISDN, 6-26handset contexts, 6-92local exchange, 6-34number of calls, 2-3NNAT, 6-66NAV sourcewiring, 5-25navigation in web interface, 6-9navigational input, 6-44AHRS/IRS, 5-4enter in configuration, 6-44Heading Offset, 6-43IRS in SBU, 6-44Pitch Offset, 6-43Roll Offset, 6-43SBU, 6-6wiring, 5-25netmaskdefault, 7-15Network Address Translation, 6-66network management, 6-57network termsdefinitions, 6-65NPI, 5-4, 5-5, 5-25ARINC data format, 5-27NRS, 5-4calibration, 6-46minimum distance for magnetic interference, 5-6OoptionsFLEX keys, 6-53outline drawings, 3-1Ppackaging for return, 7-19part numberinstallation kit, 2-12part numbers, 2-9connector, 2-12installation kit, 2-12passwordsafety requirements, 6-72password requirementsACARS, 6-72PAST, 7-11PC, Maintenancewiring, 5-45PDP context, 6-14permissionsuser, 6-87Person Activated Self Test, 7-11phone book, 6-15phone numbers for terminal, 6-15SB-Lite.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Index98-127093-H Index-710101010Phone/Faxsetup, 6-24Phone/Fax interfacesetting call type, 6-24phonebooklimit calls to, 6-91phoneswiring, 5-37PINadministration PIN, 6-72ping command from SBU, 6-90pin-out, 4-12-Wire Cradle, DB9 connector, 4-11ISDN, 5-36Maintenance interface, 5-46SBU front connector, 4-2SBU rear receptacle, 4-7, 4-8pitch angle, 5-26Pitch Offset, 6-43pitch rate, 5-26port forwarding, 6-20POST, 7-11POTS interfaceconfiguration, 5-38power cables, 5-10recommended, 5-48Power LEDon SBU, 7-12Power On Self Test, 7-11power splitterDO-160 string, B-6equipment drawing, 3-4specifications, A-5PPPoEconnection, 6-67network connections, 6-68setup, 6-68setup equipment, 6-68PPPoE setupnon-default APN, 6-69profiles for data transmission, 6-78propertiesantenna, 6-17system, 6-12protectchange of SBU setup, 6-87protectionSBU setup, 6-71protocol number, 6-84provisioning, 5-50Proxy server, disabling, 6-9Push To Test button, 7-11QQoS, 6-79Quadrax connectorwiring, 5-33Quality of Service, 6-79quick startSBU, 6-2Rrear receptacleSBU pin-out, 4-7, 4-8reboot, 6-18, 7-17references, E-1remote controlSBU, 6-90remote management, 6-89Repackaging requirements, 7-19repair, 7-1returning units, 7-19reportsdistance, 6-54interval, 6-54position, 6-54server connection, 6-54Resetwiring, 5-45resetdefault IP-address, 7-14during self test, 7-17password, 6-74reset administrator password, 6-74reset time counter for calls, 6-78reset to factory settings, 7-15residual bit error ratio, 6-81restricted dialing, 6-36, 6-91returning units, 7-19RF cable requirementsWLAN, 5-35RF settingsSBU, 6-43roll angle, 5-26Roll Offset, 6-43roll rate, 5-26router optionlimit when not available, 6-7limits in single user mode, 6-19SB-Lite.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
IndexIndex-8 98-127093-HRS-232 Maintenancewiring, 5-45RTCA DO-160 forms, B-1Rx Power Splitteroutline drawing, 3-4specifications, A-5Ssatcom antennacable loss, 5-23satcom antennas, 2-4satelliteview selected, 6-13SB-Safety Voicelimitations, 6-56setup, 6-55SBUconfiguration backup, 6-75cooling, 5-3dimensions, A-2DO-160 form, B-2Environmental Qualification Form, B-2front connector, 4-1front connector, pin-out, 4-2location in aircraft, 5-3maximum cable length, 5-49mounting, 5-3outline drawing, 3-2power cables, 5-10protect for setup change, 6-87quick start, 6-2rear receptacle, 4-3remote control, 6-90software version, 7-5specifications, A-2Tray connector, outline drawing, 3-13SBU Enable, 5-43SBU Failed, 5-42, 6-37SBU nON, 5-43SBU nOnremote on/off, 5-43SBU setupprotection, 6-71SBU software ID, 7-8SDU and HPA Trayoutline drawing, 3-11security keywireless network, 6-23self test, 7-17serial number, 6-12server connectionreports, 6-54Service Available, 6-37service log, 7-18servicessupplementary, 6-25services available, 2-3sessionsongoing, 7-16SETTINGS page, 6-17setup, 5-50AVIATOR Wireless Handset, 6-35SBU minimum, 6-2show number, 6-32Sigma7 handsetcontact information, 2-13Sigma7 handsetsinitial configuration, 6-99wiring, 5-40SIM card activation, 5-50SIM default, 6-28SIM Lock, 6-85SIM PIN, 6-85single user, 6-19single-user mode, 6-19SIP clientwhere to get, H-1SIP profile, H-1SIP setup, H-1SIP telephony, 5-37site map, 6-98SMS controlSBU, 6-90SNMP, 6-71softwareviewing version, 6-12software identificationSBU label, 7-8software update, 7-5software upgradesinterface, 4-2software versionminimum, 7-5SB-Lite.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
Index98-127093-H Index-910101010specifications, A-12-Wire Cradle, A-72-Wire Handset, A-7circuit breaker, 2-11HLD, A-3Iridium Band Reject Filter, F-4Rx Power Splitter, A-5SBU, A-2WLAN antenna, A-5Splitteroutline drawing, 3-4specifications, A-5SSID, 6-23standards, applicable, E-1start connection, 6-14static IP addressdevice connected to SBU, 6-19static route, 6-70statusair interface, 7-16connection, 7-16extended, 7-16ongoing calls and data sessions, 6-13viewing, 6-12status information, 7-4streaming, 2-3limit, 6-78streaming classbit rates, 2-3streaming classes, 2-3streaming rates, 2-3supplementary servicessetting up, 6-25supportcontact details, 7-1contact information, 7-3phone numbers, 7-1Switch Annunciator Panelcontact information, 2-13outline drawing, 3-17wiring, 5-44system drawingminimum, 5-2system messages, C-1system ready, 6-100system type, 6-39change, 6-40upgrade, 6-42system, minimum, 2-9Ttariffs, 6-77telephone interfacesetting call type, 6-24temperature controlledHLD, non, 5-3SBU, 5-3time connected, 6-78time countercalls, reset, 6-78total usageviewing, 6-13track angle, 5-26tracking, 6-54traffic class, 6-80traffic flow filters, 6-82Transfer delay, 6-81troubleshooting, 7-11diagnostic report, 7-3TT-3002A LGAwiring, 5-11TT-5006A-IGAwiring, 5-12turn radiuscalibration, 6-48Uupdating software, 7-5upgrade, 6-42new antenna, 6-40upload configuration, 6-76usage counter, 6-13clearing, 6-78user interfaces, 2-19user permissions, 6-87setup, 6-87Vversion of software, 6-12voice mail numberviewing, 6-17voice qualitysetting for IP handsets, 6-36setting for ISDN, 6-26setting for Phone/Fax interface, 6-24VoIP, 5-37SB-Lite.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
IndexIndex-10 98-127093-HWwaiting calls, 6-31warranty, 7-19web interfaceaccessing, 6-6browser settings, 6-9configuration, 6-2menu tree, 6-7navigating, 6-9Wifiencryption key, 6-23name, 6-23Wireless Handset, 6-34wireless LAN interfacesetting up, 6-22wireless local area networkname, 6-23wiring, 5-1, 5-8ACARS, 5-28AFIS, 5-28AHRS and IRS, 5-25AIS Aircraft Interface Module, 5-17AMT-3800, 5-20AMT-50, 5-18annunciators, 5-42antenna, 5-10ARINC 429 interfaces, 5-25Chime/Lamps Inhibit, 5-42CMA-2102SB, 5-22CMU, 5-28data cable for front connector, 5-45discrete annunciators, 5-42GPS antenna, 5-29HGA-6000 or HGA-6500, 5-13HGA-7000, 5-16, 5-17, 5-19, 5-21HGA-8000, 5-21ICG DECT Cordless Handset (2-wire), 5-41IGA-5001, 5-21Iridium Band Reject Filter, F-4ISDN, 5-36Maintenance PC and Reset, 5-45NAV source, 5-25phones and handsets, 5-37Quadrax connector, 5-33Sigma7 handsets, 5-40Switch Annunciator Panel, 5-44symbols, 5-8TT-3002A LGA, 5-11TT-5006A IGA, 5-12WLAN antenna, 5-34wiring symbolCoax, 5-8Ground, 5-8Shield, 5-8Twisted and shielded, 5-8WLANcable loss, 5-36cable, max. length, 5-49country code, 6-23disable, 6-22, 6-24enable, 6-22encryption key, 6-23interface description, 5-35interface, setting up, 6-22low pass filter, 5-34maximum cable length, 5-49RF cable requirements, 5-35setup, 6-22single antenna, 5-35WLAN antennamounting, 5-7recommended type, 5-7specifications, A-5wiring, 5-34WLAN Enable, 5-43SB-Lite.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 5, 2017 1:38 PM
98-127093-Hwww.cobham.com/satcom98-127093-G Cover_Installation manual AVIATOR 200-300-350.indd 4 03-07-2013 15:19:18

Navigation menu